Service Manual: DSR-50/50P
Uploaded by
Константин ЯминскийService Manual: DSR-50/50P
Uploaded by
Константин ЯминскийDSR-50/50P
SERVICE MANUAL US Model
Canadian Model
DSR-50
AEP Model
Ver 1.0 2000. 09 UK Model
E Model
Australian Model
New Zealand Model
DSR-50P
R MECHANISM
SPECIFICATIONS
System Inputs Outputs
Recording format DVCAM/DV (SP) format, rotating VIDEO/REF.IN BNC type VIDEO OUT1 BNC type, 1 Vp-p (75 ohms,
2-head helical scan, digital 1 Vp-p (75 ohms, unbalanced) unbalanced) (superimpose)
component recording S VIDEO IN Mini DIN 4-pin VIDEO OUT2 BNC type, 1 Vp-p (75 ohms,
Video signal Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p unbalanced)
DSR-50: EIA STANDARD, NTSC color (75 ohms, unbalanced) COMPONENT OUTPUT
system Chrominance signal: Y: BNC type
DSR-50P: CCIR STANDARD, PAL colour 0.286 Vp-p (DSR-50) 1 Vp-p (75 ohms, unbalanced)
system 0.3 Vp-p (DSR-50P) R-Y: BNC type
(75 ohms unbalanced) 0.7 Vp-p (75 ohms, unbalanced)
Video DV IN/OUT 6-pin IEEE-1394 standard jack (DSR-50: 75%, color bars / DSR-
Quantification 8-bit (i.LINK) 50P: 100%, colour bars)
Standardization frequency AUDIO INPUT (CH-1 to CH-4) B-Y: BNC type
DSR-50: 13.5 MHz (4:1:1 Component) XLR 3-pin, female, +4/–20/ 0.7 Vp-p (75 ohms, unbalanced)
DSR-50P: 13.5 MHz (4:2:0 Component) –60 dBu, Impedance more than (DSR-50: 75%, color bars / DSR-
3 kohms, balanced (48 V 50P: 100%, colour bars)
Audio phantom power supply) S VIDEO OUT Mini DIN 4-pin
Quantification 12-bit (non-linear) or 16-bit Maximum input level Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p
(linear) –60: –19 dBu (about 90 mVrms) (75 ohms, unbalanced)
Standardization frequency –20: +8 dBu (about 2 Vrms) Chrominance signal:
32 kHz (12-bit recording) or +4: +30 dBu (about 25 Vrms) 0.286 Vp-p (DSR-50)
48 kHz (16-bit recording) CAMERA 26-pin 0.3 Vp-p (DSR-50P)
Usable cassettes Standard-DVCAM cassettes and Composite: 1 Vp-p (75 ohms, (75 ohms, unbalanced)
Mini-DVCAM cassettes unbalanced) AUDIO OUTPUT (CH-1 to CH-4)
Recording time Standard cassette Component: Phono jack, –10 dBu, 47 kohms,
DVCAM: 184 minutes (PDV184) Y: 1 Vp-p (75 ohms, unbalanced) Output impedance: less than
180 minutes (DV270) B-Y: 0.7 Vp-p (75 ohms, 1 kohms
DV: 270 minutes (PDV184/ unbalanced) (DSR-50: –20 dB from full bit /
DV270) (DSR-50: 75%, color bars / DSR- DSR-50P: –18 dB from full bit)
Mini cassette 50P: 100%, colour bars) AUDIO MONITOR OUT
DVCAM: 40 minutes (PDVM40/ R-Y: 0.7 Vp-p (75 ohms, Phono jack
DVM60) unbalanced) TC OUT BNC type, 2.2 Vp-p, 600 ohms /
DV: 60 minutes (PDVM40/ (DSR-50: 75%, color bars / DSR- 1.2 Vp-p, 75 ohms
DVM60) 50P: 100%, colour bars) 0.5 to 4 Vp-p (through output,
(We recommend that you use the Audio: –20/–60 dBu, Impedance 600 ohms)
DVCAM cassettes.) more than 3 kohms, balanced
TC IN BNC type
Clock 0.5 to 18 Vp-p (time code input)
Quartz locked 0.5 to 4 Vp-p (through output)
– Continued on next page –
Power back-up Back-up duration: up to one month
(after a 10-hour charge)
PORTABLE DIGITAL VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER
http://getMANUAL.com
PHONES Stereo phone jack
–∞ to –19 dBu, adjustable
DC IN 12V XLR 4-pin, male, 12 V
Control
CONTROL Stereo mini-minijack
289 (11 1/2)
REMOTE Stereo minijack
(Edge High, Edge Low, Level
High, Level Low) (Tally)
CONTROL S Stereo minijack
General
Power requirements
DC12 to 17 V, more than 2.0 A
22 (7/8)
247 (9 3/4)
(4.0 A at the peak)
Power consumption
92.5 (3 3/4)
15 W (during playback)
Operating temperature
5 °C to 40 °C
(41 °F to 104 °F) 183.3 (7 1/4)
279 (11)
Storage temperature
–20 °C to +60 °C Unit: mm (inches)
(–4 °F to +140 °F)
Dimensions Approx. 279 × 99 × 315 mm Mass Approx. 3.9 kg (8 lb 10 oz)
(11 × 4 × 12 1/2 inches) Supplied accessories
(w/h/d, including projecting parts LCD protection board (1)
and controls) (installed at the factory)
Cleaning cassette (1)
Operating instructions (1)
Design and specifications are subject to change
without notice.
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT
À LA SÉCURITÉ!
COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED
LINE WITH MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFIÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0
AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE SUR LES DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE
OPERATION. REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH DES PIÈCES SONT CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ
SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE REMPLACER CES COM-
SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUB- POSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈCES SONY DONT LES
LISHED BY SONY. NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU
DANS LES SUPPLÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem, perform the following
safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.
1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-sol- 5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.
dered connections. Check the entire board surface for solder 6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing
splashes and bridges.
• Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270 ˚C
2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are during repairing.
“pinched” or contact high-wattage resistors.
• Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of
3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly transis- the circuit board (within 3 times).
tors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point them
• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when sol-
out to the customer and recommend their replacement.
dering or unsoldering.
4. Look for parts which, though functioning, show obvious signs
of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and recom-
mend their replacement.
–2–
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page Section Title Page
SERVICE NOTE ................................................................ 6 4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ..................................... 4-1
1. Note for Repair ............................................................ 6
4-1. Frame Schematic Diagram (1/2) ................................. 4-3
Frame Schematic Diagram (2/2) ................................. 4-5
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ..................................... 7 4-2. Printed Wiring Boards and Schematic Diagrams ....... 4-7
• RP-234 Printed Wiring Board ................................ 4-7
1. Self-diagnosis Function ............................................... 7 • RP-234 (REC/PB AMP 1) Schematic Diagram ..... 4-11
2. Self-diagnosis Display ................................................. 7 • RP-234 (REC/PB AMP 2) Schematic Diagram ..... 4-13
3. Service Mode Display ................................................. 7 • JC-20 Printed Wiring Board ................................... 4-15
4. Self-diagnosis Code Table .......................................... 8 • JC-20 (VIDEO PB AMP) Schematic Diagram ....... 4-19
• JC-20 (VIDEO A/D CONVERTER)
Schematic Diagram ................................................ 4-21
• JC-20 (CHROMA MIX) Schematic Diagram .......... 4-23
1. GENERAL
• JC-20 (AFC) Schematic Diagram .......................... 4-25
• JC-20 (VFD (VIDEO DSP, D/A CONVERTER))
Features ................................................................................ 1-1
Schematic Diagram ................................................ 4-27
Location and Function of Parts ............................................. 1-1
• JC-20 (SFD) Schematic Diagram .......................... 4-29
Power Preparations ............................................................... 1-7
• JC-20 (TFD) Schematic Diagram .......................... 4-31
Connections ........................................................................... 1-8
• JC-20 (DV INTERFACE) Schematic Diagram ....... 4-33
Notes on Video Cassettes ..................................................... 1-9
• IL-013 Printed Wiring Board
Recording .............................................................................. 1-10
and Schematic Diagram ......................................... 4-34
Playback ................................................................................ 1-12
• JC-20 (MECHANISM CONTROL 1)
Setting the Time Code and User Bits .................................... 1-13
Schematic Diagram ................................................ 4-35
Synchronizing the Time Codes ............................................. 1-14
• JC-20 (MECHANISM CONTROL 2)
Adjusting the Sync and Subcarrier Phases
Schematic Diagram ................................................ 4-37
of the Video Signals ............................................................... 1-15
• JC-20 (MODE CONTROL) Schematic Diagram .... 4-39
Adjusting the Signals ............................................................. 1-16
• JC-20 (AUDIO 1) Schematic Diagram ................... 4-41
Duplication (Generating a Work Tape
• JC-20 (AUDIO 2) Schematic Diagram ................... 4-43
with the Same Time Code) .................................................... 1-16
• JC-20 (POWER SUPPLY) Schematic Diagram ..... 4-45
Audio Dubbing ....................................................................... 1-17
• DI-73 Printed Wiring Board .................................... 4-47
Operating the Menus ............................................................. 1-18
• DI-73 (VIDEO D/A CONVERTER)
Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 1-22
Schematic Diagram ................................................ 4-51
Alarm Messages .................................................................... 1-22
• DI-73 (VIDEO FIFO MEMORY)
Notes on Use ......................................................................... 1-23
Schematic Diagram ................................................ 4-53
• DI-73 (SYNC SHIFTER 1) Schematic Diagram .... 4-55
• DI-73 (SYNC SHIFTER 2) Schematic Diagram .... 4-57
2. DISASSEMBLY • DI-73 (AUDIO HPF) Schematic Diagram ............... 4-59
• DI-73 (AUDIO A/D, D/A CONVERTER)
2-1. Top/bottom Cover Assemblies .................................... 2-1 Schematic Diagram ................................................ 4-61
2-2. Front Panel .................................................................. 2-1 • DI-73 (AUDIO DSP) Schematic Diagram .............. 4-63
2-3. FR-157 Board .............................................................. 2-1 • DI-73 (AUDIO DSP CONTROL)
2-4. LCD Module (LCD901) ................................................ 2-1 Schematic Diagram ................................................ 4-65
2-5. Mechanism Deck ......................................................... 2-2 • DI-73 (TIME CODE IN/OUT)
2-6. CM-59 Board ............................................................... 2-2 Schematic Diagram ................................................ 4-67
2-7. JC-20/DI-73 Boards .................................................... 2-2 • KP-8, EJ-28, VL-26 Printed Wiring Boards and
2-8. VD-28 Board ................................................................ 2-3 Schematic Diagrams .............................................. 4-69
2-9. Side Panel Assembly .................................................. 2-3 • VD-28 Printed Wiring Board .................................. 4-71
2-10. Circuit Boards Location ............................................... 2-4 • VD-28 (SYNC GENERATOR 1)
Schematic Diagram ................................................ 4-75
• VD-28 (SYNC GENERATOR 2)
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS Schematic Diagram ................................................ 4-77
• VD-28 (SYNC GENERATOR 3)
3-1. Overall Block Diagram 1 .............................................. 3-1 Schematic Diagram ................................................ 4-79
3-2. Overall Block Diagram 2 .............................................. 3-3 • VD-28 (VIDEO IN 1) Schematic Diagram ............. 4-81
3-3. Overall Block Diagram 3 .............................................. 3-5 • VD-28 (VIDEO IN 2) Schematic Diagram .............. 4-83
3-4. Overall Block Diagram 4 .............................................. 3-7 • VD-28 (VIDEO IN 3) Schematic Diagram ............. 4-85
3-5. Overall Block Diagram 5 .............................................. 3-9 • VD-28 (UVIC) Schematic Diagram ........................ 4-87
3-6. Overall Block Diagram 6 .............................................. 3-11 • VD-28 (VIDEO OUT 1) Schematic Diagram .......... 4-89
3-7. Overall Block Diagram 7 .............................................. 3-13 • VD-28 (VIDEO OUT 2) Schematic Diagram .......... 4-91
3-8. Overall Block Diagram 8 .............................................. 3-15 • VD-28 (VIDEO OUT 3) Schematic Diagram ......... 4-93
3-9. Overall Block Diagram 9 .............................................. 3-17 • VD-28 (AUDIO) Schematic Diagram ...................... 4-95
3-10. Power Block Diagram 1 ............................................... 3-19 • VD-28 (HI CONTROL) Schematic Diagram .......... 4-97
3-11. Power Block Diagram 2 ............................................... 3-21 • VD-28 (DC IN) Schematic Diagram ....................... 4-99
3-12. Power Block Diagram 3 ............................................... 3-23 • VD-28 (DC/DC CONVERTER 1)
3-13. Power Block Diagram 4 ............................................... 3-25 Schematic Diagram ................................................ 4-101
3-14. Power Block Diagram 5 ............................................... 3-27 • VD-28 (DC/DC CONVERTER 2)
3-15. Power Block Diagram 6 ............................................... 3-29 Schematic Diagram ................................................ 4-103
• CM-59 (DC/DC CONVERTER,
REEL MOTOR DRIVE) Schematic Diagram ......... 4-105
• CM-59(DRUM MOTOR DRIVE,
FL MOTOR DRIVE) Schematic Diagram ............... 4-107
• CM-59 (CAPSTAN MOTOR DRIVE,
CAM MOTOR DRIVE) Schematic Diagram ........... 4-109
–3–
Section Title Page Section Title Page
• CM-59 Printed Wiring Board .................................. 4-111 3-20. Components of GL Arm S/T Assembly
• MD-76 Printed Wiring Board .................................. 4-115 (GL Arm Assembly, GL Helical Torsion Spring,
• MD-76 Schematic Diagram .................................... 4-117 GL Gear) ................................................................. 5-21
• FR-157 Printed Wiring Board ................................. 4-119 3-21. Components of MIC Base Assembly
• FR-157 (USER CONTROL 1) (FP-104 Flexible Board, MIC Base) ....................... 5-21
Schematic Diagram ................................................ 4-123 3-22. Components of Drum Assembly
• FR-157 (USER CONTROL 2) (Motor FPC Assembly, Elastic Connector) ............ 5-22
Schematic Diagram ................................................ 4-125 3-23. Components of Pinch Arm Assembly (Tape Retainer,
• LT-32 Printed Wiring Board and Compression Coil Spring) ...................................... 5-22
Shematic Diagram .................................................. 4-126 3-24. Components of TG2/7 Arm Assembly (ET Magnet,
• JK-169 Printed Wiring Board ................................. 4-127 Magnet Holder) ...................................................... 5-22
• JK-169 (VIDEO IN/OUT, AUDIO OUT) 5-1-4. Check and Adjustment ........................................... 5-23
Schematic Diagram ................................................ 4-131 4-1. Reel Table Height Check and Adjustment ............. 5-24
• JK-169 (AUDIO IN 1) Schematic Diagram ............. 4-133 4-2. TG1/8 Height Check and Adjustment .................... 5-24
• JK-169 (AUDIO IN 2) Schematic Diagram ............. 4-135 4-3. TG2/7 Height Check and Adjustment .................... 5-25
• PD-125 Printed Wiring Board ................................ 4-137 4-4. FWD/RVS Position Check and Adjustment ........... 5-25
• PD-125 (RGB DRIVER) Schematic Diagram ........ 4-139 4-5. Electric Tension Regulator Check and Adjustment
• PD-125 (TG) Schematic Diagram .......................... 4-141 of TG2/7 Arm .......................................................... 5-26
• HP-117 Printed Wiring Board ................................ 4-143 4-6. FWD/RVS Back Tension Check and Adjustment ... 5-27
• HP-117 Schematic Diagram .................................. 4-145 4-7. Preparation for Adjustment and
4-3. Waveforms ................................................................... 4-147 Tape Path Check .................................................... 5-28
4-4. Parts Location ............................................................. 4-153 4-8. Track Adjustment and Check
(Checking the RF Waveform) ................................. 5-29
4-9. Track Check ............................................................ 5-29
5. ADJUSTMENTS 4-10. CUE/REV Check .................................................... 5-30
4-11. Curl Check and Adjustment ................................... 5-30
1. Before Starting Adjustment ......................................... 5-1 4-12. Rising Check .......................................................... 5-31
1-1. Adjusting Items when Replacing Main Parts
and Boards .................................................................. 5-2 5-2. SERVICE MODE ......................................................... 5-32
1-2. Information (Mechanical Section) ............................... 5-4 5-2-1. Adjusting Remote Commander .............................. 5-32
5-1. MECHANICAL SECTION ADJUSTMENTS ................ 5-5 1. Used Adjustment Remote Commander ................. 5-32
5-1-1. Parts Replacement and Preparation 2. Precautions Upon Using the Adjusting Remote
for Adjustment ........................................................ 5-5 Commander ............................................................ 5-32
1-1. Assembly/disassembly of Cassette Compartment ..... 5-5 5-2-2. Data Processing ..................................................... 5-33
1-2. How To Load/unload .................................................... 5-5 5-2-3. Service Mode ......................................................... 5-34
1-3. List of Service Tools .................................................... 5-6 1. Emergence Memory Address ................................ 5-34
1-4. About Mode Selector II ............................................... 5-7 2. EMG Code (Emergency Code) .............................. 5-34
5-1-2. Periodic Check ....................................................... 5-8 3. MSW Code ............................................................. 5-35
2-1. Cleaning of Rotary Drum Assembly ...................... 5-8 4. Bit Value Discriminatiion ........................................ 5-36
2-2. Cleaning of Tape Path System ............................... 5-8 5. Recorde of Use Check ........................................... 5-37
2-3. Periodic Checks ..................................................... 5-8 6. Switch Check (Audio Jack 1) ................................. 5-38
5-1-3. Parts Replacement ................................................. 5-9 7. Switch Check (Audio Jack 2) ................................. 5-38
3-1. Tape Guide 1/8 and Guide Guard .......................... 5-9 8. Switch Check (Video Jack) .................................... 5-38
3-2. Tape Guide 2/7 ....................................................... 5-9 9. Switch Check (Key Code) ...................................... 5-39
3-3. Capstan Cover ....................................................... 5-10 10. Switch Check (Key Data 1) .................................... 5-39
3-4. Reel Motor .............................................................. 5-10 11. Switch Check (Key Data 2) .................................... 5-39
3-5. FL Motor Assembly, Gear A, Gear B and 12. Switch Check (Slide Switch 1) ............................... 5-40
Gear CD Assembly ................................................ 5-10 13. Switch Check (Slide Switch 2) ............................... 5-40
3-6. GL Arm S Assembly, GL Arm T Assembly, 14. Switch Check (Slide Switch 3) ............................... 5-40
Coaster S Assembly and Coaster T Assembly ...... 5-11
3-7. MIC Base Guide, MIC Base Assembly and 5-3. VIDEO SECTION ADJUSTMENTS ............................ 5-41
MIC Base Spring .................................................... 5-12 3-1. Preparations Before Adjustment ............................ 5-41
3-8. Drum Cap, Drum Assembly and Tape Support ..... 5-12 3-1-1. Equipment Used ..................................................... 5-41
3-9. Pinch Arm Assembly .............................................. 5-13 3-1-2. Connection of Equipment ....................................... 5-42
3-10. Capstan Motor ........................................................ 5-13 3-1-3. Checking the Input Signals .................................... 5-43
3-11. Pendulum Retainer and 1. S VIDEO Input ........................................................ 5-43
Pendulum Arm Assembly ....................................... 5-13 2. VIDEO Input ........................................................... 5-43
3-12. Brake Arm S, Ratchet Brake T, 3. CAMERA Input ....................................................... 5-44
Tension Coil Spring (Brake), SBR Slider and FP-248 3-1-4. Adjustment Tapes ................................................... 5-45
Flexible Board (Condensation Sensor) .................. 5-14 3-1-5. Input/output Level and Impedance ........................ 5-46
3-13. Reel Table Assembly, Idler Gear A Assembly 3-2. System Control System Adjustments .................... 5-47
and Idler Gear B ..................................................... 5-14 1. Initializing the C, D, E Page Data ........................... 5-47
3-14. Reel Base Retainer, Reel Base T Assembly and 2. Input of C Page Initial Data .................................... 5-47
Reel Base S Assembly (Reel Lock Release Block 3. Input of D Page Initial Data .................................... 5-47
and Reel Lock Release Spring) ............................. 5-15 4. Input of E Page Initial Data .................................... 5-47
3-15. Cam Motor, Motor Holder ....................................... 5-15 5. Modification of C, D, E, Page Data ........................ 5-47
3-16. TG2/7 Arm Block, TG2/7 Band Block and 6. C Page Table .......................................................... 5-48
Tension Coil Spring (TG2)/(TG7) ........................... 5-16 7. D Page Table .......................................................... 5-49
3-17. Sub-slider Arm, Sub-slider, Encoder Gear, 8. E Page Table .......................................................... 5-49
Main Cam Gear, Coupling Gear, Sub-cam Gear, 9. Node Unique ID No. Input ...................................... 5-51
Pinch Slider and Loadeing Arm Assy .................... 5-17 3-3. Servo and RF System Adjustments ....................... 5-53
3-18. Main Slider, Main Slider Arm and Pendulum 1. Capstan FG Adjustment (CM-59 Board) ............... 5-53
Stopper Assembly .................................................. 5-19 2. PLL f0 Pre-adjustment (RP-234 Board) ................. 5-53
3-19. MD-76 Board and Encoder Retainer ..................... 5-20 3. Switching Position Adjustment (RP-234 Board) .... 5-53
–4–
Section Title Page Section Title Page
4. RF-AGC Adjustment (RP-234 Board) .................... 5-53 32. S Video E-E CB Signal Level Adjustment
5. CLK DELAY and AEQ Adjustment (VD-28 Board) ........................................................ 5-77
(RP-234 Board) ...................................................... 5-54 33. S Video E-E CR Signal Delay Adjustment
6. PLL f0 Final Adjustment (RP-234 Board) ............... 5-54 (VD-28 Board) ........................................................ 5-78
3-4. Video System Adjustments .................................... 5-54 34. S Video E-E CB Signal Delay Adjustment
3-4-1. JC-20 Board Adjustment ........................................ 5-54 (VD-28 Board) ........................................................ 5-79
1. VFD SPCK Adjustment (JC-20 Board) .................. 5-54 35. Composite E-E Y Signal Level Adjustment
2. A/D Converter Reference Voltage (VD-28 Board) ........................................................ 5-80
Adjustment (1) (JC-20 Board) ................................ 5-54 36. Composite E-E CR Signal Level Check
3. A/D Converter Reference Voltage (VD-28 Board) ........................................................ 5-80
Adjustment (2) (JC-20 Board) ................................ 5-54 37. Composite E-E CB Signal Level Check
4. Y Signal Clamp Reference Voltage Adjustment (VD-28 Board) ........................................................ 5-81
(JC-20 Board) ......................................................... 5-55 38. Composite E-E CR Signal Delay Adjustment
5. CR Signal Clamp Reference Voltage Adjustment (VD-28 Board) ........................................................ 5-82
(JC-20 Board) ......................................................... 5-55 39. Composite E-E CB Signal Delay Adjustment
6. CB Signal Clamp Reference Voltage Adjustment (VD-28 Board) ........................................................ 5-83
(JC-20 Board) ......................................................... 5-55 40. H Phase Adjustment (VD-28 Board) ...................... 5-84
7. AFC Preliminary Adjustment (JC-20 Board) ......... 5-55 41. E-E SC Phase Adjustment (VD-28 Board) ............ 5-84
8. AFC Picture Frame Adjustment (JC-20 Board) ..... 5-55 42. Playback SC Phase Adjustment
9. AFC Adjustment (JC-20 Board) ............................. 5-55 (EXT SYNC OFF) (VD-28 Board) .......................... 5-85
10. Playback Y Level Adjustment (JC-20 Board) ......... 5-56 43. Playback SC Phase Adjustment
11. Playback C Level Adjustment (JC-20 Board) ........ 5-56 (EXT SYNC ON) (VD-28 Board) ............................ 5-85
3-4-2. General Adjustment ............................................... 5-57 3-5. LCD System Adjustments ...................................... 5-86
1. Playback Y Sync Level Adjudtment (VD-28 Board) 5-57 1. VCO Adjustment (PD-125 Board) .......................... 5-86
2. Playback Blanking Level Adjustment with 0% 2. Black Limit Adjustment (PD-125 Board) ................ 5-87
Setup (VD-28 Board) .............................................. 5-57 3. Bright Adjustment (PD-125 Board) ........................ 5-87
3. Playback Signal Level Adjustment with 0% Setup 4. Gamma 1 Adjustment (PD-125 Board) .................. 5-88
(VD-28 Board) ........................................................ 5-58 5. Contrast Adjustment (PD-125 Board) .................... 5-88
4. Playback CR Signal Level Adjustment with 0% 6. Center Voltage Adjustment (PD-125 Board) .......... 5-89
Setup (VD-28 Board) .............................................. 5-58 7. White Balance Adjustment (PD-125 Board) .......... 5-89
5. Playback CB Signal Level Adjustment with 0% 3-6. AUDIO System Adjustments .................................. 5-90
Setup (VD-28 Board) .............................................. 5-59 1. Audio PAL Data Input (DSR-50P) .......................... 5-91
6. Playback CR Signal Delay Adjustment 2. Playing Level Check ............................................... 5-91
(VD-28 Board) ........................................................ 5-59 3. Audio Level Indication Check ................................. 5-92
7. Playback CB Signal Delay Adjustment 4. Recording and Playing Check ................................ 5-92
(VD-28 Board) ........................................................ 5-60 5. FS48 kHz Frequency Characteristic Check ........... 5-93
8. Encoder Free Run Adjustment (VD-28 Board) ...... 5-60 6. FS48 kHz Noise Level Check ................................ 5-93
9. Carrier Balance Adjustment (VD-28 Board) .......... 5-61 7. FS32 kHz Frequency Characteristic Check ........... 5-94
10. Burst Level Adjustment (VD-28 Board) ................. 5-61 8. FS32 kHz Noise Level Check ................................ 5-94
11. Color Level Adjustment with 0% Setup 9. Input Level Switching Check .................................. 5-95
(VD-28 Board) ........................................................ 5-62 10. Microphone Power Supply Check .......................... 5-95
12. SC_V Phase Adjustment (VD-28 Board) ............... 5-62 3-7. Time Code System Adjustments ........................... 5-96
13. Playback Blanking Level Adjustment with 7.5% 1. Analog Through (E-E) Level Check ....................... 5-96
Setup (VD-28 Board)(DSR-50) .............................. 5-63 2. Time Code Reading Check .................................... 5-96
14. Playback Y Signal Level Adjustment with 7.5% 3. Internal Time Code Output Waveform Check ........ 5-97
Setup (VD-28 Board)(DSR-50) .............................. 5-63 4. Internal Time Code Output Check ......................... 5-97
15. Playback CR Signal Level Adjustment with 7.5% 3-8. Arrangement Diagram for Adjustment Parts .......... 5-98
Setup (VD-28 Board)(DSR-50) .............................. 5-64
16. Playback CB Signal Level Adjustment with 7.5%
Setup (VD-28 Board)(DSR-50) .............................. 5-64 6. REPAIR PARTS LIST
17. Color Level Adjustment with 7.5% Setup
(VD-28 Board)(DSR-50) ......................................... 5-65 6-1. EXPLPODED VIEWS .................................................. 6-1
18. Video Output Level Check (VD-28 Board) ............. 5-65 6-1-1. Overall Assembly ................................................... 6-1
19. S-Video Output Level Check (VD-28 Board) ......... 5-66 6-1-2. Front Panel Assembly-1 ......................................... 6-2
20. Monitor Terminal Output Level Adjustment 6-1-3. Front Panel Assembly-2 ......................................... 6-3
(JC-20 Board) ......................................................... 5-67 6-1-4. Main Frame Assembly ............................................ 6-4
21. E-E Blanking Level Adjustment (VD-28 Board) ..... 5-68 6-1-5. Side Panel Assembly ............................................. 6-5
22. Component E-E Y Signal Level Adjustment 6-1-6. Mechanism Deck Assembly (Drum Assembly) ...... 6-6
(VD-28 Board) ........................................................ 5-69 6-1-7. Mechanism Deck Assembly (Gear, Arm) ............... 6-7
23. Component E-E CR Signal Level Adjustment 6-1-8. Mechanism Deck Assembly (Motor, MD Board) .... 6-8
(VD-28 Board) ........................................................ 5-69 6-1-9. Mechanism Deck Assembly
24. Component E-E CB Signal Level Adjustment (Cassette Compartment) ....................................... 6-8
(VD-28 Board) ........................................................ 5-70 6-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ......................................... 6-10
25. Component E-E CR Signal Delay Adjustment Hardware List ........................................................................ 6-52
(VD-28 Board) ........................................................ 5-71
26. Component E-E CB Signal Delay Adjustment
(VD-28 Board) ........................................................ 5-72
27. E-E Color Level Adjustment (VD-28 Board) .......... 5-73
28. Decoder Free Run Adjustment (VD-28 Board) ...... 5-74
29. Decoder HUE Adjustment (VD-28 Board) ............ 5-75
30. S Video E-E Y Signal Level Adjustment
(VD-28 Board) ........................................................ 5-76
31. S Video E-E CR Signal Level Adjustment
(VD-28 Board) ........................................................ 5-76
–5–
SERVICE NOTE
1. NOTE FOR REPAIR When remove a connector, don’t pull at wire of connector.
It is possible that a wire is snapped.
Make sure that the flat cable and flexible board are not cracked of
bent at the terminal.
Do not insert the cable insufficiently nor crookedly.
When installing a connector, don’t press down at wire of connector.
It is possible that a wire is snapped.
Cut and remove the part of gilt
which comes off at the point.
(Be careful or some pieces of
gilt may be left inside)
–6–
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
1. Self-diagnosis Function 2. Self-diagnosis Display
When problems occur while the unit is operating, the self-diagno- When problems occur while the unit is operating, the time code of
sis function starts working, and displays on the LCD monitor what the LCD monitor shows a 4-digit display consisting of an alpha-
to do. This function consists of two display; self-diagnosis display bet and numbers, which blinks at 3.2 Hz. This 5-character display
and service mode display. indicates the “repaired by:”, “block” in which the problem oc-
Details of the self-diagnosis functions are provided in the Instruc- curred, and “detailed code” of the problem.
tion manual.
LCD monitor
C:31:11
Blinks at 3.2Hz
C 31 11
Repaired by: Block Detailed Code
C : Corrected by customer Indicates the appropriate Refer to page 10.
H : Corrected by dealer step to be taken. Self-diagnosis Code Table.
E : Corrected by service E.g.
engineer 31 ....Reload the tape.
32 ....Turn on power again.
3. Service Mode Display
The service mode display shows up to six self-diagnosis codes shown in the past.
3-1. Display Method
While pressing the “STOP” key, set the switch from OFF to “ON”, and continue pressing the “STOP” key for 5 seconds continuously. The
service mode will be displayed, and the time code will show the backup No. and the 5-character self-diagnosis codes.
LCD monitor
[3] C : 3 1 : 1 1
Lights up
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial
[3] C:31:11
Backup No. Self-diagnosis Codes
Order of previous errors
3-2. Switching of Backup No.
By rotating the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, past self-diagnosis codes will be shown in order. The backup No. in the [] indicates the order in
which the problem occurred. (If the number of problems which occurred is less than 6, only the number of problems which occurred will
be shown.)
[1] : Occurred first time [4] : Occurred fourth time
[2] : Occurred second time [5] : Occurred fifth time
[3] : Occurred third time [6] : Occurred the last time
3-3. End of Display
Turning OFF the power supply will end the service mode display.
Note: The “self-diagnosis display” data will be backed up by the coin-type lithium battery (VL-26 board BT801). When this
coin-type lithium battery is disconnected, the “self-diagnosis display” data will be lost by initialization.
–7–
4. Self-diagnosis Code Table
Self-diagnosis Code
Repaired by:
Block Detailed Symptom/State Correction
Function Code
C 2 1 0 0 Condensation. Remove the cassette, and insert it again after one hour.
C 2 2 0 0 Video head is dirty. Clean with the optional cleaning cassette.
LOAD direction. Loading does not
C 3 1 1 0 Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
complete within specified time
UNLOAD direction. Loading does not
C 3 1 1 1 Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
complete within specified time
C 3 1 2 2 T reel fault. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 2 3 S reel fault. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 3 0 FG fault when starting capstan. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 4 0 FG fault when starting drum. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
C 3 1 4 2 FG fault during normal drum operations. Load the tape again, and perform operations from the beginning.
LOAD direction loading motor time- Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 1 0
out. operations from the beginning.
UNLOAD direction loading motor Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 1 1
time-out. operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 2 2 T reel fault. operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 2 3 S reel fault. operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 3 0 FG fault when starting capstan.
operations from the beginning.
Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 4 0 FG fault when starting drum.
operations from the beginning.
FG fault during normal drum Remove the battery or power cable, connect, and perform
C 3 2 4 2
operations. operations from the beginning.
–8–
DSR-50/50P
SECTION 1 This section is extracted from DSR-
GENERAL 50/50P instruction manual.
Features Features
Chapter 1 Overview
The DSR-50/50P is a digital videocassette recorder High-quality PCM digital audio High-speed search function Jog audio function
using 1/4-inch tape. Offering the DVCAM“ digital
recording format, the DSR-50/50P produces stable, PCM recording makes for a wide dynamic range and a If you use the optional remote control unit (DSRM- If you use the optional remote control unit DSRM-20,
superior picture quality by digitally processing and high signal-to-noise ratio, thereby enhancing sound 20), the unit has a picture search function that allows audio can be monitored at various playback speeds
separating image signals into color difference signals quality. you to view color picture at playback speeds up to 14 when in jog mode.
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
and luminance signal (component video). Featuring a There are two recording modes: 2-channel mode (48 times normal speed (DSR-50) or up to 17 times normal
color LCD monitor, the compact and lightweight DSR- kHz sampling and 16 bits linear code), which offers speed (DSR-50P) in forward and reverse directions.
50/50P is portable and gives you the freedom to check sound quality equivalent to the DAT (Digital Audio When remote-controlling this unit in shuttle mode Various interface
images on the spot. Tape) format, or 4-channel mode (32 kHz sampling from an editing controller or a remote controller, you
and 12 bits nonlinear code), which provide four can search at a variable speed in the range 0 (still) to The unit provides many types of interface connectors.
The main features of the DSR-50/50P are described channel simultaneous recording/playback. about 14 times normal (DSR-50) or about 17 times ¥ Analog video: component video, composite video, S-
below. normal (DSR-50P) in both directions. You can also video (IN/OUT)
search frame-by-frame in jog mode. ¥ Analog audio: XLR (3-pin) input connectors provide
DV format compatibility You can also hear playback audio. four channel simultaneous recording, phono jack type
output connectors.
DVCAM Format A DV cassette recorded on a DV-format VCR can be ¥ i.LINK (DV) 1) : i.LINK-compliant DV IN/OUT
played back on this unit (SP mode only). You can also Internal time code generator/reader connector (6-pin) allows input or output of digital
DVCAM is based on the consumer DV format, which record an image on a DV-format (SP mode only). video/audio signals in DVCAM/DV format.
uses the 4:1:1 component digital format (DSR-50) or (Recording/playing an image in LP mode is not ¥ Camera: Camera interface (26-pin) supplies power to
The unit contains a time code generator/reader that can
the 4:2:0 format (DSR-50P), and provides a 1/4-inch available.) the camera from this unit.
generate and read longitudinal time code (LTC) in the
digital recording format for professional use. ¥ TC (Time code): BNC type input/output connectors
SMPTE format (DSR-50) or EBU format (DSR-50P).
This unit can output the time code read from tape as an allow input/output of the time code between this unit
Choice of two cassette sizes analog (LTC) signal, and receive externally generated and an external device.
High picture quality, high stability
time code (LTC).
The unit can use both standard-size and mini-size
Video signals are separated into color difference DVCAM cassettes.
signals and luminance signal, which are encoded and ¥ According to cassette size, it automatically changes Digital slow playback Other Features
compressed to one-fifth size before being recorded to the position of the reel drive plate.
ensure stable and superb picture quality. ¥ The maximum recording/playback times are 184 The unit has a frame memory function that allows slow
Because the recording is digital, multi-generation minutes for standard size cassettes and 40 minutes for playback without noise. This is available only at +1/3-
Built-in color LCD monitor
dubbing can be performed with virtually no mini-size cassettes (DVCAM format). time speed and —1/3-time speed. (This function is
deterioration of quality. The unit has a 2.5-type color LCD (liquid crystal
available only when the DSRM-20 is used.)
display) monitor that lets you verify images on the
Remote control spot. You can see the setup menus and system statuses.
Wide track pitch TBC (Time Base Corrector) Menus and data can be superimposed over the picture
The unit can be operated by remote control from a being displayed.
The recording track pitch is about 15 µm, fully 50 CONTROL-S system remote control unit, the DSRM- The unit has a digital TBC that provides jitter-free
percent wider than the DV format s 10 µm track pitch. 20 (not supplied). video output for analog signals. The video output
Thanks to this feature, the DVCAM format sufficiently
level, chrominance signal output level, setup level
Duplicate, including cassette memory data
meets the reliability and precision requirements of
(DSR-50 only), sync and subcarrier level can all be
professional editing. Using the i.LINK cable, you can duplicate a tape that
adjusted.
includes time code and cassette memory data. If the
original tape has blank portions, simply duplicate the
tape skipping the blank portions.
.........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) i.LINK and the i.LINK logo are trademarks and
indicate that this product is in agreement with IEEE
1394-1995 specifications and their revisions.
Chapter 1 Overview 7 (GB) 8 (GB) Chapter 1 Overview
Location
Location and Function
and Function of Parts of Parts
Audio dubbing function Compact and lightweight Front Panel
The unit allows you to record just the sound onto the With its VCR and LCD monitor, the compact and
recorded tape (audio dubbing). (The tape must be lightweight (about 3.9 kg (8 lb 10 oz)) DSR-50/50P is
recorded in DVCAM format and the audio mode must easy to transport. The body is made partially of
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
be 32 kHz.) magnesium alloy for sturdy construction. 1 Cassette lid
........................................................................................
Menu selection and operation setting 6 OPEN switch
, , and are trademarks of Sony
using the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial Corporation.
5 POWER switch
1 Display window
The SEL/PUSH EXEC dial is a Roller-push menu dial (see page 11
that allows you to easily operate the menu when you (GB))
want to set functions and operation conditions tailored
4 Monitor display
to your particular needs. section (see 2 Tape transport
page 16 (GB)) control section
(see page 13
Superimposition function (GB))
Time code, warnings, and other text data can be output 4 LCD protection board
as analog composite video signals and can be installation screw hole 2 RESET button (bottom of unit)
(bottom of unit)
superimposed on the image output to the LCD
monitor. 3 Carrying handle
3 Audio control section (see page 15 (GB))
Easy maintenance functions
¥ Self-diagnostics/alarm functions: The system
automatically detects an invalid operation, an invalid
connection or a malfunction, and displays a 1 Cassette lid 5 POWER switch
description, a cause and a recovery method on the To open the cassette lid, slide the OPEN switch 6 to Push up this switch to ON to turn on the power.
LCD monitor and outputs the data as analog OPEN. The lid will click open. Raise the lid and insert
composite video signals. Note
a cassette.
¥ Digital hours meter: A digital hours meter counts For details of usable cassettes, see Notes on Video Power to the camera cable is not interrupted even if
four types of time data operating time, drum Cassettes on page 40 (GB). this switch has been turned off. If you are not going to
rotation time, tape running time, and tape threading/ use the camera, turn off the power of the camera,
unthreading. The digital hours data is output to the 2 RESET button disconnect the camera cable and the DSR-50/50P AC
LCD monitor and output as analog composite video Press this button (bottom of unit) to initialize the adaptor, or remove the battery pack.
signals. internal clock, all menu items and the time code of the
FREE RUN setting. Press this button with the tip of a 6 OPEN switch
ball-point pen or similar tool. Slide this switch to the right (OPEN) to open the
AC adaptor/Battery power cassette lid 1.
3 Carrying handle
BP-L40 (A)/L60A/L90A can be used. Use the handle to carry the unit.
4 LCD protection board installation screw hole
Use this hole to install the LCD protection board
(supplied).
Chapter 1 Overview 9 (GB) 10 (GB) Chapter 1 Overview
1-1
Location and Function of Parts
1 Display window 7 DVCAM indicator qs Audio level meters
This indicator appears as follows: Displays the recording level in the recording or in the
EE: When the DVCAM/DV select switch is set to EE mode; displays the playing level while playing a
DVCAM. tape.
1 Time counter display 0 Cassette indicator Play: When a DVCAM formatted tape is being
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
played. qd Tape remaining time indicator
2 WARNING indicator qa OVER indicators Displays the tape remaining. If the power has been
8 Date display turned off, this shows the tape remaining when the
Displays the date on the internal clock. power was turned off. If the tape remaining is more
than 300 minutes (five hours), the number of hours
3 COUNTER switch 9 Time display will be shown. If the tape remaining is less than 300
Displays the time on the internal clock. minutes, this number of minutes will be shown.
Note Note
4 METER switch
When the battery pack is installed or the AC adaptor is If the tape has been rewound to the beginning, this
connected, the date and time are displayed even if the indicator will not show the tape remaining when the
power is turned off. With battery backup, the clock can tape is inserted into the unit. The tape remaining time
5 LIGHT button run for about one month without being charged by the is displayed after the tape runs for a while.
qs Audio level meters
unit battery pack or by AC power.
6 Warning indicators qd Tape remaining qf Remaining battery indicator
time indicator 0 Cassette indicator Displays the remaining charge in the battery.
7 DVCAM indicator qf Remaining battery For details on the remaining battery, see page 18 (GB).
Lights when a digital video cassette is in the unit and
indicator
that cassette is compatible with the unit.
8 Date display
9 Time display qa OVER indicators
Lights when the audio level exceeds 0 dB in the EE
mode (except when inputting signals from the DV IN/
OUT connector).
4 METER switch Notes
1 Time counter display
Displays the following: Selects the audio channels to display audio levels in ¥ These indictors do not light if the AUDIO SELECT
¥ Time data: Time code, user bits the audio level meters qs. switch has been set to AUTO.
¥ Self-diagnostics (see page 98 (GB)) CH1/2: Displays the audio level of audio channels 1 ¥ These indicators do not light while the unit is playing
and 2. a tape or is in the EE mode when inputting signals
Note from the DV IN/OUT connector.
CH3/4: Displays the audio level of audio channels 3
The time code is displayed with colons (:) between and 4.
digits regardless of the frame mode (drop frame/non-
drop frame). 5 LIGHT button
Turns on the backlight in the display window. The
2 WARNING indicator backlight will automatically turn off in 10 seconds
Lights or flashes when the battery is exhausted or an after you release this button.
error occurs.
For details, see Alarm Messages on page 94 (GB). 6 Warning indicators
Displays warnings.
3 COUNTER switch For details on warnings, see Alarm Messages on page 94
Selects the time code or user bits to display in the time (GB).
counter display, LCD monitor and VIDEO OUT1
output.
TC: Time code
U-BIT: User bits
Chapter 1 Overview 11 (GB) 12 (GB) Chapter 1 Overview
Location and Function of Parts
2 Tape transport control section 6 F FWD (fast forward) button/indicator 9 AUDIO DUB (audio dubbing) button/indicator
When you press this button, the indicator lights and the Use this button to dub the sound. The indicator flashes
tape is fast forwarded. During fast forward, the picture while the sound is being dubbed.
does not appear on the monitor (except EE pictures). If For details on audio dubbing, see Audio Dubbing on
5 PLAY button/indicator you keep pressing this button during playback, fast- page 74 (GB).
When the INPUT SELECT selector is set to other than
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
forward or in playback pause mode, you can locate a
1 REW button/indicator 6 F FWD button/indicator scene monitoring the picture (picture search). DV, if you press only this button when the unit is in
You can change the tape transport mode in FF/REW the stop mode, the AUDIO DUB indicator lights and
2 INDEX button 7 END SEARCH button SPD on the VTR SET menu. you can check the EE sound signals. After checking
For details on the VTR SET menu, see VTR SET menu on them, press the STOP button.
8 DUP button/indicator page 90 (GB). For details, see DISPLAY SET menu on page 84 (GB).
Notes
3 KEY INH switch
0 REC (record) button/indicator
9 AUDIO DUB button/indicator ¥ If you set the FF/REW SPD on the VTR SET menu When you start recording an image from an external
to SHUTTLEMAX, you can display the picture while camera, press the PLAY button while holding this
4 STOP button/indicator 0 REC button/indicator fast-forwarding the tape. button down. The unit is set to recording pause mode.
¥ If you set PB in EE/PB SET on the DISPLAY SET Then press the PAUSE button on the unit or the VTR
qa PAUSE button/indicator menu, the EE pictures are not output while fast- button on the camera to start recording. When you start
forwarding the tape. recording an image from a source other than an
external camera, press the PLAY button while holding
7 END SEARCH button this button down. The indicator flashes and recording
1 REW (rewind) button/indicator 2 INDEX button Searches for the last part of the recorded image and starts. If you press only this button when the unit is in
When you press this button, the indicator lights and the Press to mark an index while recording. An index is plays that part for five seconds. This function is used the stop mode, the REC indicator lights and you can
tape starts rewinding. During rewind, the picture does useful when you search for the scene later. when you record another image at the end of the check the EE signals for image, sound and time code.
not appear on the monitor (except EE pictures1)). If you For details on index, see Other Recording Functions on current image or check the last part of the recorded After checking them, press the STOP button.
keep pressing this button during playback, rewind or in page 52 (GB). image. For details, see DISPLAY SET menu on page 84 (GB).
playback pause mode, the contents of the tape will be If you use a cassette without cassette memory and For details on time code, see DSR-50/50P time codes on
shown in reverse on the monitor while it is rewound 3 KEY INH (key inhibit) switch remove the tape from the unit, the end search function page 62 (GB).
(picture search). When operation has stopped, if you Turning on this switch disables the tape transport does not work. If you use a cassette with cassette Notes
press the PLAY button while holding this button control buttons to prevent invalid button operations. memory, the end search function continues to work.
¥ The unit cannot record images unless video signals
down, the tape is rewound to the beginning and However, if there is a blank portion at the beginning or
4 STOP button/indicator are input.
automatically played. between the recorded portions, the end search function
Press to stop the tape. If there is a tape in the unit and ¥ If the video signals are interrupted during recording,
You can change the tape transport mode in FF/REW may not work correctly.
the tape has been stopped, the indicator lights. the unit is set to recording pause mode. When the
SPD on the VTR SET menu.
video signals are input again, recording is resumed.
For details on VTR SET menu, see VTR SET menu on 8 DUP (duplicate) button/indicator
page 90 (GB). 5 PLAY button/indicator That position of the tape where the recording resumes
Used to duplicate a tape, including the time code.
Press to play back the tape. When the tape is being may be distorted when the tape is played back.
Notes
During duplication, the indicator flashes.
played, the indicator lights. For details on duplicate function, see Duplication
¥ This unit cannot record in the LP mode of the
¥ If you set the FF/REW SPD on the VTR SET menu (generating a work tape with the same time code) on page consumer DV format.
to SHUTTLEMAX, you can display the picture while Notes 70 (GB).
rewinding the tape. ¥ When the unit is playing the part of the tape where When the INPUT SELECT selector is set to DV and a qa PAUSE button/indicator
¥ If you set PB in EE/PB SET on the DISPLAY SET the format has been changed between the DVCAM DV signal is input, if you press only this button when Press this button to set the unit to pause mode while
menu, the EE pictures are not output while rewinding format and the DV format, the picture and sound may the unit is in the stop mode, the DUP indicator lights recording, playing or audio dubbing. Pressing this
the tape. be distorted. and you can check the EE signals for image, sound and button again resumes the operation. The indicator
¥ The unit cannot play back a cassette recorded in LP time code. After checking them, press the STOP flashes when the unit is in pause mode.
mode of the consumer DV format. button. Note
For details, see DISPLAY SET menu on page 84 (GB).
For details on the time code, see DSR-50/50P time codes If you have started recording using an external camera
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ by pressing the VTR button on the camera, pressing
on page 62 (GB).
1) EE pictures conversion circuits but instead are output via electric circuits the PAUSE button while recording does not pause the
EE stands for Electric to Electric . In this EE mode, the only. This mode is used to check the input signals and adjust recording.
video and audio signals that are input to the VCR s input levels. The pictures output in EE mode are referred to For details on how to record an image using an external
recording circuitry do not pass through any magnetic as EE pictures. camera, see Recording Using an External Camera on
page 45 (GB).
Chapter 1 Overview 13 (GB) 14 (GB) Chapter 1 Overview
1-2
Location and Function of Parts
3 Audio control section 4 Monitor display section
1 Audio recording level control knobs
1 FINE button
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
2 DISPLAY (LCD OFF/OFF/
ON) selector
3 DISPLAY (MENU/TC/
5 LCD monitor
AUDIO) selector
EC
EX
/PUSH
4 SEL/PUSH EXEC dial
SEL
2 AUDIO SELECT switches
1 Audio recording level control knobs (CH-1 to Notes
CH-4) ¥ When inputting signals from the DV IN/OUT 1 FINE button 3 DISPLAY (MENU/TC/AUDIO) selector
By turning these knobs, you can adjust the analog connector, these settings are invalid. If you press this button when the DISPLAY (MENU/ Switches the superimposed text data for display on the
audio input signal levels. You can adjust the audio ¥ If the sound is louder than the amplifier s dynamic TC/AUDIO) selector 3 has been set to AUDIO, the LCD monitor.
signal level only if the AUDIO SELECT switches 2 range, the AUTO setting is ineffective. LCD monitor displays detailed audio level meters MENU: Displays the menu screen.
have been set to MANU. ¥ Even if AUTO has been set, unless the audio input centered around the audio level that you set through TC: Displays the time codes, remaining battery, tape
If you press the FINE button in the monitor display level control selectors in the right panel are the menu as well as various settings in text. remaining time, selected input signal, audio mode,
section when the DISPLAY (MENU/TC/AUDIO) appropriate, there may be clipping and noise. For details on the FINE screen, see FINE screen on page presence or absence of cassette memory, tape
selector has been set to AUDIO, detailed audio levels ¥ The audio level is automatically equalized to an 20 (GB). label, title, etc.
centered around the audio level that you set through appropriate level when you select AUTO. It takes AUDIO: Displays the audio levels.
the menu are displayed. about 20 seconds for the audio level to be stabilized 2 DISPLAY (LCD OFF/OFF/ON) selector
For details on the AUDIO screen, see AUDIO screen on Switches the LCD monitor mode. Notes
in the following cases.
page 20 (GB). LCD OFF: Turns off the LCD monitor power. ¥ You can use the DSRM-20 (not supplied) to search
— immediately after powering on
Note — immediately after stopping a playback operation OFF: Displays the LCD monitor. Text data is not for the scene using the index signal on the tape. In
— immediately after switching the audio mode in superimposed. The tape label, title and data codes this case you can search for the scene regardless of
You cannot adjust the audio signal level of the DV
AUDIO MODE on the AUDIO SET menu (camera data, and date/time recorded by the this selector setting. But you can display —/+ only
signal.
¥ If the LIMITER on the AUDIO SET menu has been camera) are displayed. while this selector is set to TC.
set to ON, and if the audio input is too loud while you ON: Displays the LCD monitor. Text data is ¥ If you change the setting of this switch during a
2 AUDIO SELECT switches (CH-1 to CH-4)
are manually adjusting the audio level, you can still superimposed. cassette memory search, the cassette memory search
Switches the recording level adjustment mode.
record the sound without clipping. The LIMITER is stopped.
AUTO: Disables the audio recording level control Notes
knob and automatically adjusts the recording setting is available only when this switch is set to ¥ You can set the unit to display/hide a tape label, title
level. MANU. and data codes only from the menus.
MANU: Enables the audio recording level control ¥ To change a menu setting, turn ON the DISPLAY
knob to manually adjust the recording level. (LCD OFF/OFF/ON) selector or turn ON the
SUPERIMPOSE switch on the right panel. If the
LCD monitor or external monitor does not display a
superimposed screen, you cannot set a menu.
Chapter 1 Overview 15 (GB) 16 (GB) Chapter 1 Overview
Location and Function of Parts
4 SEL/PUSH EXEC dial Text data superimposed on the LCD TC screen Note
If the DISPLAY (MENU/TC/AUDIO) selector 3 has monitor This screen shows the time data, tape remaining time, The remaining battery is displayed even if you use the
been set to MENU, rotating this dial changes the menu remaining battery, data codes, etc. These data items are unit with AC power by connecting the AC adaptor to
items being displayed and pressing this dial selects a If you set the DISPLAY (LCD OFF/OFF/ON) selector important for normal recording/playback operation. To the DC IN 12V connector.
particular menu item. to ON, you can superimpose the text data on the LCD display the TC screen, set the DISPLAY (MENU/TC/
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
If the DISPLAY (MENU/TC/AUDIO) selector 3 has monitor. By setting the DISPLAY (MENU/TC/ AUDIO) selector to TC. Ni-Cd Lithium-ion LCD monitor/ Display
Camera’s
battery battery VIDEO OUT1 battery
been set to TC, rotating this dial adjusts the LCD AUDIO) selector to a particular setting, you can select voltage voltage displaya)
windowa)
indicatora)
2 3
monitor brightness. superimposed text data for display on the LCD 4 12.5 V or more 15.0 V or more
monitor. 1 Li N 00:12:34:12
122min 5
PHOTO – 1 0 12.0 – 12.5 V 14.0 – 15.0 V
6
MENU screen SEARCH
7
By setting the DISPLAY (MENU/TC/AUDIO) 8
11.75 – 12.0 V 13.0 – 14.0 V
selector to MENU, you can set various data in the qk
PAL
MANUAL DVCAM 9
menus. qj, ql 1 0 0 0 0 ATW NS 4 8 K
11.5 – 11.75 V 12.0 – 13.0 V
0
For details on the menu, see Chapter 6, Adjusting and F1. 6 1 2 dB DV I N
Setting Through Menus on page 76 (GB). qa 11.3 – 11.5 V 11.3 – 12.0 V
qh, w;, wa
Rotate qs
qg
up/down 11.25 – 11.3 V 11.25 – 11.3 V
qf
TC ⁄ UB SET qd
Press TC TC PRESET Slow
CM UB PRESET flashing Slow flashing Slow flashing
DISP TC FORMAT 11.0 – 11.25 V 11.0 – 11.25 V
V TC RUN 1 Remaining battery indicator
A TC ⁄ UB IN Displays the remaining battery and the battery type.
LCD TC MAKE
VTR UB TIME You can select the battery type in uREMAIN on the Rapid flashing
For details on the menu, see Operating the Menus on ETC JOG TC OUT Battery-end
DISPLAY SET menu. 11.0 V or less 11.0 V or less
warning
Light
page 76 (GB). Li: Lithium-ion battery
Ni: Ni-Cd (nickel-cadmium) battery
5 LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) monitor
a) The indicator flashes 3.2 times per second in the rapid
Displays the playback or EE pictures as well as flashing mode and flashes 0.8 time per second in the slow
superimposed time data, status information, menu, etc. flashing mode.
Note
2 Cassette memory indicator
The superimposed data output to the LCD monitor and
This is shown when a cassette with cassette memory
the VIDEO OUT1 are the same. You cannot display a
has been loaded. This indicator flashes when you
different superimposed data.
remove the cassette while the system is writing data in
the cassette memory.
3 Tape transport mode indicator
Displays the tape transport mode.
4 Time code indicator
Displays the time code or user bits. Change the display
(time code or user bits) by changing the COUNTER
switch on the front panel. In the drop frame mode, a
period is displayed between the minute and second.
(Example: 00:12.58:00)
If the self-diagnostic function is enabled, a diagnostics
code numbers are displayed.
Chapter 1 Overview 17 (GB) 18 (GB) Chapter 1 Overview
1-3
http://getMANUAL.com
Location and Function of Parts
5 Tape remaining time indicator qd Program AE indicator AUDIO screen FINE screen
If qREMAIN on the DISPLAY SET menu has been You can check and adjust the audio levels and check
set to ON, the tape remaining time is displayed. qf White balance indicator LEVEL –22 –20 –18 dB
the audio input signal settings on this screen. To CH1 |||||||||||······
Note
display this screen, set the DISPLAY (MENU/TC/ CH2 ||||||||||·······
CH3 ||||||||||||||| · ·
qg Gain indicator AUDIO) selector to AUDIO. While this screen is CH4 ||||||···········
If the tape has been rewound to the beginning, this
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
displayed, you can press the FINE button to display I NPUT GA I N 48V LVL
indicator will not show the tape remaining time when qh Iris indicator the FINE screen. The FINE screen is only displayed CH1 AUTO ON –60
the tape is inserted into the unit. The tape remaining CH2 AUTO ON –60
when you keep pressing the FINE button. CH3 AUTO OFF –20
time is displayed after the tape runs for a while. qj Shutter speed indicator CH4 MANU OFF + 4
While a tape is being played back, this screen displays
6 Search/Index indicator qk SteadyShot indicator the audio mode recorded on the tape. When recording
Displays the search mode. If an index has been When the normal screen is being displayed, pressing
a picture, this screen displays the audio mode selected the FINE button displays the FINE screen. The FINE
marked, this displays INDEX MARK. If you use the in AUDIO MODE on the AUDIO SET menu. When
end search function, this displays END SEARCH. Notes screen is displayed only while you are pressing the
inputting signals from the DV IN/OUT connector, this FINE button. The FINE screen displays narrower
¥ Data items qd through qk show the settings (camera screen displays the input audio mode. If the audio
7 Warning indicators data) of the tape recorded by the camera (DSR-200/ audio levels around the audio levels (—12/—18/—20 dB)
mode has been set to 32 kHz, this screen displays four selected in the REF LEVEL on the AUDIO SET menu
Displays a warning. 200P, 200A/200AP, PD100/PD100P, PD100A/ channels; if the audio mode has been set to 48 kHz,
For details on warnings, see Alarm Messages on page 94 PD100AP, PD150/PD150P, etc.). This unit cannot and displays the audio input signal settings. You can
this screen displays two channels. finely adjust recording levels by adjusting the audio
(GB). record camera data.
¥ Data items qd through qk are displayed only when Note recording level control knobs on the front panel.
8 PAL (DSR-50)/NTSC (DSR-50P) indicator DATA CODE on the DISPLAY SET menu has been You cannot change the audio mode while inputting The audio input signals are displayed as follows:
DSR-50: Appears for five seconds when you play back set to CAMERA. signals from the DV IN/OUT connector. GAIN: Displays the AUTO/MANU setting of the
a PAL formatted tape. For details on DATA CODE, see DISPLAY SET menu on AUDIO SELECT switch.
DSR-50P: Appears for five seconds when you play page 84 (GB). Normal screen 48V: If the audio input level control selector has been
back a NTSC formatted tape. set to —60 and the audio input selector has been set
ql Date indicator to +48V ON, this column shows ON, otherwise
–∞ 40 30 20 10 0 dB this column shows OFF.
9 DVCAM/DV indicator Displays the date when the tape was recorded. · · · · · ·
CH1 ||||||||||||||||||·|··· ·
In the EE, recording, and duplicate modes, displays the LVL: Displays the setting (—60/—20/+4) of the audio
CH2 |||||||||||||||||·|···· ·
DVCAM/DV select switch setting. During playback, w; Time indicator input level control selector.
CH3 ||||||||||||||||||||||| |
displays the format recorded on the tape. Displays the time when the tape was recorded. Notes
CH4 |||||||||||||·|········ ·
Note ¥ Changing the REF LEVEL on the AUDIO SET menu
0 Audio mode indicator
Data items ql and w; are displayed only when DATA does not change the audio gain of the unit. Adjust the
In the EE and recording modes, displays the selected
CODE on the DISPLAY SET menu has been set to audio gain by setting the audio input level control
audio mode in AUDIO MODE on the AUDIO SET
DATE. This screen displays the audio levels. By adjusting the selectors and adjusting the audio recording level
menu. During playback and audio dubbing, displays
audio recording level control knobs in the front panel, control knobs.
the audio mode recorded on the tape. When inputting
wa LCD monitor brightness you can adjust the recording level. In the EE, ¥ The standard output level of the AUDIO OUTPUT
signals from the DV IN/OUT connector, displays the
This is displayed when you adjust the LCD monitor recording, or audio dubbing (only the audio dubbing jack of the unit is —10 dBu. This is equivalent to —20
audio mode input from the DV IN/OUT connector.
brightness by rotating the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. This channel) modes, the level display runs all the way to dB level for the full-bit maximum audio level
display disappears in one second after you adjust the the right (0 dB) and turns red if the input level exceeds (—18 dB level for DSR-50P). This value is fixed and
qa Input signal indicator
brightness. You can adjust the LCD monitor brightness 0 dB. During playback, when inputting signals from is not affected by the REF LEVEL setting on the
Displays the INPUT SELECT selector setting.
when you have set the DISPLAY (MENU/TC/ the DV IN/OUT connector, or if you have set the AUDIO SET menu.
AUDIO) selector to TC and the DISPLAY (LCD OFF/ AUDIO SELECT switch to AUTO, the level display ¥ When inputting signals from the DV IN/OUT
qs NS (Non Standard) audio mode indicator
OFF/ON) selector to OFF or ON. does not run all the way to the right (0 dB). connector, the INPUT field shows DV IN.
Lights when you play back a tape in the unlock audio
¥ When inputting signals from other than DV IN/OUT
mode or when the unlock mode signal has been input
connector, the INPUT shows the available audio
from the DV IN/OUT connector. Always lights if the
channels.
DVCAM/DV select switch has been set to DV and the
unit is in the EE mode.
For details on the unlock mode, see Compatibility of
DVCAM and DV Format on page 99 (GB).
Chapter 1 Overview 19 (GB) 20 (GB) Chapter 1 Overview
Location and Function of Parts
The audio screen shows the following symbols
Right Panel
depending on the menu settings, etc.
:Audio dubbing symbol
This symbol appears with a channel on which you 3 TC IN/OUT connectors
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
can dub sound. You can select a channel to dub
2 PHONE LEVEL 4 DV IN/OUT connector
the sound in the AUDIO DUB on the AUDIO control knob
1Video signal input/output
SET menu. 1 PHONES jack section (see page 25 (GB))
This symbol appears during playback of a tape 2Audio signal input/output section (see page 27 (GB))
recorded in 32 kHz of the DVCAM format. 5 BREAKER button
This symbol also appears during audio dubbing on
a tape recorded in 32 kHz of the DVCAM format.
This symbol does not appear when the INPUT 6 DC IN 12V
connector
SELECT selector is set to DV.
qa MONITOR
SELECT
:Wind noise reduction symbol selector
This symbol appears with a channel in which the
WIND on the AUDIO SET menu has been set to
ON.
8 REMOTE connector
:Link symbol 9 CONTROL S connector 7 CAMERA connector
If the AGC (Auto Gain Control) of a pair of
0 AUDIO MONITOR OUT jack
channels is linked, this symbol is placed between
the channels.
If AGC CH1, 2 on the AUDIO SET menu have
been set to LINKED and channels 1 and 2 in the 1 PHONES (headphones) jack (stereo phone jack) 2 PHONE LEVEL control knob
AUDIO SELECT switch have been set to AUTO, Connects to the headphones. You can monitor the Adjusts the volume of the headphones that are
channels 1 and 2 can be linked for AGC operation audio signals being recorded or played through the connected to the PHONES jack 1 and the audio level
and for stereo sound where channel 1 is set for the headphones. Select the audio signal you want to of the return sound to the camera.
left sound and channel 2 is set for the right sound. monitor by selecting the channels with the MONITOR
If AGC CH3, 4 on the AUDIO SET menu have SELECT selector qa. 3 TC (time code) IN/OUT connectors (BNC-type)
been set to LINKED and channels 3 and 4 in the Used to input or output the time code through these
AUDIO SELECT switch have been set to AUTO, Notes
connectors.
channels 3 and 4 can be linked for AGC operation ¥ A warning tone is output on the headphone sound and TC IN connector: Connects to the time code output
and for stereo sound where channel 3 is set for the return sound to the camera. A warning tone is not connector on the external devices such as a time
left sound and channel 4 is set for the right sound. mixed on the signals output from the AUDIO code generator or a VCR. This connector is used
MONITOR OUT and AUDIO OUTPUT jacks. to synchronize the internal time code generator of
Note ¥ By setting the BEEP on the OTHERS menu to this unit with an external time code.
This symbol does not appear when inputting signals MELODY, the selected melody beep sound is mixed
from the DV IN/OUT connector. on the headphone sound and the return sound to the Note
camera when you operate the menu. The unit can read the time code input to this
:Camera symbol connector only when the time code is output at
This symbol appears at the right side of the LVL normal play speed.
display when the INPUT SELECT selector is set
to other than DV and the audio input selector is set
to CAM.
Chapter 1 Overview 21 (GB) 22 (GB) Chapter 1 Overview
1-4
Location and Function of Parts
TC OUT connector: Connects to the time code input 5 BREAKER button 8 REMOTE connector
connector on the external devices such as a time If excessive current flows inside the unit, the breaker is Connects to a foot switch.
code reader or a VCR. activated, and the power to the unit is shut down. If For details on how to set the foot switch, see VTR SET
The unit outputs the following time codes this button is activated and pushed out, check the unit menu on page 90 (GB).
depending on the operating state: and the camera connected to the CAMERA connector
9 CONTROL S connector (minijack)
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
Playing: The time code on the tape is output. to make sure they are not malfunctioning. If they
Recording: Either the time code generated by the appear to be functioning properly, press this button. If Connects to a remote control unit (DSRM-20, not
internal time code generator or the time code there are no problems, power will be supplied again. supplied) for controlling this unit.
signals from the external device are output.
For details, see DSR-50/50P time codes on page 62 6 DC IN 12V connector (XLR 4-pin/Male) 0 AUDIO MONITOR OUT jack (phono jack)
(GB). Used to supply the unit with DC power. Outputs the audio signals for monitoring. Select the
Note If you have installed a battery pack in the battery audio signals with the MONITOR SELECT selector
compartment, whichever power source is providing the qa.
If the JOG TC OUT on the TC/UB SET menu has
been set to ON, the time code is output during higher voltage provides the power to the unit.
qa MONITOR SELECT selector
search mode, but the output time code is not a Notes
Selects audio channels to output to the PHONES jack
continuous one. ¥ The DC power source must be 12 V to 17 V/2.0 A 1, AUDIO MONITOR OUT jack 0 and return
(peak: 4.0 A) or higher. sound to the camera.
4 DV IN/OUT connector (6-pin) ¥ If you have connected an AC adaptor to this CH1/2: Channels 1 and 2
Used to input/output the digital signal with a locking connector and the battery voltage is higher than the MIX: Channels 1 to 4
mechanism that complies with the i.LINK standard AC power, the battery power is used first. CH3/4: Channels 3 and 4
(Recommended cable: CCFD-3L, CCF-3L). If you For details on the DC IN 12V connector, see Power
have an external device that has a DV connector, you Preparations on page 31 (GB).
can connect that device to this connector to record or
duplicate a tape or capture pictures. The digital signals 7 CAMERA connector (26-pin)
for the sound or pictures captured through this Connects to a camera (not supplied). The unit can
connector have almost no degradation. For details, supply power to the external camera with this
refer to the instruction manual of the external device. connector.
Notes Note
¥ The DV/IN OUT connector of this unit is a 6-pin If you have installed a small capacity battery pack such
connector but does not provide power to any as a BP-L40(A) and supplied power to an external
connected external device. You can also use a 6-pin camera connected from the CAMERA connector, the
connector without a locking mechanism. operation time with the battery pack might be
¥ If video signals have been input to the DV IN/OUT significantly reduced when the camera power
connector and you output these video signals to the consumption is too high. Use a large capacity battery
VIDEO OUT1, VIDEO OUT2, or S VIDEO OUT pack or obtain power for the camera from a separate
connectors, the sync and burst of the EE pictures are power source.
not synchronized. For details on how to record images using the CAMERA
¥ i.LINK and the i.LINK logo are trademarks and connector, see Recording on page 45 (GB).
indicate that this product is in agreement with IEEE
1394-1995 specifications and their revisions.
Chapter 1 Overview 23 (GB) 24 (GB) Chapter 1 Overview
Location and Function of Parts
1 Video signal input/output section ¥ The superimposed data output to the LCD monitor 3 SUPERIMPOSE switch
and the VIDEO OUT1 are the same. You cannot Turn on this switch to superimpose text data onto the
Note ¥ Blue background screen or gray background screen display a different superimposed data. output from the VIDEO OUT1 connector.
You only can input standard video signals to the unit. from a consumer VCR ¥ The adjustment of VIDEO LVL on the VIDEO SET
Note
If you input the types of video signals shown below, ¥ Pictures played at a speed other than normal by a menu does not affect the VIDEO OUT1 output and
The return signal to the camera is the same as the
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
the EE picture output to the VIDEO OUT2 connector, VCR that does not have the TBC (Time Base return signal to the camera.
¥ If the unit is externally synchronized, jitters may output from the VIDEO OUT1 connector.
S VIDEO OUT connector and COMPONENT Corrector)
OUTPUT connectors may be distorted. ¥ Video signals in which the sync signals are distorted appear in the VIDEO OUT1 connector output and the
LCD monitor image because the sync signal 4 S VIDEO IN/OUT connectors (4-pin)
¥ Signals from some home game machines ¥ Signals from a defective cassette (tape or recording
frequency and the burst signals are not synchronized. Inputs/Outputs the S-video signal with separated Y
condition is bad) played by an analog VCR that does
If the unit is externally synchronized, use the VIDEO (luminance) and the C (chroma: 3.58 MHz for DSR-50
not have the TBC
OUT2 connector. If you use the VIDEO OUT1 and 4.43 MHz for DSR-50P).
connector, set EXT SYNC on the VIDEO SET menu
to OFF. 5 VIDEO/REF.IN (reference input) connector
(BNC-type)
3 SUPERIMPOSE switch
2 INPUT SELECT selector Inputs composite video signals to this unit. When
You can select DV, VIDEO, S VIDEO or CAMERA performing a playback synchronized with the external
to input the signals. The selected input is displayed on sync signal, this connector inputs reference video
4 S VIDEO IN/OUT connectors the TC screen of the LCD monitor. (black burst) signal.
Notes 6 VIDEO OUT2 connector (BNC-type)
1 VIDEO OUT1 connector ¥ When inputting signals from the DV IN/OUT Outputs composite video signals. The text data is not
connector, the following settings are disabled: superimposed.
5 VIDEO/REF. IN connector — Video input level
— Audio input selectors (CAM/LINE/+48V ON) 7 COMPONENT OUTPUT Y, R-Y, B-Y
6 VIDEO OUT2 connector — Audio input level control selectors (—60/—20/+4) connectors (BNC-type)
— Audio recording level Outputs component video (Y, R-Y, B-Y) signals.
2 INPUT SELECT selector 7 COMPONENT OUTPUT — Audio recording mode (AUTO/MANU)
connectors — Audio mode (32 kHz/48 kHz)
— Audio AGC (Auto Gain Control)
— Wind noise reduction
— Audio limiter
— You cannot display the color bars.
1 VIDEO OUT1 connector (BNC-type) ¥ The video signal output from this connector is not ¥ If you change this selector, the screen may
Outputs composite video signals. Connect to the input synchronized with the video signal output from the momentarily become bright or noise may appear.
connector of an external monitor. If the line-out connectors (COMPONENT OUTPUT, S This noise will be recorded.
SUPERIMPOSE switch 3 has been set to ON, text VIDEO OUT, VIDEO OUT2). When the unit is in
data (time data, menus and alarm messages) is the EE mode, the output pictures are delayed by
superimposed. several lines. When played, the picture is not
For details on the superimposed data, see Text data externally synchronized only vertically
superimposed on the LCD monitor on page 17 (GB). synchronized. You cannot adjust the sync and
Notes subcarrier phases.
¥ If DV input has been selected, color and luminance
¥ When a video sync signal of the EE pictures are
may be distorted in the EE mode, depending on the
output to the VIDEO OUT1 connector, sync and
monitor type.
burst are not synchronized.
Chapter 1 Overview 25 (GB) 26 (GB) Chapter 1 Overview
1-5
Location and Function of Parts
2 Audio signal input/output section 4 Audio input (CAM/LINE/+48V ON) selectors
Select audio signals input to channels 1 to 4 when the
INPUT SELECT selector is set to other than DV.
CAM: Audio signals from the CAMERA connector
LINE: Audio signals from the AUDIO INPUT
2 AUDIO INPUT connectors
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
connectors
+48V ON: Supplies power to the 48 V microphone.
Notes
¥ If you have selected +48V ON, do not insert a metal
object into the AUDIO INPUT connectors. It may
cause electric shock.
3 Audio input level control ¥ If you have selected +48V ON, use a microphone that
selectors is compatible with 48 V. Using a microphone that is
incompatible may damage the microphone, generate
4 Audio input selectors smoke or cause a fire.
¥ The +48V ON setting is in effect only when you use
the AUDIO INPUT connectors and the audio input
1 AUDIO OUTPUT
jacks
level control selectors 3 are set to —60 dB.
1 AUDIO OUTPUT CH-1 to CH-4 jacks (phono 3 Audio input level (—60/—20/+4) control selectors
jack) When the INPUT SELECT selector is set to other than
Outputs audio signals (CH-1 to CH-4). DV, select an audio input signal level (—60/—20/+4) for
the CAMERA connector or AUDIO INPUT
2 AUDIO INPUT CH-1 to CH-4 connectors (XLR connectors.
3-pin, female)
Notes
Inputs audio signals (CH-1 to CH-4).
¥ If this switch setting is not appropriate, clipping
Note distortion or noise may occur even if the AUDIO
The unit employs electronically balanced AUDIO SELECT switch has been set to AUTO.
INPUT connectors. To input unbalanced audio signals ¥ The unit is not compatible with a camera that outputs
(a phono jack of a consumer VCR, etc.), use a +4 dB. If you set the audio input selectors to CAM,
conversion cable as shown below. (This conversion select —60 dB or —20 dB depending on the output
cable shorts the COLD and the common terminal level of the camera.
(GND)). ¥ If you can select the output level (—60 dB or —20 dB)
on the camera, select —20 dB on the camera and the
unit. When the unit and the camera are connected
HOT with a long camera cable, noise may be minimized.
COM (GND)
Signal
2 1
3
GND
COLD
Chapter 1 Overview 27 (GB) 28 (GB) Chapter 1 Overview
Location and Function of Parts
2 CONTROL connector Notes
Left Panel
You can connect most of the LANC1) devices to this ¥ You cannot control the power on/off of the unit from
connector. On a regular LANC connector, you can a LANC device connected to the CONTROL
only switch to the recording mode from the stop mode. connector.
This unit has an extended function that allows you to ¥ The CONTROL connector of this unit has only
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
switch to the recording mode directly from the LANC-S functions. This unit has no LANC-M
playback, fast-forward, rewind, slow-play, still, cue functions.
and review modes.
Top Panel
1 DVCAM/DV select switch
2 CONTROL connector
(A lid is installed on the left panel at shipping.)
1 Battery cover
2 Battery cover lock
1 DVCAM/DV select switch — The time code automatically progresses so that the
Switches the recording mode between DVCAM and recorded tracks are continued.
DV (SP mode only). When you play back a tape, the — If you start recording from a blank portion, the time
DVCAM/DV setting will be automatically switched; code starts from 00:00:00:00.
you do not need to use this switch. — The user bits are not recorded. When you play back
the tape, the user bits display will be
Notes
—— —— —— —— .
¥ The unit is not compatible with playing or recording — Even if you input an external time code into the TC
in consumer DV format (LP mode). IN connector, the time code used will be the one
¥ If you switch the DVCAM/DV select switch setting provided by the internal time code generator.
while recording, the unit automatically pauses the ¥ If you dub a consumer DV tape from the DV IN/OUT 1 Battery cover
recording and then resumes recording several seconds connector, keep the following in mind: You can open the cover when you attach/remove the
later. Nothing is recorded during that interval. You — Set the DVCAM/DV select switch to DV. If the battery into/from the battery compartment.
cannot change the mode smoothly while recording. DVCAM/DV select switch has been set to
¥ It is recommended that you record in the DVCAM DVCAM, a tape with an invalid format (the 2 Battery cover lock
format. There are some limitations with respect to recording speed: DVCAM, sound: unsynchronized, Unlock when you open the battery cover.
DV recording depending on machine specifications unlock mode) will be made. (The unit cannot For details on how to install a battery pack, see Using the
and the consumer DV format as follows: convert unlock mode sound to lock mode sound.) BP-L40(A)/L60A/L90A Battery Pack on page 32 (GB).
— The head system is optimized for DVCAM — When you edit a tape with an invalid format in the
recording. A DV recording overwrites the last track DSR-70/70P, DSR-80/80P, DSR-85/85P, DSR-
just before the beginning of the recording. As a 2000/2000P, etc., there may be some restrictions.
result, at the border of these two recorded portions, For details on the DVCAM/DV format compatibility, see
picture and sound may be distorted. Compatibility of DVCAM and DV Format on page 99
— The sound will be recorded unsynchronized. (GB).
(unlock mode)
— The time code is fixed to the drop frame mode.
(only for DSR-50)
— You cannot change the TC PRESET, UB PRESET,
TC FORMAT, TC RUN, TC/UB IN, TC MAKE, ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
UB TIME settings on the TC/UB SET menu. The
1) LANC (Local Application Control bus system):
setting and status set at the time of the DVCAM
Bidirectional interface to control a consumer VCR.
recording will be canceled.
Chapter 1 Overview 29 (GB) 30 (GB) Chapter 1 Overview
1-6
Power Preparations Power Preparations
Chapter 2 PreparationsChapter 2
This unit can be powered by batteries or AC power.
Using the BP-L40(A)/L60A/L90A Battery Pack
Note
If you attach or remove batteries incorrectly, you may drop the battery, To charge the battery pack
causing bodily injury or damage to the battery. Attach or remove the Before use, charge the battery pack with the BC-L100 or BC-L50 battery
battery according to the procedure described below. charger.
For more information about how to charge the battery pack, refer to the
Usable Batteries instruction manual of the battery charger.
Use the following batteries: BP-L40, L40A, L60A, L90A. You will need
To attach the battery pack in the battery compartment
either the BC-L100 or the BC-L50 battery charger.
Chapter 2 Preparations
The battery compartment is on the top panel. Attach the battery pack (BP-
Notes about battery usage
L40(A)/L60A/L90A) in the battery compartment as shown below.
¥ Before using batteries, be sure to charge the battery with a charger
Preparations
specified for that particular type of battery. Refer to the operating
instructions of your battery charger for more information about how to 1 Lift up the battery cover lock and open the battery cover.
charge the batteries.
¥ Batteries may not be completely charged if you charge them immediately
after use when they are still warm. You should wait until the batteries
cool before charging them.
¥ This unit cannot charge the battery.
2 Align the three grooves on the bottom of the BP-L40(A)/L60A/L90A
with the three guides on the unit.
Battery connector
Chapter 2 Preparations 31 (GB) 32 (GB) Chapter 2 Preparations
Power Preparations
3 Slide the BP-L40(A)/L60A/L90A so that the battery connector Notes on Using the DC IN 12V Connector
connects to the battery connector of the unit. Continue to slide the BP-
L40(A)/L60A/L90A in until it clicks firmly into place. When you attach a battery pack in the battery compartment and connect a
battery adaptor or AC adaptor to the DC IN 12V connector, keep the
following in mind.
¥ Noise may appear momentarily on the image or sound in the following
cases:
— The power source has been switched between one from the battery
compartment and the other from the DC IN 12V connector.
— The power source is connected to the battery compartment (or to the
Chapter 2 Preparations
Chapter 2 Preparations
DC IN 12V connector) when the other power source has been
connected to the DC IN 12V connector (or to the battery compartment).
— One of the two power sources is disconnected from the battery
compartment or from the DC IN 12V connector.
¥ The remaining charge of the battery is displayed even if you use only the
AC adaptor for the power source.
¥ When you have connected both a battery pack and an AC adaptor, the
To remove the battery pack unit will use the battery pack power if the battery pack power is higher.
¥ If you attach a battery pack both in the battery compartment and to the
With the lever pushed in, slide the BP-L40(A)/L60A/L90A in the direction DC IN 12V connector, every time the voltage difference between the
of the arrow (see figure). battery pack and the DC IN 12V power becomes over 1V, the unit
switches to the higher voltage power source. If you use a small capacity
battery pack such as BP-L40(A), the power source will change
frequently. To avoid this, do the following:
— If you use a small capacity battery pack, do not attach battery packs
both in the battery compartment and in DC IN 12V connector at the
same time.
— Use a large capacity battery (e.g., BP-L60A, BP-L90A, etc.).
— Use an AC adaptor.
¥ If you have attached a small capacity battery pack such as a BP-L40(A)
Lever and the unit has supplied power to an external camera connected to the
CAMERA connector, the operation time of the unit with the battery pack
will be significantly reduced in the case where the camera power
consumption is too high. Use a large capacity battery pack, connect an
AC adaptor, or obtain power for the camera from a separate power
source.
¥ When the unit has supplied power to an external camera, make sure that
the total power consumption of the unit and the camera does not exceed
either the allowable battery pack power or allowable AC adaptor power.
Chapter 2 Preparations 33 (GB) 34 (GB) Chapter 2 Preparations
1-7
Connections
Power Preparations Connections
This section describes basic connections for recording or playback on the To digital video equipment with the DV jack
unit.
The video and audio signals are sent with hardly any degradation, enabling
Connections for Recording high-quality recording. The signal flow is automatically detected so you
need not make separate connections for input and output.
To an external camera
Digital video equipment
The unit can provide an external camera with power. with a DV jack DSR-50/50P (right panel)
To provide power to the camera from the unit, see Notes on Using the DC IN
12V Connector on the previous page.
Some cameras cannot accept power from the CAMERA connector.
Chapter 2 Preparations
Chapter 2 Preparations
For details, refer to the instruction manual of the camera.
to the
DV jack
Camera DSR-50/50P (right panel)
to the i.LINK cable (DV cable)
camera (not supplied)
connector
: Signal flow
Notes
Camera cable CCZ-As (not supplied)
¥ The DV IN/OUT connector in the unit is a 6-pin type but does not
provide power to external equipment.
: Signal flow ¥ With the DV connection, the data codes (recording date/time, camera
data) recorded on the tape in the player will be transmitted to the unit. To
display the same data code recorded on the source tape, set the DATA
Note CODE on the DISPLAY SET menu to DATE or CAMERA, or press the
Use the CCZ-As for the camera cable to meet the FCC Rules and DATA CODE button on the DSRM-20 remote control unit (not supplied)
EN55103-1. (The last numbers indicated by s are different depending on when you play back the recorded tape. However, the contents of the
the cable length.) cassette memory are not transmitted. If you want to transmit the contents
of the cassette memory, use the duplicate function.
For details on duplicate function, see Duplication (generating a work tape with
the same time code) on page 70 (GB).
¥ When no picture appears via the DV jack, disconnect, then reconnect the
i.LINK cable (DV cable).
Chapter 2 Preparations 35 (GB) 36 (GB) Chapter 2 Preparations
Connections
To video equipment without a DV jack (when using the DSR-50/50P as a recorder) Connections for Playback
You can connect this unit to video equipment without a DV jack. Use this
unit as a recorder as follows. To an external monitor
DSR-50/50P (Recorder) (right panel) Monitor
Player
DSR-50/50P (right panel)
Chapter 2 Preparations
Chapter 2 Preparations
to the S-video output
connector
to the audio
input jack
to the video output
connector to the
component input
to the audio output connectors
connector to the video
input connector
to the S-video input
connector
Phono jack cable (not supplied)
S-video cable (not supplied)
Video cable (3BNC y 3BNC) (not supplied)
75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)
75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)
Audio cable (XLR) (not supplied)
S-video cable (not supplied)
: Signal flow
: Signal flow
Connect one of the followings as a video cable; S-video cable or 75 Ω
coaxial cable. Connect one of the followings as a video cable; video cable (3BNC y
3BNC), 75 Ω coaxial cable, or S-video cable.
Notes
¥ When recording analog input signals, this unit can digitally output Notes
signals from the DV IN/OUT connector for backup. Set the DV EE OUT ¥ If you connect the input connectors of this VCR to the output connectors
on the VTR SET menu to ON. of the monitor, a humming noise may be generated or the image may be
¥ If you connect the output connectors of this VCR to the input connectors distorted.
of the player, a humming noise may be generated or the image may be ¥ Text data (time code, warnings, menus, etc.) are superimposed only on
distorted. the signal sent to the VIDEO OUT1 output.
¥ Distorted signals (e.g., when played back at a speed other than normal)
will not be recorded properly.
Chapter 2 Preparations 37 (GB) 38 (GB) Chapter 2 Preparations
1-8
Notes
Notes on Video
on Video Cassettes
Cassettes
To video equipment without a DV jack (when using the DSR-50/50P as a player) Usable cassettes
You can connect this unit to video equipment without a DV jack. Use this Use Standard-DVCAM cassettes or Mini-DVCAM cassettes with this unit.
unit as a player as follows. PDV-184 can record programs for 184 minutes and PDVM-40 can record
The following shows an example configuration of dubbing a tape with its for 40 minutes (DVCAM format).
time code in the externally-synchronized playback mode. In this You can get the highest quality pictures with this digital videocassette
configuration, the recorder is a VCR equipped with component input recorder using DVCAM cassettes. You may not be able to get as good
connectors. quality with other cassettes. We recommend using DVCAM cassettes so
that you can record your one-time events in the highest quality.
Monitor
Chapter 2 Preparations
75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)
DSR-50/50P (player) (right panel) DVCAM cassette
Mini DVCAM cassette
to the audio input
jack
to the video input
Reference signal connector
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
generator
SG 75 Ω coaxial cable
(not supplied)
to the
B.B.OUT
to the
connector
B.B.OUT
connector
Cassette memory
Phono jack cable (not
supplied)
75 Ω coaxial cable
(not supplied) to the REF.VIDEO Cassette memory is an optional feature that is mounted on some Standard
connector DVCAM cassettes and Mini DVCAM cassettes. When you record a
recorder
program, the recording date and time, and the programs position on the
tape are stored in the cassette memory so that you can quickly locate the
program later on. indicates that you can use the cassettes to store
up to 16 kbits of data. On this unit, you can use cassettes on which up to 16
kbits of data can be stored.
to the time code
input connector
To save a recording
to the to the To prevent accidental erasure of a recording, slide in the REC/SAVE
audio component input 75 Ω coaxial cable
input connectors (not supplied) switch on the cassette so that the red portion becomes visible. To record on
connectors Video cable (3BNC y 3BNC) (not supplied) a tape, slide out the switch so that the red portion is hidden.
Conversion cable (XLR y phono) (not supplied)
Amplifier (as needed) : Signal flow REC/SAVE switch
Set to SAVE.
Notes
¥ If you connect the input connectors of this VCR to the output connectors REC
of the monitor or recorder, a humming noise may be generated or the SAVE
image may be distorted.
¥ Text data (time code, warnings, menus, etc.) are superimposed only on
the signal sent to the VIDEO OUT1 output.
¥ To play back synchronized with the reference video (black burst) signal,
set the EXT SYNC on the VIDEO SET menu to ON.
Chapter 2 Preparations 39 (GB) 40 (GB) Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
Notes on Video Cassettes
Chapter 3 Playback and RecordingChapter 3
Checking the tape for slack 2 After checking the tape for slack, hold the cassette so that the tape
window is facing upward, then insert it into the unit.
Using a paper clip or a similar object, turn the reel gently in the direction
shown by the arrow. If the reel does not move, there is no slack. Mini cassette
Insert the mini cassette into the
center of the cassette compartment.
Standard cassette
Paper clip, etc.
Reel
Tape window facing upward
The cassette is automatically loaded into the unit.
Inserting/Ejecting Cassettes
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
3 Close the cassette lid.
To insert a cassette
Playback and Recording
To eject the cassette
Notes
¥ Do not insert the cassette forcibly. The unit may be damaged. 1 With the unit powered on, open the cassette lid. Press the EJECT
¥ Do not eject/load the cassette in a place subject to light. Make sure to button located at the right side of the cassette compartment.
close the cassette lid when using the unit. The internal sensor of the unit
may operate incorrectly if too much light falls on the unit.
1 With the unit powered on, slide the OPEN switch to the right and
unlock the cassette lid. Open the cassette lid.
The cassette is unloaded and ejected.
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording 41 (GB) 42 (GB) Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
1-9
Notes on Video Cassettes
2 Remove the cassette from the unit. Close the cassette lid. ¥ The outputs from the VIDEO OUT2, S VIDEO OUT and COMPONENT
OUTPUT connectors are muted.
Note ¥ When the unit plays a tape recorded in the other color system, the image,
If the battery power falls to below about 11 V, the unit cannot eject the sound and time code may be distorted for a while at the beginning of
cassette with the EJECT button. Exchange the battery with a fully charged playback.
one or use an AC adaptor to obtain sufficient power. ¥ The TC OUT connector outputs incorrect time code. Do not use this time
For details on confirming the remaining battery power, see TC screen on page code.
18 (GB). ¥ The unit cannot play back synchronized with the external sync signal.
¥ Noise reduction results for the luminance and chrominance signals may
Notes on Recording/Playback differ between PAL formatted tape and NTSC formatted tapes.
No compensation for contents of the recording Limitations regarding the differences in color systems
Contents of the recording cannot be compensated for if recording or Except for the simple playback function for a tape recorded in the other
playback is not successful due to a malfunction of the unit, video tape, etc. color system, this unit is not compatible with any other color systems.
¥ This unit cannot record video signals of the other format.
Copyright precautions ¥ Inputting the other format video signals does not output the EE pictures
correctly. The video output may be muted and any signal may not be
On recording displayed.
You cannot record any software having copyright protection signals on
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
¥ You may not be able to dub sound correctly from a tape recorded in the
this unit. If you start recording protected video and audio signals, a other color system in this unit.
warning appears on the monitor screen and the unit stops recording. ¥ If a tape has both NTSC and PAL formatted video signals, the following
limitations exist when you play the tape with this unit:
On playback — The image may be distorted and noise may occur at the point that the
When you play back software having copyright protection signals on this recording format changes in the tape.
unit, you may not be able to copy it onto other equipment. — The tape transport control buttons may be disabled until the tape speed
is stabilized.
Limitations caused by the difference in format
The unit can record and play back tapes recorded in DVCAM format. It
can also record and play back tapes recorded in DV format (SP mode).
However, due to the difference in format, you may not be able to record or
edit some tapes affected by recording conditions of the tape (e.g., A tape
originally recorded in DV format is dubbed in DVCAM format).
For details, see Compatibility of DVCAM and DV Format on page 99 (GB).
Simple playback function for a tape recorded in PAL system
(for DSR-50) or in NTSC system (for DSR-50P)
The DSR-50 can play a PAL tape (DSR-50P can play a NTSC tape)
recorded in the DVCAM format or consumer DV format (SP mode only).
This function has the following limitations:
¥ The video signals are output only to the LCD monitor, VIDEO OUT1
output, and return signal to the camera.
¥ The output video signals are in the format recorded in the tape. You
cannot convert the signals into the other format. If you want to display
the VIDEO OUT1 output, you will need a video monitor able to handle
the format recorded in the tape. If you want to display the return video
signals to the camera on the viewfinder, you will need a video camera
able to handle the format recorded in the tape.
¥ The VIDEO OUT1 output and the return video signals to the camera are
optimized and adjusted for one format (DSR-50: NTSC format; DSR-
50P: PAL format). If you play back a tape recorded in the other format,
the levels and phases of the video signal may not be correct.
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording 43 (GB) 44 (GB) Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
Recording Recording
This section describes the settings and operations to record on this unit. 1 Turn on the POWER switch.
For details on connection, see Connections on page 35 (GB).
Notes
2 Set the INPUT SELECT selector to CAMERA.
¥ Before starting a recording session, set the clock on the unit so that the 3 Set up the camera for shooting.
recording time can be written into the index signal. You can set the clock For details, refer to the instruction manual of the camera.
by setting the CLOCK SET on the OTHERS menu.
¥ If you use a source that is copyright protected, recording and operation 4 Set the audio input selectors to CAM.
may be restricted.
¥ During a recording, the tape transport control buttons (except STOP and 5 Set the audio input level control selectors properly according to the
PAUSE) are disabled to prevent the tape running mode from being audio level of the camera.
changed by an incorrect operation. To disable the STOP and PAUSE
buttons, set the KEY INH switch to ON after the unit starts recording. In 6 Select the audio input level adjustment mode in the AUDIO SELECT
this case, set the KEY INH switch to OFF first, then stop or pause the switches.
recording.
7 If necessary, adjust the audio input level by turning the audio recording
level control knobs.
Recording Using an External Camera
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
You can adjust the recording level with the audio recording level
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
Settings for recording control knobs if you have selected MANU in step 6. While looking at
the audio level meters on the LCD monitor or the display window, turn
the audio recording level control knobs and adjust the recording level.
Adjust the audio recording level so that the recording level does not
exceed 0 dB when the audio signal is at its maximum. If the recording
External camera
2 Right panel
level exceeds 0 dB, the OVER indicators light.
3
5
6
1
4
DSR-50/50P
(recorder)
7
(Continued)
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording 45 (GB) 46 (GB) Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
1-10
Recording
Recording procedure To pause recording
¥ If you have pressed the VTR button on the camera to start shooting, press
the VTR button on the camera. Pressing the PAUSE button on the unit
does not pause the recording.
¥ If you have pressed the PAUSE button on the unit to start shooting, press
the PAUSE button on the unit. To pause recording with the VTR button
on the camera, press the VTR button twice.
To start recording using the DSRM-20 Remote Control Unit (not
supplied)
Press the PLAY button while pressing the REC button. The unit changes to
the recording pause mode. Pressing the PAUSE button on the DSRM-20
1 starts the recording.
When the battery pack is almost exhausted
The unit has a battery compartment and a DC IN 12V connector. When the
battery pack in the battery compartment is almost exhausted, you can
temporarily connect an AC adaptor to the DC IN 12V connector then
exchange the battery pack to continue the recording and this can be done
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
without interrupting the recording. In this case, however, some noise may
3 2 be recorded.
Notes
¥ The unit does not record any pictures unless the video signals are input
1 After checking that the REC/SAVE switch of the cassette is set to the (except when inputting signals from the DV IN/OUT connector). If there
are no video signals or signals are interrupted during recording, the unit
write enabled position and checking the tape for slack, hold the
cassette so that the tape window is facing upward, then insert it into pauses; if signals resume, the unit resumes recording.
this unit. ¥ If the camera outputs both component and composite signals, the unit
uses the component signals.
The cassette is automatically loaded into the unit and the tape will stop. ¥ If you press the VTR button on the camera to start recording, the tape
For details of the REC/SAVE switch and checking the tape for slack, see transport control buttons, except the STOP button on the unit, are
Notes on Video Cassettes on page 40 (GB). disabled.
¥ The return video signals to the camera are the same as those for the
2 Press the PLAY button while pressing the REC button. VIDEO OUT1 output. If you have turned off the SUPERIMPOSE switch,
the superimposed data on the return video signal to the camera will not be
The unit turns to the recording pause mode. The REC and PLAY displayed.
indicators light. The PAUSE indicator flashes. ¥ The unit changes to the stop mode after the recording has been paused for
more than five minutes to protect the tape if you have set FROM REC P
3 Press the VTR button on the camera, or press the PAUSE button on the on the VTR SET menu to STOP. Repeat the procedure from step 2 to
unit. start recording again.
The unit starts recording and the index is marked.
To stop recording
Press the STOP button on the unit.
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording 47 (GB) 48 (GB) Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
Recording
Recording Using the Player 6 Select the audio input level adjustment mode in the AUDIO SELECT
switches.
Note
Settings for recording
You cannot adjust the recording level if you record signals input from
the DV IN/OUT connector.
7 If necessary, adjust the audio input level by turning the audio recording
Player (DSR-40/40P, etc.) 2 Right panel
level control knobs.
You can adjust the recording level with the audio recording level
3 control knobs if you have selected MANU in step 6. While looking at
5 the audio level meters on the LCD monitor or the display window, turn
the audio recording level control knobs and adjust the recording level.
6 Adjust the audio recording level so that the recording level does not
exceed 0 dB when the audio signal is at its maximum. If the recording
1 level exceeds 0 dB, the OVER indicators light.
4
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
Recording Procedure
DSR-50/50P
(recorder)
7
1 Turn on the POWER switch.
2
2 Select an input signal by switching the INPUT SELECT selector.
1
DV: to record input signals from the DV IN/OUT connector
VIDEO: to record input signals from the VIDEO/REF.IN connector
S VIDEO: to record input signals from the S VIDEO IN connector
3 Set up the player to play back a tape.
For details, refer to the instruction manual of the player.
3
4 Set the audio input selectors to LINE.
Note
You do not need to set these selectors if you record signals input from 1 After checking that the REC/SAVE switch of the cassette is set to the
the DV IN/OUT connector. write enabled position and checking the tape for slack, hold the
cassette so that the tape window is facing upward, then insert it into
5 Set the audio input level control selectors properly according to the this unit.
audio level of the player.
The cassette is automatically loaded into the unit and the tape will stop.
For details of the REC/SAVE switch and checking the tape for slack, see
(Continued)
Notes on Video Cassettes on page 40 (GB).
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording 49 (GB) 50 (GB) Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
1-11
Recording
2 Press the playback button on the player.
Other Recording Functions
The player starts playback.
Marking an index
3 Press the PLAY button while pressing the REC button.
By pressing the INDEX button during a recording, you can mark an index
The unit starts recording and the index is marked. signal at any place in the tape. The index signal is marked for five seconds.
If you mark an index at the scene you want to search for, you can easily
To stop recording
search for the scene later.
Press the STOP button on the unit.
When you start recording in the stop mode, the index signal is marked
automatically.
To pause recording
If you press the INDEX button while recording, the INDEX MARK
Press the PAUSE button on the unit.
indicator appears for seven seconds on the LCD monitor and the VIDEO
OUT1 output (if you have turned on the SUPERIMPOSE switch) and the
To start recording using the DSRM-20 Remote Control Unit
index is marked.
(not supplied)
If you use a cassette with cassette memory, the index will also be marked
Press the PLAY button while pressing the REC button.
in the cassette memory.
To record without inputting any video signals
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
Notes
Set the INPUT SELECT selector to other than DV, then set the COLOR
¥ You cannot mark a new index while the INDEX MARK indicator is
BAR (for DSR-50)/COLOUR BAR (for DSR-50P) on the DISPLAY SET
showing.
menu to ON. The color bars are recorded on the tape. The sound is
¥ If you record on a location in the tape where an index has been marked,
recorded according to the setting of the audio input selectors.
the index will be erased. You cannot delete just an index while keeping
Note the image or sound.
¥ You cannot mark an index during playback, duplicate or audio dubbing
The unit does not record any pictures unless the video signals are input
operations. The INDEX button is disabled in these operations.
(except when inputting signals from the DV IN/OUT connector). If there
¥ The cassette memory space available limits the number of the indexes
are no video signals or signals are interrupted during recording, the unit
that you can mark by pressing the INDEX button. When you use a
pauses; if signals resume, the unit resumes recording.
previously recorded tape for repeated recording, make more memory
space available by erasing unwanted items using ITEM ERASE or
ERASE ALL on the CM SET menu before you start recording.
To use an index during playback
You will need the DSRM-20 remote control unit (not supplied).
For details on the playback function using the DSRM-20, see Other Playback
Functions on page 55 (GB).
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording 51 (GB) 52 (GB) Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
Playback Playback
This section describes the required settings and operations to perform
Playback Procedure
playback on this unit.
For details on connection, see Connections on page 35 (GB).
Settings for Playback
Video monitor
2
1
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
DSR-50/50P
1
2
1 After checking the tape for slack, hold the cassette so that the tape
1 Turn on the POWER switch. window is facing upward, then insert it into this unit.
2 Turn on the power to the video monitor and set the switches of the For details on checking the tape for slack, see Notes on Video Cassettes on
monitor as shown below. page 40 (GB).
Note
Switch Setting
75 Ω ON (or attach a 75 Ω terminator)
Do not insert the cassette forcibly. The unit may be damaged.
Input switch Set according to the type of input signal from this unit.
2 Press the PLAY button.
This starts the playback operation.
To stop playback
Press the STOP button.
To pause playback
Press the PAUSE button.
Note
When the unit is playing the part of the tape where the format has been
changed between the DVCAM format and the DV format, the picture and
sound may be distorted.
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording 53 (GB) 54 (GB) Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
1-12
Setting
Setting theCode
the Time TimeandCode and
User Bits User Bits
This unit can set, display, record and play back the Use the COUNTER switch to select the type of time
Other Playback Functions SMPTE/EBU time code and user bits. The unit can data to be displayed.
also output the time code read from the tape as an TC: Time code
You can enjoy various playback functions using the DSRM-20 optional analog (LTC) signal when it is played back at normal U-BIT: User bits
remote control unit. speed, and receive an external analog time code (LTC)
For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with DSRM-20. Note
signal.
If the recording on the tape includes discontinuities,
Playing at various speeds (JOG) the counter may operate incorrectly during playback at
You can play at various speeds, or play frame by frame. Displaying Text Data Such as the corresponding points.
Time Data
Searching (SHUTTLE)
You can easily locate the desired scene. The LCD monitor on the unit can display
Using the Internal Time Code
superimposed menus, warnings, audio levels, the Generator
Searching using the index function operation statuses and time data.
Four kinds of search are available: You can set the initial time code value before
— Searching for the beginnings of recordings: Index search For details on the menus, see Chapter 6 Adjusting and recording the time code generated by the internal time
— Searching for the boundaries of recorded tape by title: Title search Setting Through Menus on page 76 (GB). code generator onto a tape. In addition, you can set the
— Searching for a point on the tape where the recorded date changes: Date user bits to record user bit data such as the date, time,
search scene number, reel number, or other useful
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording
— Searching for scenes recorded in the photo mode with a digital To display text data information. The time data settings are set by using the
camcorder: Photo search menu.
To display the operation statuses, time data, etc., on For details on the menu, see Chapter 6 Adjusting and
Note the LCD monitor, set the DISPLAY (LCD OFF/OFF/ Setting Through Menus on page 76 (GB).
You cannot make a title, record the date for search, or record in the photo ON) selector to ON, and the DISPLAY (MENU/TC/
mode with this unit. AUDIO) selector to TC. If you turn the
SUPERIMPOSE switch on, the text data is To set the initial time code value
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
Displaying the tape information superimposed on the output from the VIDEO OUT1
connector. This section describes how to set the time code s initial
Data codes (shutter speed, iris, white balance, program AE mode, gain, value.
etc.) are recorded in tapes recorded on a Sony Digital Camcorder (DSR-
200/200P, 200A/200AP, PD100/PD100P, PD100A/PD100AP, PD150/ Notes
To display the desired time data in the
PD150P, etc.). You can display and check these data codes during ¥ The time code can be set only in a DVCAM format
time counter display
playback by setting the DATA CODE on the DISPLAY SET menu to recording. It cannot be set in a DV format recording.
DATE or CAMERA in this unit, or by pressing the DATA CODE button Make sure you set the DVCAM/DV select switch to
on the DSRM-20. DVCAM.
Time code indicator
¥ Before setting the initial time code value, set TC/UB
COUNTER switch
IN on the TC/UB SET menu to INTERNAL and TC
Time counter display
MAKE to PRESET.
For details on TC/UB IN and TC MAKE, see TC/UB SET
menu on page 78 (GB).
Chapter 3 Playback and Recording 55 (GB) 56 (GB) Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
Setting the Time Code and User Bits
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting
1 Set the DISPLAY (LCD OFF/OFF/ON) selector to 4 Rotate the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select 1 Set the DISPLAY (LCD OFF/OFF/ON) selector to 4 Rotate the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
ON, and the DISPLAY (MENU/TC/AUDIO) PRESET, then press the dial. ON, and the DISPLAY (MENU/TC/AUDIO) PRESET, then press the dial.
selector to MENU. selector to MENU.
The following menu appears. The following menu appears.
The LCD monitor displays the menu. If you turn The LCD monitor displays the menu. If you turn
TC ⁄ UB SET
the SUPERIMPOSE switch on, the menu is also TC TC PRESET O O O O the SUPERIMPOSE switch on, the menu is also TC ⁄ UB SET
CM UB PRESET 00:00:00:00 TC TC PRESET O O O O
displayed on the VIDEO OUT1 output. DISP TC FORMAT o o o o displayed on the VIDEO OUT1 output. CM UB PRESET 00 00 00 00
V TC RUN SET DISP TC FORMAT o o o o
A TC ⁄ UB IN CANCEL V TC RUN SET
TC ⁄ UB SET LCD TC MAKE TC ⁄ UB SET A TC ⁄ UB IN CANCEL
TC TC PRESET VTR UB TIME TC TC PRESET LCD TC MAKE
CM UB PRESET ETC JOG TC OUT CM UB PRESET VTR UB TIME
DISP TC FORMAT RETURN DISP TC FORMAT ETC JOG TC OUT
V TC RUN V TC RUN RETURN
A TC ⁄ UB IN A TC ⁄ UB IN
LCD TC MAKE LCD TC MAKE
UB TIME UB TIME
VTR
ETC JOG TC OUT 5 Set the first two digits. Rotate the SEL/PUSH
VTR
ETC JOG TC OUT 5 Set the first two digits. Rotate the SEL/PUSH
EXEC dial to select the number, then press the EXEC dial to select the number, then press the
dial. dial.
(The TC FORMAT submenu is only for DSR-50.)
6 2 Rotate the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TC/UB
Repeat step 5 to set the other digits. SET, then press the dial. 6 Repeat step 5 to set the other digits.
2 Rotate the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TC/UB
SET, then press the dial. 7 Rotate the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select SET, The following menu appears. 7 Rotate the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select SET,
then press the dial. then press the dial.
The following menu appears. TC ⁄ UB SET
The initial time code value is set and the menu TC TC PRESET 00:00:00:00
display returns to step 2. CM UB PRESET The user bits are set and the menu display returns
TC ⁄ UB SET
TC TC PRESET 00:00:00:00
DISP TC FORMAT
V TC RUN
to step 2.
CM UB PRESET
8 TC ⁄ UB IN
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
Chapter
A
Rotate the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
DISP
V
TC FORMAT
TC RUN RETURN, then press the dial.
LCD TC MAKE
VTR UB TIME 8 Rotate the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
the
A TC ⁄ UB IN ETC JOG TC OUT
RETURN, then press the dial.
4 Setting
LCD TC MAKE RETURN
VTR UB TIME The menu display returns to step 1.
ETC JOG TC OUT
Video
RETURN The menu display returns to step 1.
To cancel the time code setting 3
the Time Signals
Rotate the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select UB
Select CANCEL in step 7, then press the SEL/PUSH PRESET, then press the dial. To cancel the user bits setting
3 Rotate the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TC EXEC dial. Select CANCEL in step 7, then press the SEL/PUSH
Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
PRESET, then press the dial. The following menu appears. EXEC dial.
To reset the time code
The following menu appears. Select RESET in step 4, then press the SEL/PUSH TC ⁄ UB SET To reset the user bits
EXEC dial. TC TC PRESET
Select RESET in step 4, then press the SEL/PUSH
CM UB PRESET 00 00 00 00
TC ⁄ UB SET DISP TC FORMAT EXEC dial.
TC TC PRESET 00:00:00:00 V TC RUN RESET
CM UB PRESET A TC ⁄ UB IN PRESET
DISP TC FORMAT RESET To set the value of the user bits LCD TC MAKE RETURN
V TC RUN PRESET VTR UB TIME
A TC ⁄ UB IN RETURN ETC JOG TC OUT
LCD TC MAKE You can set the user bits as eight-digit hexadecimal RETURN
VTR UB TIME
ETC JOG TC OUT values (base 16) to have the date, time, scene number,
RETURN
and other information inserted into the time code track.
Notes
¥ The user bits can be set only in a DVCAM format
recording. It cannot be set in a DV format recording.
¥ Before setting the user bits, set the TC/UB IN on the
TC/UB SET menu to INTERNAL and UB TIME to
OFF.
For details on TC/UB IN and UB TIME, see TC/UB SET
menu on page 78 (GB).
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals 57 (GB) 58 (GB) Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
1-13
http://getMANUAL.com
Setting the Time Code and User Bits
To set the frame mode (DSR-50 only) To set the time code when the recording To select the time code/user bits to record
starts on the tape
Set TC FORMAT on the TC/UB SET menu to switch
the frame mode. Set TC MAKE on the TC/UB SET menu to select the You can set the time code and user bits to record on
AUTO: Automatically sets the mode in accordance time code when you start recording. the tape by setting TC/UB IN on the TC/UB SET
with the inserted cassette. REGEN: The time code value is set to continue the menu.
If nothing is recorded on the tape, the mode is set time code from the time code already recorded on INTERNAL: Uses the internal time code/user bits.
to the non-drop frame mode. If the unit cannot the tape. If you start recording from a blank TC&UB EXT: Uses the external time code/user bits.
read the frame mode correctly in the tape, the unit portion of the tape, the time code starts from TC EXT: Uses the external time code and internal
will use the mode that was set in the last position 00:00:00:00. user bits.
it was able to read correctly on the tape. If you PRESET: The time code value is set to the time code UB EXT: Uses the internal time code and external
turn the power on/off or remove the tape, the from the value set in PRESET in TC PRESET on user bits.
mode of the last position it was able to read the TC/UB SET menu.
Notes
correctly is cleared and the mode is set to the non-
drop frame mode. If TC MAKE is set to PRESET, ¥ This unit has a DV IN/OUT connector. The time code
the mode is set to the non-drop frame mode. To switch the time code output when input or output is different when you connect the unit
DF: Selects the drop frame mode. playing at various speeds (JOG) to an external device via this DV IN/OUT connector
NDF: Selects the non-drop frame mode. or via another input/output connector.
Set JOG TC OUT on the TC/UB SET menu to control For details, see DSR-50/50P time codes on page 62
Note (GB).
the time code output from the TC OUT connector
In a DV format recording, the drop-frame mode is ¥ The time code output from this unit has some
when the tape is played at various speeds.
used automatically. restrictions.
OFF: Does not output the time code.
For details, see Notes on the Time Codes on page 63
ON: Outputs the time code. (GB).
To set the advancement mode Note
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
The continuous time code is output only when the tape
Set TC RUN on the TC/UB SET menu to switch the is played at normal speed. When the unit is in the jog
advancement mode (counting up). or search mode, discontinuous time code is output.
REC RUN: Time code advances only while
recording.
FREE RUN: Time code advances even when the To set the current time in the user bits
unit is not recording. This mode is used to set the
current time as the initial time code value, or to You can set the current time in the user bits by setting
synchronize the internal time code to an external the UB TIME on the TC/UB SET menu.
time code. OFF: The value set in PRESET in UB PRESET on
the TC/UB SET menu is set to the user bits.
Notes
ON: The value set in CLOCK SET on the OTHERS
¥ If you set the advancement mode to FREE RUN, the menu is set to the user bits.
time code will be updated by the internal clock during
the unit power is off. The time code may have been Note
delayed or advanced somewhat if you turn on the unit This function is available only when TC/UB IN on the
power again, play back a tape, or set the INPUT TC/UB SET menu is set to INTERNAL or TC EXT.
SELECT selector to DV.
¥ If the internal backup battery charge is exhausted, the
time code of the FREE RUN setting will be
initialized. The internal backup battery is fully
charged if you connect the power to the unit for about
10 hours. A fully charged internal battery can run for
about one month.
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals 59 (GB) 60 (GB) Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
Synchronizing the Time Codes Synchronizing the Time Codes
You can synchronize the internal time code generator To synchronize the internal time code to DSR-50/50P time codes
of the unit by inputting an external time code signal an external time code
(LTC).
This unit has a DV IN/OUT connector. The time code when the INPUT SELECT selector is set to DV and
1 Set the INPUT SELECT selector to other than DV. output and recorded on the tape differs as shown below when it is set to other than DV.
Connecting to the Time Code
Generator 2 Input an external time code (LTC) signal to the TC TC/UB IN INPUT SELECT Mode TC IN
The time code output from the
TC OUT (INT) connector and the time code/
IN connector of the unit. menu selector (EXT) user bits recorded on the tape
Playback
3 Set TC/UB IN on the TC/UB SET menu to Audio dubbing Time code on the tape
Time code generator TC&UB EXT or TC EXT. Playback Playback at various
DSR-50/50P (right panel) JOG TC OUT: ON – Time code on the tape;
speeds a)
JOG TC OUT: OFF – Mute (No output)
The internal time code generator locks onto the DUB1 b)
external time code and starts advancing. Once the Duplicate Time code of another device connected to the
DUP1 b) DV IN/OUT connector c)
internal time code generator has become
to time DV Recording
synchronized in this way, you can disconnect the Recording Pause Time code internally generated c)
code
output external time code input and this unit will maintain INTERNAL REC1 b)
connector the time code from the external device. VIDEO
Recording
S VIDEO Time code internally generated c)
Notes Recording Pause
CAMERA
REC1 b)
75 Ω coaxial cable ¥ This unit has a DV IN/OUT connector. The time code (Except DV)
(not supplied) Duplicate Time code of another device connected to the
input or output is different when you connect the unit
DUP1 b) DV IN/OUT connector c)
to an external device via this DV IN/OUT connector
DV Recording
: Signal flow
or via another input/output connector. Recording Pause Time code internally generated c)
For details, see DSR-50/50P time codes on page 62 REC1 b)
(GB). UB EXT Time code connected to TC IN (EXT) is
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
¥ The time code output from this unit has some Yes
VIDEO through-output.
restrictions. EE
S VIDEO
Recording
Recording Pause No output from the TC OUT (INT) connector
For details, see Notes on the Time Codes on page 63 CAMERA (For details, see next page.) : the time code
(GB). REC1 b) No
(Except DV) and user bits generated internally are
recorded on the tape.
Duplicate Time code of another device connected to the
To confirm external synchronization DUP1 b) DV IN/OUT connector c)
DV Time code: Time code of another device
Before you start recording, check that the internal time Recording connected to the DV IN/OUT
Recording Pause connector
code is synchronized to the external time code. REC1 b)
Press the STOP button to put the unit into stop mode, User bits: User bits internally generated d)
TC&UB EXT
then press the REC button. TC EXT Time code connected to TC IN (EXT) is
Yes
VIDEO through-output.
Look at the time counter display and check that the Recording
S VIDEO
time code value displayed there matches the external CAMERA Recording Pause No No output from the TC OUT (INT) connector
time code value. (Except DV) REC1 b) (For details, see next page.) : the time code
and user bits generated internally are
recorded on the tape.
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals 61 (GB) 62 (GB) Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
1-14
Synchronizing the Time Codes
a) This includes stop, fast-forward or rewind. If the unit ¥ The internal time code is output with the phase ¥ To display and check the time code currently being
cannot read the time code on the tape correctly, the
Notes on the Time Codes advanced with the FREE RUN setting, press the REC
synchronized to the line-outs (COMPONENT
counter displays — —:— —:— —:— — and the time code is OUTPUT, S VIDEO OUT, VIDEO OUT2) when TC/ button when all the conditions below are met.
not output from the TC OUT connector. Time codes output from the unit have the following
UB IN on the TC/UB SET menu is set to — The unit is in the stop mode.
b) DUB1 , DUP1 and REC1 represent the state of the restrictions:
INTERNAL. — The COUNTER switch is set to TC.
unit when you press each of these buttons (AUDIO DUB, ¥ The unit outputs an EE signal when it is in recording
DUP or REC) in the stop mode. If the counter displays (When the EE signal is output, the output signals of — TC RUN on the TC/UB SET menu is set to FREE
or recording pause modes, or when you press the
— —:— —:— —:— — , the time code is not output from the TC the line-outs are delayed for one line from the input RUN.
REC button.
OUT connector when you press the AUDIO DUB button video signal when the component video (CAMERA) — TC MAKE on the TC/UB SET menu is set to
in the stop mode. While the unit outputs an EE signal, only the time code
or S-video is input, and delayed for two lines from PRESET.
c) The time code is also displayed on the time counter from an external device that is connected to the TC IN
the input video signal when the composite video If you press the STOP button, the time code display
display in the display window. connector will be through-output from the TC OUT
(CAMERA, VIDEO/REF.IN) is input.) returns to the last time code value it was able to read
d) When the DVCAM/DV select switch is set to DV, the connector when the INPUT SELECT selector is set to
¥ When inputting signals from the DV IN/OUT on the tape.
time code generated internally is output. other than DV and TC/UB IN on the TC/UB SET menu
connector, if you set TC/UB IN to INTERNAL or ¥ To display the current time that is set in CLOCK SET
has been set to other than INTERNAL. (The time code
UB EXT, the time code and user bits generated on the OTHERS menu as the user bits, press the REC
and user bits that are internally generated are not output
internally are recorded under the INTERNAL setting button when all the conditions below are met.
from the TC OUT connector.)
in TC/UB IN on the TC/UB SET menu. If you want — The unit is in the stop mode.
In this case, as a result, the time code will not be
to record with the time code input from the DV IN/ — The COUNTER switch is set to U-BIT.
output from the TC OUT connector when the time
OUT connector, set TC/UB IN to TC EXT or — UB TIME on the TC/UB SET menu is set to ON.
code is not input from the external device connected
TC&UB EXT, or use the duplicate function. (If UB TIME is set to OFF, the value set in UB
to the TC IN connector.
¥ When the DVCAM/DV select switch is set to PRESET will be displayed.)
You need to set TC/UB IN on the TC/UB SET menu
DVCAM, if you set TC/UB IN to TC EXT or If you press the STOP button, the user bits display
to INTERNAL to output a time code from the TC
TC&UB EXT, this unit records the time code input returns to the last value it was able to read on the
OUT connector even if no time code has been input
from the DV IN/OUT connector and the user bits tape.
from an external device connected to the TC IN
internally generated, and the TC OUT connector ¥ If the external time code input is discontinuous or
connector.
outputs the same time code and user bits. does not advance correctly, the time code input may
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
To set the unit to inherit a time code from the external
¥ During the duplicate operation, this unit records the be delayed compared to the time code recorded on the
device even after you set TC/UB IN to INTERNAL
time code and user bits on the source tape currently tape or the time code shown on the display of this
from some other setting, follow the steps below.
being duplicated and the TC OUT connector outputs unit. If there is a discontinuous time code on your
the same time code and user bits. The time code and recorded tape, you may not be able to edit or search
1 Match the settings (used when TC/UB IN is set to
user bits are output with the phase synchronized to correctly, depending on the device connected to this
INTERNAL) of the unit with the external device
the line-outs (COMPONENT OUTPUT, S VIDEO unit.
time code format. (See the setting example
OUT, VIDEO OUT2) during the duplicate operation.
below.)
For details on the duplicate function, see Duplication
2 After setting TC/UB IN to other than (generating a work tape with the same time code) on
INTERNAL, input the time code from the page 70 (GB).
external device connected to the TC IN ¥ During the audio dubbing operation, the TC OUT
connector. connector outputs the time code and user bits on the
tape currently being played.
3 Set TC/UB IN on the TC/UB SET menu to For details on audio dubbing, see Audio Dubbing on
INTERNAL. page 74 (GB).
4 Disconnect the external device from the TC IN
connector.
Setting example
If the time code setting of the external device is
TC: Drop frame; UB: 12 34 56 78.
This unit menu Setting
TC RUN FREE RUN
TC FORMAT DF
UB PRESET 12 34 56 78
(The TC FORMAT submenu is only for DSR-50.)
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals 63 (GB) 64 (GB) Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
Adjusting the Sync and Subcarrier Phases of the
Video Signals Adjusting the Sync and Subcarrier Phases of the Video Signals
When you adjust the phases of the video signals,
follow the steps below.
5 Play back a tape from this unit after setting EXT
SYNC on the VIDEO SET menu to ON.
6 Press the A channel button on the vectorscope.
A IN
The vectorscope displays the sync phase and
Vectorscope with SCH mode
subcarrier phase (composite signals only) of the
signal from this unit.
Reference
signal generator
B IN
EXT. REF
7 Adjust the SYNC control using H PHASE on the
B Through EXT. REF Through VIDEO SET menu for rough adjustment, then
IN adjust H PHASE F for fine adjustment, so that the
output from this unit on channel (A) is in correct
phase alignment with the black burst signal on
channel (B).
DSR-50/50P VIDEO OUT2
8 Adjust the SC control using SC PHASE on the
VIDEO SET menu for rough adjustment, then
VIDEO/REF.IN
adjust SC PHASE F for fine adjustment, so that the
output from this unit on channel (A) is in correct
phase alignment with the black burst signal on
channel (B).
(for NTSC)
Performing a phase adjustment operation 4 Adjust the phase synchronization control on the
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
vectorscope so that the sync and subcarrier phases
This indicator
1 Press the SCH button on the vectorscope. are close to the reference line. moves as you This indicator
moves as you
adjust the H
PHASE or H adjust the SC
The vectorscope switches to SCH mode. (for NTSC) PHASE F menu. PHASE or SC
Reference line PHASE F menu.
2 Press the B channel button on the vectorscope. Adjust the sync and subcarrier phase of the output
Subcarrier signal from this unit.
This selects the black burst signal from the phase
reference signal generator. Sync
phase
(for PAL)
3 Press the EXT button on the vectorscope. Align the sync and subcarrier phase of the black burst
signal to the reference line.
This indicator
This switches the vectorscope to external moves as you This indicator
adjust the H moves as you
synchronization mode. adjust the SC
PHASE or H
(for PAL) PHASE F menu. PHASE or SC
Reference line PHASE F menu.
Sync Adjust the sync and subcarrier phase of the output
phase signal from this unit.
Subcarrier
phase
Note
Align the sync phase of the black burst signal to the
When component signals are used, the subcarrier
reference line. phase indicator does not appear.
Align the subcarrier phase of the black burst signal
symmetrically up and down.
(Continued)
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals 65 (GB) 66 (GB) Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
1-15
Adjusting the Signals Adjusting Signals
You can adjust each signal level of the component Notes Adjusting the chrominance signal gain level of the composite signal
output signal and the chrominance signal gain level of ¥ If you adjust the component signal level, be sure to
the composite signal.
Connect the reference video (black burst) signal one-
adjust the chrominance signal gain level of composite 1 Play back a tape to output the signals from the 2 Adjust the chrominance signal gain level in PB
signals. VIDEO OUT2 connector. OUTPUT in VIDEO LVL on the VIDEO SET
to-one with a device that generates the reference video ¥ Adjust the output level while playing the tape. Adjust
signal, or make a loop-through connection. If the menu.
the input level in the EE mode. The vectorscope displays the picture. For details on PB OUTPUT , see VIDEO SET
device has a terminal switch, terminate the connection ¥ You cannot adjust the signals input to the DV IN/ menu on page 85 (GB).
properly. OUT connector. You cannot adjust the signals output
You need both a waveform monitor and a vectorscope from the DV IN/OUT connector during playback.
to display the component signals.
Adjusting the Input Level
Adjusting the Output Level
or Reference
signal generator /
or Camera
S VIDEO VIDEO/
DSR-50/50P IN REF.IN CAMERA
DSR-50/50P
Waveform monitor Vectorscope
Waveform monitor Vectorscope
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
Composite Composite Composite
Composite Composite Composite VIDEO OUT2 video input video output video input
VIDEO OUT2 video input video output video input
Component
Component COMPONENT OUTPUT input
COMPONENT OUTPUT input
Adjusting the camera component signal 3 Adjust the Y, R-Y, and B-Y signal levels in
level INPUT in VIDEO LVL on the VIDEO SET menu.
Y LVL: Adjusts the Y signal level.
Adjusting the component signal level 2 Adjust the Y, R-Y, and B-Y signal levels in PB 1 Set the INPUT SELECT selector to CAMERA. R-Y LVL: Adjusts the R-Y signal level.
OUTPUT in VIDEO LVL on the VIDEO SET B-Y LVL: Adjusts the B-Y signal level.
1 Play back a tape and output the signals from the Y, menu. 2 Stop the unit and set it to the EE mode. For details on INPUT , see VIDEO SET menu on
R-Y and B-Y connectors of the COMPONENT Y LVL: Adjusts the Y signal level. page 85 (GB).
OUTPUT connectors. R-Y LVL: Adjusts the R-Y signal level. The waveform monitor displays the picture.
B-Y LVL: Adjusts the B-Y signal level.
The waveform monitor displays the picture. For details on PB OUTPUT , see VIDEO SET
menu on page 85 (GB).
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals 67 (GB) 68 (GB) Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
Duplication (generating a work tape with the same
time code)
Duplication (generating a work tape with the same time code)
Adjusting the composite signal level If you copy a source tape using the DUP (duplicate)
button on this unit, you can copy the time codes
2 Press the STOP button on this unit to stop the tape
transport operation.
1 Set the INPUT SELECT selector to S VIDEO or recorded on the source tape as they are. You can easily
make a work tape having the same time codes as the 3 While pressing the DUP button, press the PLAY
VIDEO in accordance with the signal to be button on this unit.
adjusted. source tape.
The duplicate function on this unit works only when This unit and the player will automatically rewind
2 Stop the unit and set it to the EE mode. using a source tape recorded in DVCAM format and
making DV connections.
the tape to the beginning. This unit enters the
duplicate-standby mode. The player enters the
The waveform monitor displays the picture you This unit functions as a recorder. The duplicate playback pause mode. Then the DUP indicator on
selected in step 1. function on this unit works only when you duplicate a this unit flashes and the duplication starts.
tape in the DVCAM format. Make sure to change the
If you press the PAUSE and PLAY buttons
3 Adjust the luminance level, chrominance level and DVCAM/DV select switch to DVCAM before
duplicating a tape.
while pressing the DUP button in step 3
hue in INPUT in VIDEO LVL on the VIDEO SET This unit and the player will automatically rewind the
menu. tape to the beginning. This unit enters the duplicate-
LUMINANCE: Adjusts the luminance level. To set the duplicate mode standby mode. The player enters the playback pause
CHROMA: Adjusts the chrominance level. This unit has three duplicate modes. mode. This unit does not start duplication until you
HUE: Adjusts the hue. (for DSR-50 only) Set DUPLICATE on the VTR SET menu to select a press the PAUSE button.
For details on INPUT , see VIDEO SET menu on duplicate mode as follows.
page 85 (GB).
To stop duplication
AUTOq (AUTO TAPE COPY WITH CM Press the STOP button.
COPY): The player and the recorder
automatically rewind the tape to the beginning to Notes
start duplicating. The cassette memory is also ¥ You cannot pause during a duplicate process.
duplicated. ¥ The duplication starts after the i.LINK
AUTOq (AUTO TAPE COPY): The player and communication is established so that the first part of
the recorder automatically rewind the tape to the the source tape is dropped on the copied tape.
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals
beginning to start duplicating. The cassette ¥ Set auto repeat to OFF when the player has an auto
memory is not duplicated. repeat function and set auto rewind to ON when the
MANUALq (MANUAL TAPE COPY): The tape player has an auto rewind function.
is duplicated from any location. The cassette ¥ Set still timer to the longest time possible to ensure
memory is not duplicated. enough time for rewinding the tape to the beginning
when the player has a still timer function.
¥ If you have selected AUTOq duplicate mode,
Chapter 5 Duplication and Audio Dubbing
Duplicating a tape
the cassette memory will be duplicated after the tape
The duplicate procedure differs depending on the has been duplicated. While the cassette memory is
duplicate mode. being duplicated, an indicator showing the progress
of the duplication appears on the LCD monitor and
Notes
on the VIDEO OUT1 output. Duplicating the cassette
¥ If you operate the player while duplicating, the memory takes up to a few minutes depending on the
duplicate process may be interrupted and the tape amount of data. Duplication of the cassette memory
may not be correctly duplicated. Do not operate the will be cancelled and the duplicate operation will be
player while duplicating. completed without duplicating the cassette memory
¥ You can duplicate a tape regardless of the DISPLAY in the following cases:
(MENU/TC/AUDIO) selector setting, but the — You press the STOP button while duplicating.
duplication screen will be displayed only when the — You turn off the power to this unit or player.
DISPLAY (MENU/TC/AUDIO) selector has been set — You remove the tape.
to TC. — You disconnect the DV cable.
If the duplication of the cassette memory stops for
AUTOq or AUTOq duplicate mode some reason, the cassette memory of this unit will be
1 Connect this unit and the player with an i.LINK completely erased.
cable (DV cable, not supplied). After turning on ¥ If you operate the player while duplicating and the
power of this unit and player, set the INPUT PLAYER UNCONTROLLABLE warning message
SELECT selector on this unit to DV. appears and duplication is stopped, press the STOP
button on this unit, then repeat the procedure from
Chapter 4 Setting the Time Code and Adjusting the Video Signals 69 (GB) 70 (GB) Chapter 5 Duplication and Audio Dubbing
step 2.
1-16
Duplication (generating a work tape with the same time code)
Chapter 5 Duplication and Audio Dubbing
¥ The player and recorder rewind the tape Detecting a blank portion during Warnings about duplication
automatically after duplication. However, depending
on the specifications, some players do not duplication
automatically rewind the tape after duplication. If an error occurs during duplication, a STOP/ The following table lists these warnings and messages.
¥ Before you start duplication, make sure that the If the unit detects a blank portion in the tape in the CAUTION number and warning message will be If a warning message is displayed, check this table and
player finished loading the cassette. player during duplication, the skip function will displayed on the LCD monitor and the VIDEO OUT1 take the appropriate action.
automatically skip the blank portion, reducing the output screen.
MANUALq duplicate mode
recorded part of the tape. (This function is available
1 Connect this unit and the player with an i.LINK only when the duplicate mode is AUTOq or STOP/
CAUTION Warning Message Cause/Remedy
cable (DV cable, not supplied). After turning on AUTOq.)
No.
power of this unit and player, set the INPUT The operations of the player and recorder (this unit)
RECORDER: The INPUT SELECT selector on the recorder (this unit) is not set to DV. t Set
SELECT selector on this unit to DV. when a blank portion is detected are as follows: 00 [DV IN] NOT SELECTED the INPUT SELECT selector to DV.
2 Locate the points where you want to start playback Player detection status Player/Recorder (this unit) 01
i.LINK CABLE:
DISCONNECTED
The DV cable is not connected correctly. t Connect the DV cable correctly.
and recording. operation
i.LINK CABLE: There are multiple DV connections or the DV connection is looped. t You
3 Press the STOP button on this unit to stop the tape Detects a blank portion Player: Continues playing the
tape.
02
MULTI CONNECTION cannot connect multiple devices. Connect only one player to this unit.
transport operation. i.LINK CABLE: The DV cable has been unplugged and plugged in again. t Check the DV cable
Recorder: Continues 03
BUS RESET connection. Try to duplicate again.
4 While pressing the DUP button, press the PLAY recording.
PLAYER: The player is in the recording mode.
button on this unit. 10 seconds after detection Player: Continues playing the 10
RECORDING
of a blank portion tape another 10
This unit enters the duplicate-standby mode. The seconds and searches PLAYER: There is no cassette in the player.
11
player enters the playback pause mode. Then the DUP forward. NO CASSETTE
indicator on this unit flashes and duplication starts. Recorder: Stops. 12 PLAYER: The player cannot be controlled, or the duplicate mode has been set to
UNCONTROLLABLE MANUALq and the cassette in the player has reached the end of the tape.
Detects next recorded Player: Rewinds the tape at
To adjust the point where duplication starts portion about –2 times PLAYER: The player rejects control.
In step 4, while pressing the DUP button, press the 13
normal speed to the UNCONTROLLABLE
PAUSE button and PLAY button. This unit will not start location PLAYER: The player is disabled or is in a different mode than the recorder (this unit) has
duplication until you press the PAUSE button again. immediately before 14
UNCONTROLLABLE requested.
After confirming that the PLAYER display has changed the blank portion
to READY (flashing) on the LCD monitor, adjust the ends. PLAYER: The cassette in the player is not recorded in the DVCAM format. t You can
15
NOT DVCAM duplicate only a DVCAM recorded tape.
duplication start point by operating the player, then press Recorder: Remains stopped.
the PAUSE button on this unit to start duplication. Returns to the location Player: After entering the PLAYER: The player has been manually operated or the player’s protection function
immediately before the playback pause mode, 16 UNCONTROLLABLE cancelled the playback pause mode when the duplicate mode was set to
To stop duplication blank portion ends starts playing the tape. AUTOq or AUTOq.
Chapter 5 Duplication and Audio Dubbing
Chapter 5 Duplication and Audio Dubbing
Press the STOP button. Recorder: After entering the PLAYER: The cassette information in the player cannot be read. t If the cassette
recording pause 18 TAPE INFO. UNKNOWN information is correct, clean the terminal of the cassette and insert the cassette
Notes mode, starts again (see page 97 (GB)) .
¥ You cannot pause during a duplicate process. recording. 19 a)
PLAYER: The player could not read the cassette memory during duplication. t If the
¥ The duplication starts after the i.LINK CM ERROR cassette memory is correct, insert the cassette again.
communication is established so that the first part of This unit does the above operations automatically, PLAYER: The player has detected self-diagnostics. t Refer to the instruction manual of
the source tape is dropped on the copied tape. Play 21
reducing the blank portion for 10 or more seconds in EMERGENCY STOP the player.
back the source tape from the preceding point. PLAYER: Moisture condensation has occurred in the player. t Refer to the instruction
duplicating a tape. 22
¥ Set auto repeat to OFF when the player has an auto DEW STOP manual of the player.
repeat function. Notes RECORDER: The DVCAM/DV select switch of the recorder (this unit) is set to DV. t Switch to
¥ You may not be able to duplicate the first part of the 35
¥ If the duplicate mode has been set to MANUALq, DVCAM NOT SELECTED DVCAM.
source tape. Locate the recorded portion on the
source tape, then start duplicating. this unit will not skip a blank portion even if detects RECORDER: The cassette in the recorder (this unit) does not have cassette memory, but the
one. 37 NO CM recorder tried to duplicate the cassette memory. t Insert a cassette with
¥ If there is a blank portion on the tape, the first part of cassette memory.
the recorded portion that follows may be dropped on ¥ Depending on the specifications, the skip function
the copied tape. may not work on some players. RECORDER: The cassette memory data cannot be written in the cassette in the recorder (this
39 CM ERROR unit). t Clean the gold-plated terminals on the cassette (see page 97 (GB)).
¥ If you start duplication at some midpoint in the tape, ¥ When this unit resumes duplication, the first part of
the search function may not work correctly on the RECORDER: The recorder (this unit) stopped while duplicating.
the recorded portion may be dropped on the copied 40 STOP
copied tape or problems may occur when editing. It is tape.
recommended that you select AUTOq or
¥ A recorded portion of less than one minute between
AUTOq for the duplicate mode.
¥ Before start duplication, make sure that the player two blank portions may not be duplicated.
finished loading the cassette.
Chapter 5 Duplication and Audio Dubbing 71 (GB) 72 (GB) Chapter 5 Duplication and Audio Dubbing
Audio
Audio Dubbing
Dubbing
STOP/ You can record just sound on a recorded tape. (Audio For details on AUDIO MODE , see AUDIO SET menu
CAUTION Warning Message Cause/Remedy dubbing) on page 88 (GB).
No.
The recorder (this unit) detected self-diagnostics. t For details on self- Note
41 Z diagnostics, see page 98 (GB). You can dub the sound onto a DVCAM-formatted Connection of external devices
Moisture condensation has occurred in the recorder (this unit). t If the cassette tape (recorded) in the 32 kHz audio mode (4-channel/
42 %Z is in the unit, remove the cassette and keep the cassette lid open and power on
12 bits). You cannot dub the sound on a tape in the 48 The following shows a basic connection example for
and wait more than one hour.
kHz audio mode (2-channel/16 bits). If the audio mode audio dubbing.
43 RECORDER: The recorder’s (this unit) video heads are clogged. t Clean the video heads with
HEAD CLOG the supplied cleaning cassette (see page 96 (GB)). of the recorded tape is 32 kHz, you can dub the sound
PLAYER: The cassette in the player is a copyright-protected cassette. The duplication is
regardless of the AUDIO MODE setting on the
44 AUDIO SET menu.
COPY INHIBIT cancelled. t You cannot copy a copyright-protected cassette.
RECORDER: The cassette memory in the recorder (this unit) is smaller than the cassette
50 SMALLER CM SIZE memory in the player. t Use a cassette that has larger cassette memory than
the one in the player. (This error is displayed only when the duplicate mode has
been set to AUTOq .)
RECORDER: The player’s cassette tape length is longer than that of the recorder’s (this unit)
51 b) c) SHORTER TAPE cassette and duplication has failed. t Use a cassette with a tape length that is
Audio output Sound source
longer than the one in the player. (microphone,
RECORDER: The player’s cassette tape length is longer than that of the recorder’s (this unit) AUDIO INPUT amplifier, etc.)
SHORTER TAPE cassette and there is a possibility that the duplication may fail. t Use a cassette DSR-50/50P CH-1/CH-2 or
60 b) c) PHONES (right panel) CH-3/CH-4
with a tape length that is longer than the one in the player. (This message is Headphone
displayed as a caution for 10 seconds after starting duplication.)
a) If the player could not read the cassette memory when Note
duplication started, this unit determines that the player s
If any warning message not listed in the table is
cassette does not have cassette memory and duplication
of the cassette memory will be cancelled. The duplicate displayed, contact your authorized Sony dealer.
Audio input
operation will be completed without duplicating the Audio amplifier
cassette memory and this warning message will not be Composite VIDEO AUDIO OUTPUT
video input OUT1 or 2 CH-1/CH-2 or
displayed. Monitor CH-3/CH-4 Speakers
b) This unit detects tape length from the cassette memory
data. If two tapes with the same length in the DVCAM
format have been inserted in the player and the recorder
(this unit), complete duplication may not be done due to
the tape length error and this warning may not be
Chapter 5 Duplication and Audio Dubbing
Chapter 5 Duplication and Audio Dubbing
displayed. In this case, if you search the cassette memory Selecting the input channels for audio Dubbing sound
in the duplicated tape, the tape may not have a search
dubbing
point even though the cassette memory has the search
point data.
1 Connect the unit and the sound source
c) If the cassette in the player does not have the cassette You can dub the sound in the following channel (microphone, amplifier, etc.) with the XLR (3-pin)
memory, this warning is not displayed. combinations: channels 1/2 or channels 3/4. cable (not supplied).
Set AUDIO DUB on the AUDIO SET menu to select
the input channels for audio dubbing. 2 Select the audio input selectors to select the sound
CH1,2: Selects the channel 1/2 combination. source.
CH3,4: Selects the channel 3/4 combination. CAM: Inputs audio signals from the CAMERA
OFF: Disables audio dubbing. connector.
LINE: Inputs audio signals from the AUDIO
Note
INPUT connectors.
You cannot dub the sound in the following channel +48V ON: Supplies power to the 48 V
combinations: microphone.
¥ Channels 1 to 4 simultaneously
¥ Only one channel
¥ Three channels simultaneously (excluding one
channel)
¥ Channel 1/3, channel 2/4, channel 1/4 and channel
2/3 combinations
Chapter 5 Duplication and Audio Dubbing 73 (GB) 74 (GB) Chapter 5 Duplication and Audio Dubbing
1-17
Operating
Operating the
the Menus Menus
Notes To pause audio dubbing The unit allows you to set various parameters in the menus. Before you
¥ If you have selected +48V ON, do not insert a Press the PAUSE button. start using the unit, set the internal clock in CLOCK SET on the OTHERS
metal object into the AUDIO INPUT connectors. Pressing the PAUSE button again resumes audio menu. Except for clock setting, you can use all other factory-set default
It may cause electric shock. dubbing. parameters but change them as needed.
¥ If you have selected +48V ON, use a microphone
To stop audio dubbing Note
that is compatible with 48 V. Using a microphone
that is incompatible may damage the microphone, Press the STOP button. If the internal backup battery is exhausted, the menu settings will be
generate smoke or cause a fire. initialized. The internal backup battery is fully charged if you connect the
To monitor the sound being dubbed power to the unit for about 10 hours. The menu settings will be kept for
3 Switch the audio input level control selectors to Set the MONITOR SELECT selector as follows: about one month.
select the audio input signal level (—60, —20 or +4). CH1/2: You can listen to sound on channels 1/2 on
the tape or sound to be dubbed.
Note
CH3/4: You can listen to sound on channels 3/4 on Displaying the menu
If you have set the audio input selectors to +48V the tape or sound to be dubbed.
ON, set the audio input level control selectors to MIX: You can listen to the sound on the tape and the 1 Set the DISPLAY (LCD OFF/OFF/ON) selector to ON.
—60. dubbed sound.
2 Set the DISPLAY (MENU/TC/AUDIO) selector to MENU.
4 Set the AUDIO SELECT switch to AUTO or Note
MANU. You can monitor the sound on the tape while dubbing The menu is superimposed on the LCD monitor.
the sound. However, there are some delays between
5 Adjust the recording level by turning the audio the sound being recorded and the sound being played.
recording level control knobs. When you play back the tape after audio dubbing, you
might hear the dubbed sound later than the sound
monitored during audio dubbing. TC ⁄ UB SET
You can adjust the recording level with the audio TC TC PRESET
recording level control knobs if you have selected CM UB PRESET
DISP TC FORMAT
MANU in step 4. While looking at the audio level Icons V TC RUN Submenus
A TC ⁄ UB IN
meters on the LCD monitor or the display window, LCD TC MAKE
turn the audio recording level control knobs and VTR UB TIME
ETC JOG TC OUT
adjust the recording level. Adjust the audio
recording level so that the recording level does not
exceed 0 dB when the audio signal is at its
maximum. If the recording level exceeds 0 dB, the
Chapter 5 Duplication and Audio Dubbing
OVER indicators light.
6 Set the tape in the unit (and the sound source, if Changing the menu settings
any) for dubbing.
1 Rotating the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, select the menu icon you want to
7 While pressing the PAUSE button, press the PLAY change, then press the dial.
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
button to enter the playback pause mode.
2 Rotating the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, select the submenu you want to
8 While pressing the AUDIO DUB button, press the change, then press the dial.
PLAY button to enter the audio dubbing pause
mode. 3 Rotating the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, change the setting.
9 Press the PAUSE button. 4 Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to return to the submenu.
The AUDIO DUB indicator flashes and audio 5 Repeat steps 1 to 4, as needed.
dubbing starts.
To return to step 1
Rotating the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, select RETURN, then press the
dial.
Chapter 5 Duplication and Audio Dubbing 75 (GB) 76 (GB) Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
Operating the Menus
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
Menu Organization Menu Contents
The menu of this unit consists of the following menus and submenus. Initial settings are indicated with rectangles.
Menu Submenu (page) Menu Submenu (page)
TC/UB SET TC PRESET (page 78 (GB)) VTR SET FF/REW SPD (page 90 (GB)) TC/UB SET menu
UB PRESET (page 78 (GB)) STILL TIME (page 90 (GB))
TC FORMAT (page 78 (GB)) a) FROM STILL (page 90 (GB)) Note
TC RUN (page 78 (GB)) FROM REC P (page 90 (GB))
TC/UB IN (page 79 (GB)) DUPLICATE (page 90 (GB)) All items other than JOG TC OUT can be set only when you record in
TC MAKE (page 79 (GB)) FOOT SW (page 91 (GB)) DVCAM-format.
UB TIME (page 79 (GB)) DV EE OUT (page 91 (GB))
JOG TC OUT (page 79 (GB)) STILL PICT (page 91 (GB)) Submenu
Icon/Menu Setting
CM SET CM SEARCH (page 80 (GB)) OTHERS BEEP (page 92 (GB)) (page)
TITLE DISP (page 80 (GB)) A BACK COL (page 92 (GB)) TC TC/UB SET TC PRESET Resets/Sets the time code value.
LABEL DISP (page 80 (GB)) CLOCK SET (page 92 (GB)) (page 56 (GB)) RESET: Resets the time code value to 00:00:00:00.
TAPE LABEL (page 81 (GB)) HRS METER (page 92 (GB))
ITEM ERASE (page 82 (GB)) PRESET: Sets the time code value.
ERASE ALL (page 83 (GB)) RETURN : Returns to the TC/UB SET menu without changing the time code value.
DISPLAY SET EE/PB SET (page 84 (GB)) a) DSR-50 only Note
qREMAIN (page 84 (GB)) b) COLOUR BAR for DSR-50P Before setting the initial time code value, set TC MAKE to PRESET. If TC MAKE has been
DATA CODE (page 84 (GB)) c) LCD COLOUR for DSR-50P set to REGEN, you cannot change the time code with this submenu.
LTR SIZE (page 84 (GB))
COLOR BAR (page 85 (GB)) b) UB PRESET Resets/Sets the user bits value.
uREMAIN (page 85 (GB)) (page 57 (GB)) RESET: Resets the user bits value to 00 00 00 00.
DATE DISP (page 85 (GB)) PRESET: Sets the user bits value. (You can set the user bits as eight-digit hexadecimal
TIME DISP (page 85 (GB)) values (0 to 9, A to F) (base 16) to have the date, time, scene number, and other
VIDEO SET PB YNR (page 85 (GB))
information inserted into the user bits.)
PB CNR (page 85 (GB)) RETURN : Returns to the TC/UB SET menu without changing the user bits value.
VIDEO LVL (page 86 (GB))
EXT SYNC (page 87 (GB)) TC FORMAT Selects the frame mode.
H PHASE (page 87 (GB)) (page 59 (GB)) AUTO : Automatically sets the frame mode in accordance with the inserted cassette. (If
H PHASE F (page 87 (GB)) nothing is recorded on the tape, the mode is set to the non-drop frame mode. If the unit
SC PHASE (page 87 (GB)) cannot read the frame mode correctly in the tape, the unit will use the frame mode that
SC PHASE F (page 87 (GB)) was set in the last position it was able to read correctly on the tape. If you turn the
power on/off or remove the tape, the mode of the last position it was able to read
AUDIO SET AUDIO MODE (page 88 (GB))
AUDIO DUB (page 88 (GB))
correctly is cleared and the mode is set to the non-drop frame mode.)
JOG AUDIO (page 88 (GB)) DF: Selects the drop frame mode.
REF LEVEL (page 88 (GB)) NDF: Selects the non-drop frame mode.
AGC CH1,2 (page 88 (GB))
Notes
AGC CH3,4 (page 88 (GB))
LIMITER (page 89 (GB)) • This menu is displayed only for DSR-50.
WIND (page 89 (GB)) • Regardless of this setting, the frame mode is set to drop frame when you record in DV
format.
LCD SET LCD BRIGHT (page 89 (GB))
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
LCD COLOR (page 89 (GB)) c) TC RUN Selects the advancement mode (counting up).
(page 59 (GB)) REC RUN : Time code value advances only while recording.
FREE RUN: Time code value advances even when the unit is not recording. (This mode is
used to set the current time as the initial time code value, or to synchronize the internal
time code to an external time code.)
Notes
• If you set the advancement mode to FREE RUN, the time code will be updated by the
internal clock when the power is off. Therefore, when you turn on the unit again, the time
code may have been delayed or advanced somewhat.
• If the internal backup battery is exhausted, the time code of the FREE RUN setting is
initialized.
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus 77 (GB) 78 (GB) Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
1-18
Operating the Menus
Icon/Menu
Submenu
Setting CM SET menu
(page)
TC TC/UB SET TC/UB IN Selects the time code and user bits to record in the tape. Submenu
(page 60 (GB)) INTERNAL : Uses the internal time code/user bits. Icon/Menu Setting
(page)
TC&UB EXT: Uses the external time code/user bits. CM CM SET CM SEARCH Selects the mode which searches recordings.
TC EXT: Uses the external time code and internal user bits.
ON : Searches recordings using the cassette memory. (If the tape does not have cassette
UB EXT: Uses the internal time code and external user bits.
memory, the beginning of recording is searched for using the index signals on the tape.)
Notes OFF: Always searches recordings using the index signals on the tape.
• The time code output from this unit has some restrictions. For details, see pages 63 (GB), TITLE DISP Selects whether or not to display the title.
64 (GB). ON : Displays the title.
• Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to execute this submenu. This will also be executed the OFF: Hides the title.
moment you switch the position of the DISPLAY (MENU/TC/AUDIO) selector to TC or
AUDIO. Notes
• The title input with the camera or external device is displayed. You cannot enter a title in
TC MAKE Selects the time code when you start recording.
this unit.
(page 59 (GB)) REGEN : The time code value is set to the continuous time code from the time code
already recorded on the tape. If no time code is recorded on the tape, the time code • The unit cannot display a font that the unit does not have.
starts from 00:00:00:00. • The title is displayed only on the LCD monitor, VIDEO OUT1 output or return video to the
PRESET: The time code value is set to the time code from the value set in PRESET in the camera.
TC PRESET on the TC/UB SET menu. • The title is only displayed if you have set the DISPLAY (MENU/TC/AUDIO) selector to TC.
UB TIME Selects whether to set the user bits to any particular value or to the real time clock. LABEL DISP Selects whether or not to display the tape label.
(page 59 (GB)) OFF : The value set in PRESET in UB PRESET on the TC/UB SET menu is set in the ON : Displays the tape label.
user bits. OFF: Hides the tape label.
ON: The value set in CLOCK SET on the OTHERS menu (the real time clock) is set in the Notes
user bits. • The tape label is displayed only on the LCD monitor, VIDEO OUT1 output or return video
Note to the camera.
This item is available only if TC/UB IN is set to INTERNAL or TC EXT. • The tape label is only displayed if you have set the DISPLAY (MENU/TC/AUDIO) selector
to TC.
JOG TC OUT Controls the time code output from the TC OUT connector when the tape is played at a • If the tape label has been made with an other VCR or camcorder, this unit cannot display
(page 59 (GB)) speed other than normal. a tape label that includes a font that the unit does not have.
OFF : Does not output the time code.
ON: Outputs the time code.
Note
The continuous time code is output only when the tape is played at a normal speed. When
the unit is in the search mode, discontinuous time code is output.
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus 79 (GB) 80 (GB) Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
Operating the Menus
Submenu Submenu
Icon/Menu Setting Icon/Menu Setting
(page) (page)
CM CM SET TAPE LABEL Makes a tape label. (You can enter up to 10 characters on a tape label.) CM CM SET ITEM ERASE Erase a cassette memory item.
If you select this item, one of the following symbols appears. If no cassette is loaded, If you select this item, one of the following symbols appears. If no cassette is loaded,
nothing is displayed. nothing is displayed.
: Tape with cassette memory : Tape with cassette memory
: Tape without cassette memory : Tape without cassette memory
You can make a tape label as follows: The available items are as follows:
1 On the TAPE LABEL screen, select a line that has the alphabet character you want by INDEX ALL: Erases the index data.
rotating and pushing the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. (The cursor moves to the first character TITLE ALL: Erases the title data.
of the line.) DATE ALL: Erases the date data.
PHOTO ALL: Erases the photo data.
TAPE LABEL TAPE LABEL
__________
__________
You can erase an item as follows:
ABCDE 1 2 3 4 5 ABCDE 12345
FGH I J 6 7 8 9 0
K LMNO ' , . / –
,
FGH I J
K LMNO
67890
' , . /– 1 Select an item to erase by rotating and pushing the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
PQRS T [ ] PQRS T [ ]
UVWXY [ SE T ]
Z& ? !
UVWXY
Z& ? !
[ SE T ]
2 To erase the item, select OK, otherwise select RETURN. (If you select OK, the unit will
check again to see if you really want to erase the item.)
CM SET CM SET CM SET
TC I TEM ERASE TC I TEM ERASE TC I TEM ERASE
CM I NDEX ALL RETURN CM I NDEX ALL RETURN CM I NDEX ALL RETURN
2 Select a character by rotating and pushing the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. (The selected DISP
V
T I TLE ALL OK
DATE ALL
DISP
V
T I TLE ALL OK
DATE ALL
DISP
V
T I TLE ALL EXECUTE
DATE ALL
character is entered. To erase a character, select [ P ]; the last character is erased.) A
LCD
PHOTO ALL
RETURN , A
LCD
PHOTO ALL
RETURN
, A
LCD
PHOTO ALL
RETURN
VTR VTR VTR
ETC ETC ETC
TAPE LABEL TAPE LABEL
__________ S_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
ABCDE 1 2 3 4 5 ABCDE 1 2 3 4 5
FGH I J 6 7 8 9 0 FGH I J 6 7 8 9 0
K LMNO ' , . / –
PQRS T [
UVWXY [ SE T ]
] , K LMNO ' , . / –
PQRS T [ ]
Z& ? !
UVWXY [ SE T ]
Z& ? ! 3 To erase the item, select EXECUTE, otherwise select RETURN. (If you select
EXECUTE, the ERASING message will flash, and the unit will start erasing the item in
the cassette memory. While the ERASING message is flashing, you cannot use the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial. After the item has been erased, the COMPLETE message appears.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2. After entering all characters for the tape label, select [SET]. Press or rotate the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to erase the COMPLETE message.)
Note CM SET CM SET CM SET
TC I TEM ERASE TC I TEM ERASE TC I TEM ERASE
The unit cannot display the TAPE LABEL screen in the following cases: CM
DISP
I NDEX ALL ERASING
T I TLE ALL
CM
DISP
I NDEX ALL COMPLETE
T I TLE ALL
CM
DISP
I NDEX ALL RETURN
T I TLE ALL OK
V DATE ALL V DATE ALL V DATE ALL
• The unit does not have a tape inserted or the tape is being unloaded. A
LCD
PHOTO ALL
RETURN , A
LCD
PHOTO ALL
RETURN
, A
LCD
PHOTO ALL
RETURN
• The tape does not have cassette memory. VTR
ETC
VTR
ETC
VTR
ETC
• The cassette memory is full of data other than the tape label data.
• The tape is write-protected.
• The tape is being recorded.
• The tape is being duplicated. Notes
• The cassette memory is being used. • You cannot make the title, mark the date for date search, or record in the photo mode.
• You cannot erase an item in the cassette memory in the following cases:
– The unit does not have a tape inserted or the tape is being unloaded.
(Continued)
– The tape does not have cassette memory.
– The tape is write-protected.
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
– The tape is being recorded.
– The tape is being duplicated.
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus 81 (GB) 82 (GB) Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
1-19
Operating the Menus
Icon/Menu
Submenu
Setting DISPLAY SET menu
(page)
CM CM SET ERASE ALL Erases all items in the cassette memory. Submenu
If you select this item, one of the following symbols appears. If no cassette is loaded, Icon/Menu Setting
(page)
nothing is displayed.
DISPLAY
DISP EE/PB SET Sets the stop, fast-forward and rewind modes.
: Tape with cassette memory
SET (page 14 (GB)) EE : Outputs the EE pictures (sound, time code).
: Tape without cassette memory
PB: Mutes the image and sound.
Erase all items in the cassette memory as follows:
Notes
1 To erase all items, select OK, otherwise select RETURN. (If you select OK, the unit will
• Even if EXT SYNC is set to ON, the line-outs (VIDEO OUT2, COMPONENT OUT, S
check again to see if you really want to erase all items.)
VIDEO OUT) in the EE mode are delayed from those of the input signals as follows:
CM SET CM SET CM SET – delayed for two lines when the camera composite or VIDEO/REF. IN is input.
TC CM SEARCH TC CM SEARCH TC CM SEARCH
CM
DISP
TITLE DISP
LABEL DISP
CM
DISP
TITLE DISP
LABEL DISP
CM
DISP
TITLE DISP
LABEL DISP
– delayed for one line when S VIDEO or camera component is input.
V TAPE LABEL TAPE LABEL TAPE LABEL
A I TEM ERASE
,
V
A I TEM ERASE ,
V
A I TEM ERASE • If this item is set to PB, the output from the unit will be as follows when you press any of
LCD ERASE ALL RETURN LCD ERASE ALL RETURN LCD ERASE ALL RETURN
VTR
ETC
RETURN OK VTR
ETC
RETURN OK VTR
ETC
RETURN EXECUTE the REC, DUP, or AUDIO DUB buttons separately when the unit is stopped.
Image Sound Time code
2 To erase all items, select EXECUTE, otherwise select RETURN. (If you select
EXECUTE, the ERASING message will flash, and the unit starts erasing all items in the REC button EE picture of EE sound of the
cassette memory. While the ERASING message is flashing, you cannot use the SEL/ the input image input sound
PUSH EXEC dial. After all items have been erased, the COMPLETE message appears. DUP button Image input to Sound input to
Press or rotate the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to erase the COMPLETE message.) the DV IN/OUT the DV IN/OUT
connector connector (See page 62 (GB))
CM SET CM SET CM SET
TC CM SEARCH
CM TITLE DISP
TC CM SEARCH
CM TITLE DISP
TC CM SEARCH
CM TITLE DISP
AUDIO Mute screen EE sound of the
DISP LABEL DISP
V TAPE LABEL
DISP LABEL DISP
V TAPE LABEL
DISP LABEL DISP
V TAPE LABEL
DUB button (black) input sound
A I TEM ERASE
LCD ERASE ALL ERASING , A I TEM ERASE
LCD ERASE ALL COMPLETE
, A I TEM ERASE
LCD ERASE ALL RETURN
No button Mute screen Mute (no
VTR RETURN VTR RETURN VTR RETURN OK
ETC ETC ETC
is pressed (black) sound)
qREMAIN Selects whether or not to display the tape remaining time in the LCD monitor and VIDEO
Note (page 19 (GB)) OUT1 output.
ON : Displays the tape remaining time.
You cannot erase all items in the cassette memory in the following cases:
OFF: Does not display the tape remaining time.
• The unit does not have a tape inserted or the tape is being unloaded.
• The tape does not have cassette memory. Note
• The tape is write-protected. The display window of the unit always displays the tape remaining time.
• The tape is being recorded.
• The tape is being duplicated. DATA CODE Selects whether or not to display the data codes on the LCD monitor and the VIDEO OUT1
(page 19 (GB)) output.
OFF : Does not display the data codes.
DATE: Displays the date when recorded.
CAMERA: Displays the camera data.
LTR SIZE Changes the font size of the menu line at the cursor.
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
NORMAL : Normal size
×2: Double height size
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus 83 (GB) 84 (GB) Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
Operating the Menus
Submenu Submenu
Icon/Menu Setting Icon/Menu Setting
(page) (page)
DISPLAY
DISP COLOR BAR Displays/hides the color bars. V VIDEO SET VIDEO LVL Adjusts the video signal levels.
SET (for DSR-50) / OFF : Hides the color bars. (page 67 (GB)) INPUT: Adjusts the input video signals. (This is available only when the EE pictures are
COLOUR BAR ON: Displays the color bars. output and the mode is stop, record, recording pause, fast-forward or rewind. This is
(for DSR-50P) disabled for DV input.)
(page 51 (GB)) Notes PB OUTPUT: Adjusts the output video signals. (This is available only when the mode is
• You cannot display the color bars while the unit is playing the tape or when the INPUT
playback, playback pause, slow playback, cue, or review.)
SELECT selector is set to DV.
RETURN: Exits the menu without adjusting video signal levels.
• The color bars are displayed only on the LCD monitor, VIDEO OUT1 output, or return
video to the camera. Adjusting the input video signals
• If you record when the color bars are displayed, the color bars will also be recorded on the LUMINANCE: Adjusts the luminance level of the composite signals.
tape. CHROMA: Adjusts the chrominance level of the composite signals.
• You cannot adjust the VIDEO OUT1 output. Do not use the color bars output from the HUE: Adjusts the hue of the composite signals. (only for DSR-50)
VIDEO OUT1 connector as a reference signal. Y LVL: Adjusting the Y signal level of the camera component signals.
• The reference sound signals are not output even if this item is set to ON. R-Y LVL: Adjusting the R-Y signal level of the camera component signals.
• This item will be automatically set to OFF if you set the INPUT SELECT selector to DV or B-Y LVL: Adjusting the B-Y signal level of the camera component signals.
you operate the tape transport control that display the pictures recorded on the tape. Notes
uREMAIN Switches the battery type. • This item is disabled for DV input. (You cannot adjust the DV input signals.)
(page 18 (GB)) LI-ION : Uses a lithium ion battery. • Adjust the signal levels by looking at the bars. (The triangles under the bars are displayed
NI-CD: Uses a nickel cadmium battery. in green when the settings are set to the factory preset values.)
DATE DISP Switches the date display in the display window or in the search screen for index search and • All factory preset values are their center value.
so on. • LUMINANCE, CHROMA and HUE can be adjusted only for VIDEO/REF. IN, camera
Y/M/D: Displays YY/MM/DD (year/month/day). composite or S VIDEO input while in the EE mode.
M/D/Y: Displays MM/DD/YY (month/day/year). • Y LVL, R-Y LVL and B-Y LVL can be adjusted only for camera component signal input
D/M/Y: Displays DD/MM/YY (day/month/year). while in the EE mode.
Note
Adjusting the output video signals
SETUP: Switches the luminance signal setup level (0% or 7.5%). (This item is only for
The default is M/D/Y for DSR-50; D/M/Y for DSR-50P. DSR-50. The setup level for DSR-50P is fixed to 0%.)
TIME DISP Switches the time display in the display window, LCD monitor and VIDEO OUT1 output. Y LVL: Adjusts the Y signal level of the component signals. (If you change this, the Y
24H : Displays 24-hour time. signal level of the composite video and S VIDEO will also be changed.)
12H: Displays 12-hour time. R-Y LVL: Adjusts the R-Y signal level of the component signals. (If you change this, the
chrominance level of the composite video and S VIDEO will also be changed.)
B-Y LVL: Adjusts the B-Y signal level of the component signals. (If you change this, the
chrominance level of the composite video and S VIDEO will also be changed.)
VIDEO SET menu CHROMA: Adjusts the chrominance level in the composite signals.
Notes
Submenu • You can adjust the video levels only while playing the tape.
Icon/Menu Setting
(page) • Adjust the video levels by looking at the bars (except SETUP). (The triangles under the
V VIDEO SET PB YNR Switches the noise reduction level for the luminance signals when a tape is played. bars are displayed in green when the settings are set to the factory preset values.)
OFF : No noise reduction • The SETUP default is 0%. Other defaults are their center values.
LOW: Low noise reduction • The output video signals can be adjusted only for VIDEO OUT2, COMPONENT OUT, or S
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
VIDEO OUT.
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
HIGH: High noise reduction
Note
• Set SETUP to 7.5% only if the tape has been recorded at 0% and you want to play back
the tape at 7.5%. If you play back a 7.5% tape at the 7.5% setting, the tape will not be
When you use noise reduction, there may be an afterimage depending on the condition of played at the proper brightness. If you set SETUP at 0% and if you play back a 7.5% tape,
the picture. the tape will be played at 7.5%. (You cannot play the tape at 0%.)
PB CNR Switches the noise reduction level for the chrominance signals when a tape is played.
OFF : No noise reduction
LOW: Low noise reduction
HIGH: High noise reduction
Note
When you use noise reduction, there may be an afterimage depending on the condition of
the picture.
(Continued)
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus 85 (GB) 86 (GB) Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
1-20
Operating the Menus
Icon/Menu
Submenu
Setting AUDIO SET menu
(page)
V VIDEO SET EXT SYNC Switches the externally synchronized playback setting. Submenu
OFF : No external synchronization Icon/Menu Setting
(page)
ON: External synchronization A AUDIO SET AUDIO Selects the audio mode.
Notes MODE FS32K : Switches the audio mode to the four channel mode (12-bit mode).
• It may take three or more seconds until a stable image is output in the externally- (page 74 (GB)) FS48K: Switches the audio mode to the two channel stereo mode (16-bit mode). (This
synchronized playback mode. setting records the sound in all audio ranges, providing a high-quality sound recording.)
• If external synchronization is applied, jitters may appear on the image output from VIDEO Notes
OUT1 output or on the LCD monitor image. Use the VIDEO OUT2 connector to output an
• This item is disabled when inputting signals from the DV IN/OUT connector.
externally-synchronized image. Set this item to OFF when you use the VIDEO OUT1
connector. • You cannot display the selection screen while in the recording mode.
• Noise may occur at the moment you switch the audio mode.
H PHASE Roughly adjusts the sync phase in the externally-synchronized playback mode.
(page 65 (GB)) Rotate the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to move the bar and push the dial to select. (The triangle AUDIO DUB Selects the input channel for audio dubbing.
(page 74 (GB)) CH1,2: Selects channels 1 and 2.
under the bar is displayed in green when the setting is set to the factory preset value.)
CH3,4 : Selects channels 3 and 4.
Notes OFF: Disables audio dubbing.
• You can adjust the H PHASE only in the externally-synchronized playback mode.
Note
• If you change this item, the H PHASE F value will be set to the factory preset value.
You cannot display the selection screen while dubbing the sound.
H PHASE F Finely adjusts the sync phase in the externally-synchronized playback mode.
JOG AUDIO Turns sound output on/off when the tape is played at a speed other than normal.
(page 65 (GB)) Rotate the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to move the bar and push the dial to select. (The triangle
OFF : Does not output the sound when playing a tape at a speed other than normal.
under the bar is displayed in green when the setting is set to the factory preset value.)
ON: Outputs the sound when playing a tape at a speed other than normal.
Notes
Note
• You can adjust the H PHASE F only in the externally-synchronized playback mode.
• If you change the H PHASE value, this item is set to the factory preset value. Even if you have set this item to ON, the sound may not be output or interrupted depending
on the tape format or tape conditions.
SC PHASE Reverses the subcarrier phase in the externally-synchronized playback mode.
(page 65 (GB)) 0 DEG : The subcarrier phase is not reversed. REF LEVEL Switches the center levels of the audio level meters displayed on the FINE screen.
180 DEG: The subcarrier phase is reversed. (page 20 (GB)) –12dB: Sets the level to –12 dB
–18dB: Sets the level to –18 dB
Note
–20dB: Sets the level to –20 dB
You can adjust the SC PHASE only in the externally-synchronized playback mode.
Notes
SC PHASE F Finely adjusts the subcarrier phase in the externally-synchronized playback mode. • The default is –20 dB for DSR-50; –18 dB for DSR-50P.
(page 65 (GB)) Rotate the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to move the bar and push the dial to select. (The triangle • The standard output level of the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks is –10 dBu. This is equivalent to
under the bar is displayed in green when the setting is set to the factory preset value.) –20 dB for DSR-50, or –18 dB for DSR-50P from full bit (maximum audio level). This level
Note is fixed and does not change even if you change the REF LEVEL setting.
You can adjust the SC PHASE F only in the externally-synchronized playback mode. • Changing this level does not change the audio gain of this unit. Turn the audio recording
level control knobs to adjust the recording level accordingly.
AGC CH1,2 Links/separates the AGC (Auto Gain Control) in channels 1 and 2.
(page 21 (GB)) SEPARATE : AGC is not linked. (Channels 1 and 2 sound gains are separated.)
LINKED: AGC is linked. (Channels 1 and 2 sound gains are linked as a pair.)
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
Notes
• This setting is disabled when inputting signals from the DV IN/OUT connector.
• The LINKED setting is enabled after you set the AUDIO SELECT switches on the front
panel to AUTO for both channels 1 and 2.
AGC CH3, 4 Links/separates the AGC (Auto Gain Control) in channels 3 and 4.
(page 21 (GB)) SEPARATE : AGC is not linked. (Channels 3 and 4 sound gains are separated.)
LINKED: AGC is linked. (Channels 3 and 4 sound gains are linked as a pair.)
Notes
• This setting is disabled when inputting signals from the DV IN/OUT connector.
• The LINKED setting is enabled after you set the AUDIO SELECT switches on the front
panel to AUTO for both channels 3 and 4.
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus 87 (GB) 88 (GB) Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
Operating the Menus
Icon/Menu
Submenu
Setting VTR SET menu
(page)
A AUDIO SET LIMITER Turns the limiter on/off. Submenu
OFF : No limiter Icon/Menu Setting
(page)
ON: Uses the limiter.
VTR VTR SET FF/REW SPD Selects the tape transport mode in fast-forward and rewind.
Notes FF/REW : Fast-forwards or rewinds the tape at maximum speed without displaying the
• This setting is disabled when inputting signals from the DV IN/OUT connector. picture.
• This setting is available only when you have set the AUDIO SELECT switches on the front SHUTTLEMAX: Fast-forwards or rewinds the tape at maximum speed (about 14 times
panel to MANU. normal speed for the DSR-50; about 17 times normal speed for the DSR-50P) while
• Make sure to set the audio input level control selectors on the right panel correctly. Even if displaying the picture.
you have set this item to ON, the limiter will not work for a sound that exceeds the dynamic
STILL TIME Selects the time to switch to the tape protection mode from the still mode.
range of the input amplifier.
30 SEC: 30 seconds
WIND Enables/disables the wind noise reduction function for microphones. 1 MIN : 1 minute
(page 21 (GB)) You can set the wind noise reduction for audio channels 1 to 4 separately. If you select this 2 MIN: 2 minutes
item, the channel to which the noise reduction is currently applied is displayed. (Example: If
3 MIN: 3 minutes
noise reduction is applied to channels 1 and 3, “CH1,3” is displayed. If all channels are set
5 MIN: 5 minutes
to OFF, “OFF” is displayed.)
OFF : No wind noise reduction Notes
ON: Wind noise reduction • If the unit is left in playback pause mode for a long time, the tape or the video heads may
If you press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, the channel names are displayed. Select the be damaged or the video heads may become clogged. Select the shortest time possible
channel to be changed, change the setting, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. —particularly when using a Mini-DV cassette that is longer than 60 minutes, select 30
SEC or 1 MIN.
Note
• When the setting is changed, the first tape protection mode change uses the time setting
This setting is disabled when inputting signals from the DV IN/OUT connector. from before the settings were changed. From the second tape protection mode change,
the new time setting is used.
FROM STILL Selects the tape protection mode to change the mode from the still mode.
STEP FWD : Forwards one frame.
LCD SET menu STOP: Stops the tape.
FROM REC Switches the tape protection mode that the system changes to after the recording has been
Submenu P paused for more than five minutes.
Icon/Menu Setting
(page) STOP : Stops the tape.
LCD LCD SET LCD BRIGHT Adjusts the LCD monitor brightness. Rotate and press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust REC PAUSE: Maintains the recording pause mode.
and set the brightness. You can also adjust the brightness by rotating the SEL/PUSH EXEC Notes
dial on the TC screen. (The triangle under the bar is displayed in green when the setting is
• The unit changes to the stop mode after the recording has been paused for more than five
set to the factory preset value.)
minutes when you select STOP. In this case you cannot start recording with the VTR
LCD COLOR Adjusts the depth of color of the LCD monitor. Rotate and press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial button on the camera. Repeat the procedure from step 2 on page 47 (GB) to start
(for DSR-50) / to adjust and set the depth of color. (The triangle under the bar is displayed in green when recording again.
LCD COLOUR the setting is set to the factory preset value.) • When the recording pause mode continues for a long time after you select REC PAUSE,
(for DSR-50P) the tape may be damaged or the video heads may be damaged or clogged. If there is no
other reason to do this, select STOP. Particularly when you use a Mini-DV cassette that is
longer than 60 minutes, select STOP.
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
DUPLICATE Switches the duplicate mode.
(page 70 (GB)) AUTOq : Starts duplication after rewinding the tape to the beginning in the player and
recorder. (The cassette memory is also duplicated.)
AUTOq: Starts duplication after rewinding the tape to the beginning in the player and
recorder. (The cassette memory is not duplicated.)
MANUALq : Duplicates the tape from any point. (The cassette memory is not
duplicated.)
Note
You cannot display the setting selection screen during duplication.
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus 89 (GB) 90 (GB) Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
1-21
Operating the Menus
Icon/Menu
Submenu
Setting OTHERS menu
(page)
VTR VTR SET FOOT SW Selects a foot switch mode. Submenu
OFF : Disables the foot switch. Icon/Menu Setting
(page)
EDGE HIGH: Switches between recording and recording pause mode each time you
OTHERS BEEP Selects the beep.
release the foot switch.
BEEP : Normal beep
EDGE LOW: Switches between recording and recording pause mode each time you press
MELODY: Melody beep (The melody beep is also mixed during a menu operation.)
the foot switch. (This is the most popular use for foot switch.)
OFF: Disables the beep.
LEVEL HIGH: Records only while the foot switch is released.
LEVEL LOW: Records only while the foot switch is pressed. Note
The following shows the trigger statuses. The beep sound is mixed only on the headphone sound and return sound to the camera.
A BACK COL Changes the background color of the AUDIO screen when you have set the DISPLAY
EDGE HIGH LEVEL HIGH
(MENU/TC/AUDIO) selector on the front panel to AUDIO.
HALFTONE : Halftone
Recording Recording Recording Recording BLACK: Black
pause pause
EDGE LOW LEVEL LOW CLOCK SET Sets the internal clock of the unit.
Rotating and pressing the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, sets the time (year, month, day, hour and
Recording Recording
minute). (When you set the minute, the second count will start from 00.)
Recording Recording
pause pause Notes
• Regardless of the DATE DISP setting, the date is displayed in the Y/M/D format while you
are setting CLOCK SET.
The following shows the foot switch circuit.
• The internal backup battery will be fully charged in about 10 hours when power is provided
to the unit. A fully charged internal backup battery can run the internal clock for about one
DSR-50/50P
month without the battery pack or power provided through the AC adaptor.
5V Stereo HRS METER Displays the accumulated time counts (by the digital hours meter) in units of 10 hours or 10
minijack (page 97 (GB)) counts.
OPERATION: Power on duration
GND DRUM RUN: Drum rotation duration
Tally LED
Foot Switch TAPE RUN: Tape run duration
THREADING: Tape unthreading count
Note
You cannot operate audio dubbing or duplication from the foot switch.
DV EE OUT Selects the output from the DV IN/OUT connector in the EE mode.
(page 37 (GB)) OFF : Outputs only the playback video and audio signals from the DV IN/OUT connector.
ON: Outputs the selected analog input signals from the DV IN/OUT connector.
Note
When you connect a computer to the DV IN/OUT connector, depending on your computer
software, the selected analog input signals may be output to the computer even if this item
is set to OFF.
STILL PICT Switches the image displayed in the still mode.
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
AUTO : Displays an optimized image according to the movement in the image.
FRAME: Displays a frame image.
FIELD: Displays a field image.
Note
If you select FIELD, the image of field 2 is displayed.
Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus 91 (GB) 92 (GB) Chapter 6 Adjusting and Setting Through Menus
Troubleshooting Alarm
Alarm Messages
Message
Chapter 7 Maintenance
Please check the following before contacting your Sony dealer. If an error occurs, a warning appears on the LCD monitor and the VIDEO OUT1 output (if the SUPERIMPOSE
switch is set to ON). If you have set the DISPLAY (LCD OFF/OFF/ON) selector to LCD OFF, you still can
Symptom Cause/Remedy recognize a warning by means of the display window, the warning indicator or warning tone. Check them with the
The power cannot be turned on. • Battery pack charge is low. t Replace the battery pack. following list.
• The AC adaptor is disconnected. t Connect the AC adaptor.
Note
Chapter 7 Maintenance
Chapter 7 Maintenance
The unit will not operate even if the power • Moisture condensation has occurred. t Turn off the power, remove the battery
has been turned on. pack and disconnect the AC adaptor. Reinstall the battery pack or connect the A warning tone is only output to the headphones or return sound to the camera. The warning tone is not output to
AC adaptor after about one minute and turn on the power. Then if there is a the AUDIO MONITOR OUT jack or the AUDIO OUT jacks.
cassette in the unit, remove the cassette and keep the cassette lid open, power
on the unit and leave it on for more than one hour. Indicator lamp (flash/on) a)
• The cassette is not inserted straight. t Insert it straight. LCD Display
monitor window Unit Camera Beep Description/Recovery
The cassette cannot be inserted. • There is moisture condensation on the head drum. t Keep the cassette lid
WARNING REC/Tally BATT
open and turn the power on. Then, wait more than one hour.
• The cassette is not inserted straight. t Insert it straight. Moisture condensation (without a tape) t Keep the
Rapid Rapid
% % Beep cassette lid open and turn the power on, then wait
It takes time to eject the cassette. This is not a malfunction. t This unit ejects the cassette slowly to protect the flashing flashing
more than one hour.
tape.
Moisture condensation (with a tape) t Remove the
No picture. The video heads are dirty. t Clean the video heads using the supplied cleaning Rapid Rapid
%Z %Z Beep cassette and keep the cassette lid open and turn the
cassette. flashing flashing
power on, then wait more than one hour.
Noise appears on the screen. • A damaged cassette is inserted. t Insert an other cassette.
• The video heads are dirty. t Clean the video heads using the supplied Q Q Slow
Beep
You tried to record without a cassette. t Insert a
cleaning cassette. NO TAPE flashing cassette.
Slow Slow No The tape is reaching the end. t Provide a new
No picture via the DV jack. Reconnect the i.LINK cable (DV cable) (not supplied). Q Q flashing flashing beep cassette.
The audio is noisy. A damaged cassette is inserted. t Insert an other cassette.
QZ QZ ON
Rapid
Beep
The tape reached the end and still tried to record. t
Pause is released automatically. Pause mode is automatically released to protect the tape. TAPE END flashing Rewind the tape or replace the tape with a new one.
Duplication does not function. Check the STOP/CAUTION No. and the warning messages displayed on the The cassette is write-protected. (The REC/SAVE switch
Slow
LCD monitor. Take the appropriate action (See page 72 (GB)). QZ QZ flashing
Beep is set to SAVE.) t Set the REC/SAVE switch to REC
Audio dubbing does not function. You are trying to dub the sound on a DV-formatted tape. t You can dub the or use another cassette (See page 40 (GB)).
sound only on a DVCAM-formatted tape. Use a DVCAM-formatted tape (See You tried to dub the sound onto a tape that is not
page 74 (GB)). Slow DVCAM-formatted. t Use a DVCAM-formatted tape
Beep
A menu is not available. • If you have set the DVCAM/DV select switch to DV, some menus will be REC MODE flashing on which the sound has been recorded in the 32 kHz
disabled. t Set the DVCAM/DV select switch to DVCAM (See page 29 (GB)). audio mode (4-channel/12 bits).
• Some menus are only available in the EE mode or playback mode. t Set the You tried to dub the sound onto a blank tape or onto
unit to the EE mode or playback mode. a tape on which the sound has been not recorded in
• Some TC/UB SET menu items are available only if you have set TC MAKE to Slow the 32 kHz audio mode (4-channel/12 bits). t Use a
TAPE Beep DVCAM-formatted tape on which the sound has been
PRESET. t Set TC MAKE to PRESET. flashing
recorded in the 32 kHz audio mode (4-channel/12
bits).
You tried to dub the sound when the INPUT SELECT
Slow Beep selector has been set to DV. t You cannot dub the
DV IN flashing sound in the DV input mode. Select another input
mode.
No You have not set the clock when you turned on the unit.
CLOCK SET
beep t Set the clock with the menu (See page 92 (GB)).
You tried to record a copyright-protected source.
COPY Slow
Beep t You cannot record a copyright-protected source
INHIBIT flashing
(See page 43 (GB)).
x The video heads are clogged. t Clean the video
Displayed Rapid Rapid No heads with the supplied cleaning cassette. (The unit
Y alternately
x flashing flashing beep detects if the video heads are clean only before
recording. If the video heads get clogged during
CLEANING recording, the unit cannot detect it.)
CASSETTE
The power voltage is low. t If you are using a
battery pack, replace the battery pack. If you are
Slow Slow Slow No
e beep
using an AC adaptor, select NI-CD in uREMAIN. If
flashing flashing flashing
the warning is still displayed, use an AC adaptor that
meets the specifications of the unit.
Chapter 7 Maintenance 93 (GB) 94 (GB) Chapter 7 Maintenance
1-22
Notes
Notes on
on Use Use
Indicator lamp (flash/on) a) Notes on the videocassette recorder To prevent electromagnetic interference
LCD Display caused by radio communication equipment
monitor window Unit Camera Beep Description/Recovery
Do not use the unit in a place subject to direct such as cellular phones, transceivers, etc.
WARNING REC/Tally BATT
sunlight or heat sources The use of the radio communication equipment such as
The power voltage is very low. t If you are using a
If you do, its cabinet, mechanical parts, etc., may be cellular phones or transceivers near the unit may cause
battery pack, replace the battery pack because there
a malfunction and can affect the audio/video signals.
Chapter 7 Maintenance
Chapter 7 Maintenance
Rapid No is no battery charge. If you are using an AC adaptor, damaged.
e ON
flashing
ON
beep The cellular phones or transceivers near the unit
select NI-CD in uREMAIN. If the warning is still
displayed, use an AC adaptor that meets the Do not use the unit in an extremely hot place should be switched off.
specifications of the unit.
If the unit is left in a car parked with its windows
Rapid
The unit is running the self-diagnostics (See page 98 closed (especially in summer), its cabinet, mechanical Do not use the unit in an area exposed to
Rapid
Z Z flashing flashing
Beep (GB)). This warning display is erased when you turn
parts, etc., may be damaged or it may not work radiation
on/off the power of the unit. A malfunction may occur.
correctly.
a) The indicator flashes 3.2 times per second in the rapid flashing mode and flashes 0.8 time per second in the slow flashing
mode. If the unit is brought directly from a cold to a Checking the video heads every 1000 hours
warm location A VCR is a high-precision piece of equipment that
Moisture may condense inside the unit and cause records and plays back the picture on a magnetic tape.
damage to the video heads and tape. If you use the unit In particular, the video heads and other mechanical
in a place subject to direct cold currents from an air parts may become dirty or worn. To maintain a clean
conditioner, moisture may also condense inside the picture, we recommend maintenance every 1000
unit. hours, even though the conditions of use may differ
depending on temperature, humidity, dust, etc.
Do not place a heavy object on the unit
The cabinet, mechanical parts, etc., may be damaged,
Cleaning of the video heads
or the unit may not work correctly.
If the video heads are contaminated, the pictures
Do not handle the unit roughly
cannot be recorded properly or the playback pictures
Avoid rough handling or mechanical shock.
become noisy. If the following phenomena occur, use
the cleaning cassette (supplied) to clean the heads.
To avoid damaging the cabinet’s finish
¥ Square-shaped noise appears on the playback picture.
Plastic is partially used for the surface finishing of the
¥ A part of the playback picture does not move.
unit. Do not spray a volatile solvent such as an
¥ The playback picture does not appear on the screen.
insecticide toward the cabinet or place rubber or vinyl
products on the cabinet for a long time. If you do, the
finish of the cabinet may be damaged or the coating
Symptoms caused by contaminated video heads
may come off.
Do not clean the cabinet with thinner or
benzine
The cabinet may be damaged or its coating may come
off. When you use a chemical-impregnated cloth, use
Normal picture If these pictures appear on the
it according to its directions. screen, use the cleaning cassette.
Clean the cabinet with a soft dry cloth
When the cabinet is very dirty, clean it with a soft dry To use the cleaning cassette
cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution Refer to your cleaning cassette s operating
and finish it with a dry cloth. instructions.
Do not put magnetic objects close to the unit After prolonged use, the video heads may become
Magnetic fields may damage the recording. worn out. If optimum picture quality is not restored
even after you have cleaned the video heads with the
cleaning cassette, the video heads may have worn out.
In that case, you have to replace the video heads with
new ones. Please consult your Sony dealer.
Chapter 7 Maintenance 95 (GB) 96 (GB) Chapter 7 Maintenance
Notes on Use
Notes on the video cassettes When bringing the unit or tape from a cold place to a Self-diagnostics function
warm place or vice versa, put it in a plastic bag and
If the cassette memory function does not work seal the bag tightly. After bringing it into the new The unit has a self-diagnosis display function.
Reinsert the cassette a few times. The terminal portion place, leave the bag on for more than one hour, and This function displays the current condition of the unit
of the cassette may be dusty or dirty. remove the bag when the air temperature inside it has as a five-digit code (a combination of a letter and
Chapter 7 Maintenance
Chapter 7 Maintenance
reached the temperature surrounding it. numbers) on the display window, the LCD monitor and
Cleaning the terminal VIDEO OUT1 output. If a five-digit code is displayed,
If the terminal of the cassette gets dirty, or dust sticks If moisture condensation occurred check the following code chart. The last two digits
to the terminal, the unit may not work correctly. You cannot operate the unit except to press EJECT, (indicated by ss) will differ depending on the state
Clean the terminal with the swab once every ten times and the cassette cannot be inserted. If this occurs, turn of your unit.
you eject a cassette. on the power to remove the cassette, then keep
opening the cassette lid, and finally wait more than one Code Symptom Remedy
hour for the moisture to evaporate. C:21:ss Moisture Remove the cassette
condensation has and keep the cassette
occurred. lid open and turn the
Digital hours meter power on, then wait
Terminal
more than one hour.
C:22:ss The video heads are Clean the heads using
The digital hours meter keeps cumulative counts of the
dirty. the cleaning cassette
total operation time, the head drum rotation time, the (supplied).
When affixing a label to the cassette
tape running time and the number of unthreading C:31:ss To prevent the unit • Remove the cassette,
Be sure to affix a label on only the correct location so
operations. These counts can be displayed on the from malfunctioning, or turn on/off the unit.
as not to cause malfunction of the unit.
monitor screen. Use them as guidelines for scheduling the self-diagnosis • Disconnect the
maintenance. function has taken battery and AC
After using a cassette over.
In general, consult your Sony dealer about necessary adaptor. After
After use, please be sure to rewind the tape completely reconnecting them,
periodic maintenance checks.
(to prevent picture and sound distortion). Return it to operate the unit.
its case and store it in an upright position. C:32:ss To prevent the unit • Turn on/off the unit.
The digital hours meter has the following four display
from malfunctioning, • Disconnect the
modes and you can check them in HRS METER of the the self-diagnosis battery and AC
About moisture condensation OTHERS menu (See page 92 (GB)). function has taken adaptor. After
over. reconnecting them,
If the unit or tape is brought directly from a cold to a ¥ OPERATION mode operate the unit.
warm location, moisture may condense inside or The cumulative total hours of operating time is
outside the unit or tape. If you use the tape or video displayed in 10-hour increments.
If you are unable to resolve the problem, or a code
heads in this condition, the tape may adhere to the other than those in the above chart appears, contact
head drum, and the video heads or the tape may be ¥ DRUM ROTATION mode
your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service
damaged, or malfunction may occur. The cumulative total hours of drum rotation with tape
facility and inform them of the number.
threaded is displayed in 10-hour increments.
Moisture condensation is likely to occur under the
following conditions: ¥ TAPE RUN mode
¥ The unit or tape is brought from the cold outdoors to The cumulative total hours of tape running time is
a warm indoor location. displayed in 10-hour increments.
¥ The unit or tape is brought from the air-conditioned
indoors to the hot outdoors. ¥ THREADING mode
¥ The unit is used in a place subject to cold currents The cumulative number of tape unthreading
from an air conditioner. operations is displayed in 10-operation increments.
Chapter 7 Maintenance 97 (GB) 98 (GB) Chapter 7 Maintenance
1-23E
1-23
http://getMANUAL.com
DSR-50/50P
SECTION 2
DISASSEMBLY
Note: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.
2-1. TOP/BOTTOM COVER ASSEMBLIES 2-3. FR-157 BOARD
4 Open the battery
5 Five screws
cover assembly.
(B3 × 6)
4 Three screws
6 Top cover assembly 5 FR-157 board (B2)
1 Flat cable
(CN504)
Switches 3 Screw (B2)
Switches
2 Two screws Switches Switches
(B3 × 6)
1 Two screws Switch
(B3 × 6)
Volumes
3 Carrying Slide knobs 2 Two screws
handle assembly (B2)
Volume
knobs
Slide Volume Slide knobs
9 Bottom cover knobs knobs
7 Two screws
assembly
(B3 × 6)
8 Three screws Note: When installing FR-157 board, connect volumes with
(B3 × 6) volume knobs and switches with slide knobs.
2-2. FRONT PANEL 2-4. LCD MODULE (LCD901)
3 Screw
(M1.7 × 4)
1 Four screws
3 Three connectors 7 Flexible board (B2)
(CN331, 333, 705) (CN8200)
8 Front panel 8 LCD module
(LCD901)
5 Screw
(B3 × 6)
5 LCD
frame
4 Claw
6 PD-125 board,
cold cathode tube
1 Connector
(CN704)
2 Flat cable
6 Claw (FVJ-7) (CN701)
4 Screw (B3 × 6) 2 Front panel assembly
7 Claw
2-1
2-5. MECHANISM DECK 2-6. CM-59 BOARD
1 Flat cable
(FVJ-13)
(CN1101) 2 Flat cable
6 Two step screws (FVJ-14) (CN6001)
(M3) 3 Flat cable
(FVJ-13)
7 Two step screws (CN7002)
(M3)
4 Connector
(CN7001)
3 Two connectors
4 Flat cable (CN300, 501)
8 Mechanism (FJC-1)
5 Two connectors
deck (CN001)
(CN1100, 4400)
9 Connector
(CN100)
1 Two flat cables
6 CM-59 board (FMD-14)
(CN200, 201)
5 Two screws
(T3 × 4.5) 2 Two flat cables
(FRJ-1)
(CN400, 500)
2-7. JC-20/DI-73 BOARDS
2 JC shield case
6 JC-20 board 1 Four screws
7 Screw (T2 × 4.5)
(B2 × 4)
3 Flat cable
(FJC-1)
qs DI-73 board (CN5005)
qa DI shield case
4 Two flat cables (FRJ-1)
(CN4401, 4402)
8 Screw
5 Connector (B2 × 4)
(CN8001)
9 JC shield case
0 Four screws
(T2 × 4.5)
2-2
2-8. VD-28 BOARD
8 Five connectors
1 Connector 0 Flat cable (CN601, 602, 605, 904, 905)
(CN706) (FVJ-13) (CN606)
qs Flat cable 6 Four connectors
(FVJ-13) (CN332) (CN900 – 903)
qa Flat cable
(FVJ-14) (CN703)
5 VD-28 board
4 Six screws 2 Three flat cables
(B3 × 6) (FVJ-7)
(CN102, 603, 604)
9 Connector 3 Flat cable
(CN702) (FVJ-10) (CN607)
7 Two connectors
(CN101, 401)
2-9. SIDE PANEL ASSEMBLY
3 Side panel assembly
1 Connector
(CN391)
2 Two screws
(B3 × 6)
2-3
2-10. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION
VD-28
SYNC GENERATOR, VIDEO IN, UVIC,
VIDEO OUT, AUDIO, HI CONTROL,
EJ-28 DC IN, DC/DC CONVERTER
(EJECT SWITCH) VL-26
(LITHIUM BATTERY)
FR-157
(USER CONTROL)
KP-8
(SWITCH) JK-169
VIDEO IN/OUT,
AUDIO IN,
AUDIO IN/OUT
PD-125 IL-013
(RGB DRIVER, TG) (DV CONNECTOR)
HP-117
(HEAD PHONE)
Inverter trans unit
LT-32
(BACK LIGHT)
JC-20
VIDEO AD CONVERTER,
CHROMA MIX, AFC, VIDEO DISP,
D/A CONVERTER, SFD, TFD,
RP-234
DV INTERFACE, AUDIO,
(REC/PB AMP)
MECHANISM CONTROL,
MODE CONTROL, POWER SUPPLY
MD-76
(TAPE SENSOR)
DI-73
VIDEO D/A CONVERTER,
VIDEO FIFO MEMORY, AUDIO HPF,
SYNC SHIFTER, D/A CONVERTER,
AUDIO A/D, TIME CODE IN/OUT,
AUDIO DSP, AUDIO DSP CONTROL
CM-59
DC/DC CONVERTER, REEL MOTOR DRIVE,
CAPSTAN MOTOR DRIVE, FL MOTOR DRIVE,
DRUM MOTOR DRIVE, CAM MOTOR DRIVE
2-4E
2-4
DSR-50/50P
SECTION 3
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM 1
CN101 VD-28 BOARD (1/5)
CN026 (1/4) 7 B-Y IN 7
R-Y IN
CAMERA 5 5
VIDEO IN DSR-50P
1 1
Y IN
3 3 IC127 IC130
CN103 (1/2) CN102 (1/2) SYNC SEP
S-C IN IC104 (SEE PAGE 4-82) IC117
7 7
S-Y IN S-C/C SWITCH B-Y/C SWITCH CN332
S VIDEO IN
4 4 (SEE PAGE 4-81) (SEE PAGE 4-86) (1/4)
IC102 28 24 1 CB IN
1 7 FL104 6 IC120 3 1 3 3 IC128 1 8
SC DET VIDEO SWITCH 7 5 19 TRAP 3
9 9 VC DELAY
(SEE PAGE 4-81) 39 FL108 B. P. F. 3 2 AMP
(SEE PAGE 4-85) 4
1 IC119 2 (SEE PAGE 4-86) (SEE PAGE 4-86)
VIDEO/ VIDEO IN 7 FL106 CLAMP 25 IC103 IC122
1 1 3 Y/C SEP
REF. IN S-Y/Y SWITCH IC118 VC AMP
J105 (1/4) 2 (SEE PAGE 4-86)
(SEE PAGE 4-82) (SEE PAGE 4-81) IC124 R-Y/C SWITCH
C DECODE 1 IC121 CR IN
JK-169 BOARD IC109
1 7 FL105 6 3 7 5 3 IC129 1 10
7 25 VC DELAY
(1/4) 31 FL107 3 1 3 20 TRAP 3 AMP
(SEE PAGE 4-132) AMP 2 4 2 6
2 (SEE PAGE 4-85) (SEE PAGE 4-86)
33 41 11 12
(SEE PAGE 4-81) (SEE PAGE 4-81)
G4
G6
G3
G5
X104
4 IC131 1 18 10 14.318182MHz A
OSC :DSR-50
JC-20 BOARD
G3 – G6
(SEE PAGE 4-81) 4 11 17.734475MHz
(1/6)
:DSR-50P
CN1101 (1/4)
G7
G8
Y IN
G10
G11
IC125
G9
G7 – G11 FL103 DL102 3 4 12
AMP OVERALL2
SEE PAGE 3-3
(SEE PAGE 4-86)
(SEE PAGE 4-84) IC126 VD-28 BOARD (2/5)
IC107 (SEE PAGE 4-84) (SEE PAGE 4-85) AFC Y
SYNC SELECT 19 OVERALL4
BUFFER DL101 3 S-Y/Y SWITCH
IC115 IC116 SEE PAGE 3-8
7 3 4 1 5 1 AFC Y
BUFFER BUFFER 1 AMP VC AMP 7 14
2 3 3 V SYNC VD-28
1
2 BOARD (2/5)
(SEE PAGE 4-86)
FSC ADJ OVERALL4
3 7 1
XCPNT SEL
SEE PAGE 3-8
XCPNT SEL
IC132
XS SEL
2 GEN REFY
2
XCAM SEL
SWITCH
TEST
XANA
VD-28
FSC
DIG/
(SEE PAGE 4-82) DIG/XANA, XCPNT SEL BOARD (2/5)
DV SEL, FSC TEST, 3 OVERALL4
G1
XS SEL, XCAM SEL, G1 – G11 SEE PAGE 3-7
4
XS SEL
XCPNT SEL
DV SEL
31 VD-28
IC106 HI SI, HI SO, HI SCK, XCS MO
BOARD (4/5)
2 COMPONENT 8 82 17 OVERALL7
DETECT IC709 (1/3) 63 CN703 (1/2) SEE PAGE 3-14
10 11 21
(SEE PAGE 4-83) HI CONTROL
IC112 X101 (SEE PAGE 4-98) 23
500kHz 25
2 S VIDEO/VIDEO 8 83 19
IC101 DETECT XSLEEP
SIGNAL SELECT 4 61 5 28
10 11
(SEE PAGE 4-83) (SEE PAGE 4-84) IC704 32 79 80 19 6
4 2 RESET 2
X102 XIC RST JC-20 BOARD
5 29
500kHz MO XWAKEUP (3/6)
1 27
5 7 18
(SEE PAGE 4-97)
XSYS RST
B CN6001 (2/2)
3 17 OVERALL5
3 IC105 IC332 10 15
2 4 IC333 IC335 MO SCK, MO SO, MO SI SEE PAGE 3-9
SIGNAL SELECT Q338 UVIC 11 13
IC108 17 IC334 IC336
1 (SEE PAGE 4-83) SYNC SEP CONTROL 12 11
SIGNAL SELECT 31 XCS UVIC
3 7 (SEE PAGE 4-84) 13 AND GATE/INVERTER 9
5 UVIC BUSY
28 8
5 X331 32 (SEE PAGE 4-88) UVIC SWIN
29 7
3 7 3.579545MHz UVIC GATE
IC133 :DSR-50 6
3 1 1 (SEE PAGE 4-87)
AMP 4.433619MHz
2 4 :DSR-50P
(SEE PAGE 4-83) INT/EXT DET
5
2 4 GEN LOCK Y
6
1
GEN LOCK C VD-28
3 7 5 7 7 BOARD (2/5)
3
IC110 OVERALL4
2 4 SEE PAGE 3-7
DV REF SYNC
IC113
DV REF SC
SWITCH
(SEE PAGE 4-84) SIGNAL SELECT EE/XPB EE/XPB, INT/XEXT
(SEE PAGE 4-84) 8
INT/XEXT
DV REF SYNC, DV REF SC
9
XRESET VD-28
10 BOARD (5/5)
OVERALL9
05 SEE PAGE 3-17
3-1 3-2
DSR-50/50P
3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM 2
JC-20 BOARD (1/6) IL-013
CN8001 (1/7) JIG PIN
BOARD (FOR CHECK)
13 15 17 MY00 – 17 (SEE PAGE 4-34)
38
19 21 23 DV 2 1 3 17 8 12 6
4 CN201
25 27 CN4400 CN391 CN392 IN/OUT RP-234 BOARD
DI-73 BOARD (1/3) 14 16 18 Y0 – 7 IC4402 NTPB, 6 6 3
TMS
TCK
TDI
TDO
RF MONITOR
RF IN
JSWP
CN9500 (1/5) 20 22 24 9 TPB, 5 5 4
OVERALL3
L 26 28
47 LIP ı
3 3 5
(SEE PAGE 4-33) 6 NTPA,
SEE PAGE 3-5 32 34 36 JC00 – 07 TPA 2 2 6
38 40 42 50 52 39 49 40 37 – 27 M901 (1/2)
44 46 DRUM HEAD
MHO 46 45 44 43
31 46 CN101
56789 CN4402 CN202
VBUS CRCK CRCK CRCK 7 YODD, XODD 6
CN1101 (1/4) IC1108 14 14 14 27 13 40
1 Y (8) 17 90 0–7 53 71 5 6 5
Y IN 11 42
19 21 A/D ı ı ı ı ı TBUS 0 – 7 ı
12 CONVERTER 8 8 83 61 80 12 15 TXDT0 – 4 12 TXDT0 – 4 12 TXDT0 – 4 26
(SEE PAGE 4-22) ı ı ı ı 2 YEVEN, XEVEN 3
19 8 8 22 5 34 41
38 1 2
82 63
82 ı
81 81
65 48 XTDT0, XTDT0, 6 ADDT0 – 5 15 42 27
80 80
64 XTDT1 XTDT0, 1 XTDT1 ı ı IC201
23 17 17 30
MS BUS
IC1109 IC2209 IC2215 1 20
1 CR (8) IC4401 24 16 16 29 TRF IC101
CR IN A/D 99
21 21 ı IC2214 BUFFER 95 HPCK, HPCK, (SEE PAGE 4-13)
7 96 100 TFD TRW
12 CONVERTER 8 CR/CB (SEE PAGE 4-24) 12
51 ı HPCK, XTSY, XTSY, XTSY, 7 13 31
(SEE PAGE 4-22) CHROMA (8) ı 97 17 100 21 20 20 32 IC301 (SEE PAGE 4-14)
2 18 4 TXST TXST TXST
MIX ı ı IC4400 18 22 19 19 31
(SEE PAGE 4-23) 9 11 109 TRX 22 24
20 6 6 21
CR/CB ı SFD (SEE PAGE 4-11)
(8) 106 (SEE PAGE 4-29) (SEE PAGE 4-31)
IC1110
CB IN 1 CB (8) LRCK
VD-28 BOARD (1/5) 23 21 A/D ı 43
IC3300 SFD LRCK 19 34
CN332 (1/4) 12 CONVERTER 8 37 18 37
A (SEE PAGE 4-22) VFD
BCK
41
CLK135
1
CLK135
1
CLK135
41
OVERALL1 SFD BCK
SEE PAGE 3-2 (SEE PAGE 4-27) 39 26 31 32
ATF ATF ATF
IC2208 IC2212 4 4 61
SOA,
MSI, XSCK
44
IC2210 IC2213 SOB,
46 47 50 51
IC2211 45
SIC, 47
TIMING GEN. SID CN4401 DRP SI, CN203
(SEE PAGE 4-23, 24) DRPSO,
10 MS CK 10 MSI, MSO, XSCK
9 9
8 8
101 14
SWP
24 23 41 6 6
MS BUS
13
55 100 X4400
IC2204 84 – 86
43 22 104 24.576MHz
AFC Y CLOCK GENERATOR
17 7 28 105
V SYNC (SEE PAGE 4-26)
30
48 52 60 115 60
IC2202 116 78
117 79
CN8001 (2/7) (SEE PAGE 4-25) 80 IC5006
IC2203 IC5003 (1/2)
DI-73 BOARD (2/3) VFD VD 95 90 7 EEPROM
CN9500 (4/5) 67 5 CLAMP 2 111 MECHANISM
K VFD OE (SEE PAGE 4-25) ı CONTROL 89 6 (SEE PAGE 4-38)
OVERALL8 69 26
VFD HD 114 ı (SEE PAGE 4-37)
SEE PAGE 3-16 70 3 11 MS BUS
37
88 1
22
23
SFD BCK
60 234
BCK LVD
62 118
SFD LRCK
64 IC1101 74 75 76
LRCK CN8001 (3/7)
66 IC5002 DI-73 BOARD (2/3)
DI-73 BOARD (2/3) 1 19 75
CN9500 (4/5) J 55 SOA, VRT, VRB IC1107 D/A CN9500 (4/5)
57 SOB, REF DC
ı
3 CONVERTER
ı
21
VSP SI, VSP SO, XVSP SCK VSP SI, VSP SO, XVSP SCK 78 M OVERALL8
OVERALL8 76
PB/XREC
GEN. (SEE PAGE 4-35) SEE PAGE 3-16
56 PAL/XNT
SPCK2
SEE PAGE 3-15 SIC, (SEE PAGE 4-21)
AFH
58 SID
CN1101 (2/4)
IC1112 MONITOR Y
VFD HD
61 FL1101 3 BUFFER 4 13
IC3301 VD-28 BOARD (2/5)
(SEE PAGE 4-20)
PB/XREC (SEE PAGE 4-28) 20 36 CN332 (2/4)
45 IC3302 19 37
D
DI-73 BOARD (1/3) SPCK2 OVERALL4
CN9500 (2/5) 41 1 BUFFER 5 8 IC1111 SEE PAGE 3-7
I PAL/XNT 18 26 MONITOR C
43 (SEE PAGE 4-28) 68 FL1102 3 BUFFER 4 15
OVERALL3 IC3303 ı ı
AFH (SEE PAGE 4-20)
SEE PAGE 3-5 35 16 28
X3300 CHARACTER 14 33
IC6003
13.5MHz GENERATOR
SWITCH (SEE PAGE 4-28) 11 35 IC1000
(SEE PAGE 4-40) PANEL Y
M045 13 34 72 FL1100 3 BUFFER 4 1
CN6001 (1/2) 2 1
OSD SO HI 4 2 (SEE PAGE 4-20)
26 3 3
M046 IC1001
5 PANEL CR
7 74 FL1103 3 4 3
OSD SCK HI BUFFER
VD-28 BOARD (5/5) 28 6 (SEE PAGE 4-20) VD-28 BOARD (3/5)
CN703 (2/2) IC6001 (1/2) CN332 (3/4)
H M044
11
N OVERALL6
OVERALL9 MODE CONTROL
XCS OSD HI 9 96 IC1002 SEE PAGE 3-11
SEE PAGE 3-17 30 10 (SEE PAGE 4-40) PANEL CB
76 FL1104 3 4 5
BUFFER
1 15 11 45 46 44 50 52 53 (SEE PAGE 4-20)
M045
M046
M044
OSD SW VFD VD, VFD HD 26
29 27
JC-20 BOARD
(3/6) OSD VD
OVERALL5
11
SEE PAGE 3-9
05
3-3 3-4
DSR-50/50P
3-3. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM 3
DI-73 BOARD (1/3) JC-20 BOARD (2/6)
CN9500 (1/5) (SEE PAGE 4-45)
IC9013 CN9500 CN8001 CN1101
13
15 IC9016 FIFO Y IC9004 (2/5) (4/7) (3/4)
24 1
17 ANALOG ı ı Y IC9001
MY00 – 07 2 18 MY00 – MY07 Y00 – Y07 2 19 DY0 – DY7 17 1 1
19 SWITCH 21 4 ı SWITCH ı ı DPB Y OUT Y LINE
ı ı 41 FL9000 3 AMP 1 11
21 9 11 16 9 9 (SEE PAGE 4-53) 12 24 2 2
23 (SEE PAGE 4-54) ı ı (SEE PAGE 4-51)
IC9014 13 12
25 1 11
27
1 7
(SEE PAGE 4-54) 19 8
14
16 IC9015 17 6
18 ANALOG (SEE PAGE 4-54)
20 Y0 – 7 2 18
ı SWITCH ı
JC-20 BOARD 22 9 (SEE PAGE 4-54) 11 IC9000
(1/6) 24
26 VIDEO
CN8001 (1/7) L 28
1
D/A CONVERTER
OVERALL2
SEE PAGE 3-3 IC9008 (SEE PAGE 4-51)
32 IC9011 3 CB 2
34 24 FIFO C 1 4 SWITCH 5
36 7 6 IC9007 VD-28 BOARD (2/5)
JC00 – 07 ı ı JC0 – JC7 CB00 – CB07 1
38 21 4 8 9 5 DPB CR OUT 5 CR LINE CN332 (2/4)
40 16 9 13 12
ı 39 FL9001 3 AMP 1
6 6
9 C OVERALL4
8
42 ı ı 14 15 (SEE PAGE 4-52) SEE PAGE 3-7
44 13 12 17 16
46 18 19
IC9012
6 (SEE PAGE 4-53)
DA135 8
FIFO 7 17
5 CONTROL 6 11 1
19
(SEE PAGE 4-54)
MHO
31 10
11 9
3
4
2 IC9005
(SEE PAGE 4-54)
3 IC9009 2
1 4 5
7 CR 6 IC9010
8 SWITCH 9 CR0 – CR7 9
ı 37 FL9002 3 AMP 1 9 DPB CB OUT 9 CB LINE
7
13 12 10 10
16
14 15 (SEE PAGE 4-52)
17 16
18 19
27 – 29
(SEE PAGE 4-53)
11 1
PB/XREC
45 IC9501
SPCK2 IC9502
41
IC9500
IC9504
IC9503 IC9006
PAL/XNT IC9505
43
IC9506 IC9018
IC9507
IC9509 IC9019
IC9508
IC9512 CB/CR
SYNC
VH-HD SHIFTER CONTROL
JC-20 BOARD SYNC
(1/6) SHIFTER (SEE PAGE 4-52)
CN8001 (4/8) I
OVERALL2
SEE PAGE 3-3 (SEE PAGE 4-55, 56, 57, 58)
(SEE PAGE 4-55, 56)
IC9510
IC9518
IC9511
IC9513 1 EE WHDY
4
FIFO MUTE
IC9514 2
(SEE PAGE 4-52)
IC9515
IC9516 IC9519
AFH IC9517
35 1 EE WHDC
Y/C 4
SELECT 2
(SEE PAGE 4-57, 58) (SEE PAGE 4-52)
05
3-5 3-6
DSR-50/50P
3-4. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM 4
VD-28 BOARD(2/5)
CN332 (2/4) CN401
IC418 CN026 (2/4)
JC-20 BOARD (1/6) MONITOR Y IC417 RETURN VIDEO
CN1101 (2/4)
D
18
MONITOR C MIX 3 1 2 MONITOR 11 1 18 CAMERA
16 AMP DRIVER 13
OVERALL2
(SEE PAGE 4-93) (SEE PAGE 4-93)
SEE PAGE 3-4
JK-169
(SEE PAGE 4-91) CN102 BOARD (2/4)
IC427 IC416 IC422 (2/2) CN103 (2/2) J102 (1/2)
IC410 IC419
Y LINE Y OUT Y
20 FL406 DL404 1 VC AMP 6 CLAMP 2 16 4 INVERT 1 DL403 4 INVERT 1 2 Y OUT 13 30 30
Y BLANKING AMP
(SEE PAGE 4-90) 4 AMP DRIVER 11
SET UP ADD
3 (SEE PAGE 4-91) (SEE PAGE 4-92)
6 (SEE PAGE 4-92)
14 10
B13
IC423 MUTE
JC-20 BOARD (2/6) IC402 IC428 IC414 J103 (1/2)
CN1101 (3/4) CR LINE R-Y OUT COMPONENT
(1/2) R-Y OUT
C 22 FL404 6 VC DELAY 3 7 5 CLAMP 3 NON INVERT 1 DL401 2 DRIVER 13 27 27 R-Y
OUTPUT
OVERALL3 VC AMP AMP
(SEE PAGE 4-89) (SEE PAGE 4-92)
SEE PAGE 3-6 (SEE PAGE 4-90)
4 (SEE PAGE 4-91) 14
6
MUTE
B15
B2
IC403 IC428 IC415 IC424 J104 (1/2)
CB LINE (2/2) B-Y OUT B-Y OUT
24 FL405 6 VC DELAY 3 1 3 CLAMP 3 NON INVERT 1 DL402 2 13 24 24 B-Y
(SEE PAGE 4-89) VC AMP AMP DRIVER
(SEE PAGE 4-90) (SEE PAGE 4-91) (SEE PAGE 4-92)
4 2 14 J105 (2/4)
MUTE S-Y OUT
IC421 15 15 S VIDEO
1 IC411 3 1 IC413 IC426 S-C OUT OUT
VC AMP 18 FL403 B. P. F. 4 INVERT 1 2 13 18 18
7 5 24 C ENCODE C OUT
AMP 4
(SEE PAGE 4-93) DRIVER
FSC ADJ
(SEE PAGE 4-93)
(SEE PAGE 4-94) (SEE PAGE 4-94)
2 6 4 21 5 20 3 22 VIDEO
IC001 IC013 J104 (2/2)
6 14 MON
IC002 IC017 OUT VIDEO
21 21
SCU
SCV
FSC TEST MUTE
B10
B11
DV REF SYNC, OUT1
B8
B9
DV REF SC IC007 IC061
9 VD SO, VD SCK
IC425 J105 (3/4)
VD-28 BOARD (4/5) 16 IC009 IC420 VIDEO
IC405 VIDEO OUT 13 OUT VIDEO
OVERALL7 4 INVERT 1 2 12 12
EVR LOAD, V S/P XSTB DRIVER OUT2
SEE PAGE 3-14 D/A AMP
15 CONVERTER
FL402 1 VC AMP 5
DSR-50P (SEE PAGE 4-94) (SEE PAGE 4-94) (SEE PAGE 4-131)
(SEE PAGE 4-94)
SCU, SCV
(SEE PAGE 4-79, 80) 14
SDC
3 7 5 7 VD-28 BOARD (4/5)
MUTE V MUTE
R UV CLAMP
R SYNC OUT
DIG/XANA, B7 14
R Y CLAMP
6 OVERALL7
XCPNT SEL
C1 – C4
A1 – A7
B4
B5
3 SEE PAGE 3-14
R Y BLK
B4 – B7 B6 FL401
DV SEL, FSC TEST, XS SEL, 3 IC404 FSC ADJ
XCAM SEL, G1 – G11 2 VC AMP 1 1 VD-28 BOARD (1/5)
4 (SEE PAGE 4-93) OVERALL1
FSC TEST, SDC SEE PAGE 3-2
EE/XPB, INT/XEXT A1 – A5
8 A5 IC037
(SEE PAGE 4-77, 78)
A1 – A4
15 20
2
IC003 IC031 IC042
VD-28 GEN LOCK Y IC040 SC U
BOARD (1/5) 6 2 SYNC SEP 1 17 18
IC035
1 4 HD PHASE 4 3
OVERALL1 (SEE PAGE 4-75) 14 EX OR 90˚ SHIFT
SC PHASE ADJ IC043
SEE PAGE 3-2 (SEE PAGE 4-78)
A6, A7
(SEE PAGE 4-78)
0˚/180˚
C1
17 C4 LALT SC V
IC004 6
C3
GEN LOCK C C2
7 10 22 1
IC008 (SEE PAGE 4-78)
4 IC025 IC030 IC019
SC PROC IC057 IC062
9
(SEE PAGE 4-75) IC012 IC028 IC033 IC022
IC058 IC063 23
E5
E6
GEN LOCK 7 29 HD SHIF HD SHIF
IC059
(SEE PAGE 4-75) 8 COURSE ADJ FINE ADJ
INT/EXT DET VR ADJ DSR-50P IC027 (SEE PAGE 4-76)
5 11 (SEE PAGE 4-77)
(SEE PAGE 4-75, 76)
SYNC GEN
E5
DSR-50 (SEE PAGE 4-76)
IC016
IC060 IC024 IC014 IC034 IC050
GEN REF Y IC021 R SYNC OUT
2 1 5 SC 8 8 BUFFER IC018 IC039 IC051 R Y BLK
SC SWITCH
E5, E6
X002 13 COMPARATOR 2 3
AMP (SEE PAGE 4-76) R Y CLAMP
9 14.31818MHz (SEE PAGE 4-75) 4 5 IC020 IC044 IC052
(SEE PAGE 4-76) :DSR-50 6 7 R UV CLAMP
1 2 12 31 E1, E2, E4, E6, E8
17.734475MHz 8 9 IC023 IC046 IC054
2
A7
X001 :DSR-50P 11 12
C2
A6
E7
ı
14.31818MHz 13 14 IC026 IC047 IC055
E7
6
:DSR-50 10 15 16
14.1875MHz 17 18 IC029 IC048 IC056
:DSR-50P R BF OUT
7 24 18 IC032 TIMING DELAY
6 PULSE STRECH VD-28 BOARD (1/5)
AFC Y
8 IC005
(SEE PAGE 4-76, 77, 78, 79, 80) 19 OVERALL1
12 SEE PAGE 3-2
9
NOR 1 24 IC049 21
11
(SEE PAGE 4-75) 2 SYNC GEN 29
(SEE PAGE 4-80)
05
3-7 3-8
DSR-50/50P
3-5. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM 5
M903
JC-20 BOARD (3/6) CM-59 BOARD CN400
CN5005 (1/2) CN001 (1/2)
CAP FG CAP FG CAPSTAN 23 16 FG2, FG1 CAP
115 36 15 24
FG AMP 22 17 FG
46 34 CAP FWD, CAP ON 17 CAP FWD, CAP ON
45 33 18
DRUM FWD,
48 27 DRUM ON 24 DRUM FWD, DRUM ON IC400
47 26 25
DRUM MASTER CLK DRUM CLK (SEE PAGE 4-110)
63 31 20 14
HI C/R SW 15
9 50 1 14
CAPSTAN
MOTOR 13
7 5 U, V, W
DRIVER 8 CAPSTAN
7
CAP PWM CAP VS 7 MOTOR
69 35 16 L. P. F. 6 IC300 7 6 46 SWICHING 3 9
10
(1/3) 9
IC102
L. P. F. IC100
REEL PWM REEL VS 54 55 53 5 20 CN500
71 40 11 L. P. F. 8 (SEE PAGE 4-109) 9 30 39 SWICHING
DC/DC 5 M901 (2/2)
BUFFER CONVERTER 25 4
22 1 IC501 6
(SEE PAGE 4-105) DRUM
IC500 2 3
DRUM PWM DRUM VS PREDRIVE 26 21 (1/2) U, V, W
68 28 23 L. P. F. 7 16 25 (SEE PAGE 4-105) 40 SWICHING 17 23 4 DRUM
L. P. F. 23 24 1 MOTOR
DRUM 18
(SEE PAGE 4-107) 2
IC500 27 6 MOTOR
(SEE PAGE 4-107) 24 19 DRIVER
VREF 11 44 SWICHING 6.25V (SEE PAGE 4-108)
117 30 DRUM PG, DRUM FG 21 DRUM PG, DRUM FG 4 DRUM PG/FG 1 11 PG, FG DRUM
116 29 22 60 DRIVER 63 10 PG
43 CM (+), CM (–) 8 CM+, CM– 42 30 18 IC501
49 CN501
50 44 7 41 31 12 (2/2) 9 1 CM LOAD, CM UNLOAD
C MOTOR M905
CM LIMIT ON,
DRIVER C MOTOR 11 2
M FL MOTOR
51 45 CM LIMIT DET 6 CM LIMIT ON, CM LIMIT DET 39 32 17 DRIVER
52 46 5 40 33 13
(SEE PAGE 4-108)
M904
1 CN201 CN1 CN3
X5001 21 1 1 1
20MHz 15 IC200 REEL V/U/W V, U, W REEL
Q200 REEL ERROR 22 ı ı ı
2 4 REEL 23 6 6 6 MOTOR
REEL FWD, BUFFER
MOTOR
44 39 REEL ON 12 REEL FWD, REEL ON 26 DRIVE
43 38 13 6 (SEE PAGE 4-106)
XSYS RESET 7 IC202
REEL M FG REEL M FG 2 9 FG1, FG2 9 8 MR FG1, MR FG2 REEL
119 41 10 1 REEL MOTOR
3 12 12 10 FG
FG AMP
(SEE PAGE 4-105)
CN5005 (2/2) CN001 (2/2) REEL FG AMP
SREEL FG, SFG IN S REEL FG
19 13 13 S REEL FG IC5
IC5003 (2/2) 113 SREEL FG, TREEL FG 18 TREEL FG 33 S REEL FG, T REEL FG 20
114 19 32 23 IC300 (2/3) TFG IN T REEL FG MD-76 BOARD
MECHANISM
CONTROL (SEE PAGE 4-37) (SEE PAGE 4-109) 22 14 14 T REEL FG IC4
TAPE ON TAPE TOP TAPE TOP TOP SENS TAPE TOP
53 7 44 14 13 21 21
TAPE TOP/END
TAPE END TAPE END TAPE END DETECT
CN6002 54 8 43 17 16
LANC IN
19 1
LANC OUT
17 2 CHIME SCK, CHIME2 (SCK)
JIG PIN XLANC PWR ON CHIME SCK, CHIME SDA, CHIME SDA, CHIME3 (SDA)
15 21 71 22 29
(FOR CHECK) EJECT CHIME VDD 18 CHIME4 (VDD) 18
17 CHIME VDD CHIME SCK, CHIME SDA, CHIME VDD
3 72 23 28 17 17
PARSLEY MODE FOR CASSETTE
1 27 73 24 27 16 16
XRESET REC PROOF REC PROOF REC PROOF REC PROOF MEMORY
5 30 85 13 38 15 15
CN6001 (2/2)
CN200 CN2
HI SI, HI SO, IC6001 (2/2) L CASSETTE L CASSETTE
10 34 L CASSETTE L CASSETTE L CASSETTE
HI SCK, XCS MO 97 12 39 14 14
8 33 MODE XC IN C IN C IN C IN
6 35 20 10 41 3 3
CONTROL XCC DOWN CC DOWN CC DOWN CC DOWN
12 32 22 IC5008 11 40 2 2
XSLEEP (SEE PAGE 4-40) D1
3 61 LEVEL SHIFT (TAPE LED)
(SEE PAGE 4-38) END SENS TAPE END
1 1
XIC RST 18
VD-28 BOARD 2 38 68 S3 S2 S1
MO XWAKEUP (CC DOWN) (C IN) (L/S CASSETTE)
(1/5) 4 62
CN703 (1/2) B XSYS RST
14 9
OVERALL1 16 MO SCK, MO SO, MO SI 50 Q1 Q2
SEE PAGE 3-2 18 49 (TAPE END) (TAPE TOP)
20 48 TAPE LED ON TAPE LED ON TAPE LED TAPE LED TAPE LED IC2
55 6 45 12 12
S REEL ERR, S ELTN ERR, S ELETEN IC1 2
XCS UVIC H
22 58 T REEL ERR T ELTN ERR S ELETEN, T ELETEN T ELETEN 1 3
UVIC BUSY 98 17 34 8 8 ELETEN
23 65 99 16 35 9 9 7 ERROR AMP
UVIC SWIN 6
24 67 22 72 (SEE PAGE 4-117) 7 H
UVIC GATE DW DET DEW DET DEW DEW DEW
25 55 96 14 37 15 15 DEW
IC3
42 MODE SW D-A 4 MODE SW D-A 47 MODE D-A 7 MODE D-A 7
81 ı ı ı ı ı MODE
VD-28 BOARD 82 39 1 50 4 4 SW
(5/5) CN1101 (4/4)
XI/O SYNC HI 83
CN332 (4/4) 28 64
IC300 CN300
OVERALL9 E 29
XI/O SYNC VFD
40 41 104 48 LM (+), LM (–) 3 LM+, LM– 25 (3/3) 2 1 LM+, LM– M902
SEE PAGE 3-17
105 49 2 24 LOADING MOTOR 29 2
M CAM MOTOR
JC-20 BOARD DRIVER
(1/6) OSD VD X6001 (SEE PAGE 4-109)
OVERALL2
11 20MHz
SEE PAGE 3-3
05
3-9 3-10
DSR-50/50P
3-6. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM 6
FR-157 BOARD (1/2) PD-125 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-123, 124)
CN505 CN504 CN8201
VG VG VG VG
5 10 1
COM COM COM COM
JIG PIN 4 9 2
PSIG PSIG PSIG PSIG
(FOR CHECK) 2 7 4
VCO CENT VCO CENT VCO CENT VCO CENT
1 6 5
VCO CENT
5
PSIG
4 (OPEN)
COM
2
VG IC8200
1 XSCK, DATA FROM HI,
DAC SO, XCS 19 EVR INVERTER ND901
ı 10 BACK
22 (SEE PAGE 4-141) BLOCK
LIGHT
VCO
8
11 9 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 12 15 D8100
VD-28 BOARD (3/5)
(SEE PAGE 4-87) CN8200
Q8010 COM Y COM
23
COM BUFFER
1 26 6 39 32 31 40 27 33 35 38
CN332 (3/4) CN331 CN8001
PANEL Y PANEL Y Y G-Y VG
30 5 5 8 22 5
PANEL CR PANEL CR CR IC8001 R-Y VR
28 6 6 9 20 4
RGB
PANEL CB PANEL CB CB DRIVER B-Y VB
26 7 7 10 24 3
(SEE PAGE 4-140)
Q8009, 8011 PSIG Y PSIG
37 6
BUFFER
48 – 45 14 36 29 28
LCD901
B+ VVDD
16 2.5INCH
(PANEL 12V Y) HVDD COLOR LCD
18
UNIT
JC-20 BOARD (1/6)
CN1101 (2/4)
N
OVERALL2
SEE PAGE 3-4 27 – 30 23 24 25 4
DWN HCK1
37 7
RGT RGT
IC8202 32 38 2
PCG HCK2
39 8
VCO XPCG CR
34 40 9
(SEE PAGE 4-141) EN SOUT
35 41 10
XEN REF
42 11
IC8201 VCK1 HST
44 12
LCD VCK2 WIDE
45 13
VFD VD, VFD HD XVD, XHD XVD, XHD XVD, XHD 20 TIMING GENERATOR VST CS
5 9 9 46 14
4 10 10 21 (SEE PAGE 4-141) 47 XVST VSS
15
VD SCK, XSCK,
DATA FROM HI, XSCK, XCS, DAC SO, HCK2 DWN
48 19
VD SO, VD SCK, PANEL DA CS 1 XCS LCD DAC 1 DATA FROM HI XCS 13 HCK1 EN
1 20
12 2 2 14
2 XHST
21
VCK
3 3 16
3 HST VST
22
VD-28 BOARD (4/5)
Q8003, 8007
OVERALL7 B+ B+
B+ SWITCH
SEE PAGE 3-14
PANEL B+
ON/OFF Q8000
CONTROL Q8001
LCD DD ON LCD DD ON
13 8 8
05
3-11 3-12
http://getMANUAL.com
DSR-50/50P
3-7. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM 7
JK-169 BOARD (3/4) VD-28 BOARD (4/5)
J105 (4/4) CN8001
CN104 CN603 CN605 CN7001 (5/7)
CH-1 CH1 OUT CH1 OUT CH1 OUT AU CH1 OUT
10 10 1 1 104
CH3 OUT CH3 OUT CH3 OUT AU CH3 OUT DI-73 BOARD (2/3)
CH-3 7 7 Q601- 5 5 96
AUDIO CN9500 (4/5)
OUTPUT
CH2 OUT
604
CH2 OUT CH2 OUT AU CH2 OUT
F OVERALL8
CH-2 MUTE 3 3 100
4 4 SEE PAGE 3-16
CH-4 CH4 OUT CH4 OUT CH4 OUT AU CH4 OUT
1 1 7 7 92
IC601 JC-20 BOARD (4/6)
AUDIO MONITOR (SEE PAGE 4-41, 45)
SELECT
(SEE PAGE 4-95) HP-117 BOARD
1 2 RV301
13 PHONE LEVEL
CN601 CN301
HPL HP L L IN IC301 J301
11 10 2 1 3 1 1 1 2 1
IC602 IC603 PHONES
12 2 HP
MIX AMP MIX AMP AMP MUTE
HPR HP R R IN
3 4 6 7 5 7 3 3 6 7
5 (SEE PAGE 4-95) 6
(SEE PAGE 4-145)
(SEE PAGE 4-95)
9 8
6 VTR RET
VTR RET AUDIO AUDIO IC305
IC604 (2/2) 10 10
S101 AUDIO 7 ATT 6 AMP
IC605
MONITOR MONITOR SEL ALARM (SEE PAGE 4-145)
30 30 5 SWITCH 7 (SEE PAGE 4-96)
SELECT
2 CONTROL 1
J101 AUDIO (SEE PAGE 4-96) IC604 (1/2)
MONITOR OUT Q606
AUDIO 13 13 1 AMP 2
B+ (+5V) MUTE
MONITOR OUT
(SEE PAGE 4-96)
B+ SWITCH TALLY LED
J106 28 28
Q109, 110
REMOTE Q605
IC702 MUTE
(SEE PAGE 4-97) 58 36
FOOT SW
29 29 BUFFER 18
B+ (+5V) IC709 (2/3) V MUTE
J107
78 14
SIRCS DATA HI CONTROL
26 26 4 VD-28 BOARD (2/5)
CONTROL S 84 EVR LOAD, V S/P XSTB
IC701 (SEE PAGE 4-98) 85 15 OVERALL4
IC105
IC101 SEE PAGE 3-7, 8
(SEE PAGE 4-97) VD SO, VD SCK
S110, (SEE PAGE 4-132)
S111 IC102 P/S DATA VD SI 16 11 33 34 35 27 22 16
1 2 20 20
IC103
4
PANEL DACS
PARALLEL/ VD-28 BOARD (1/5)
HI SI, HI SO, HI SCK, XCS MO
SERIAL XCS MO
CONVERTER 17 OVERALL1
SEE PAGE 3-2
(SEE PAGE 4-132)
P/S SCK VD SCK VD SI, VD SCK VD SO, VD SCK, PANEL DACS
22 22
VD-28 BOARD (3/5)
IC107 12
AND GATE P/S CS OVERALL6
18 18 LCD DD ON
(SEE PAGE 4-135) IC104 13 SEE PAGE 3-11
INVERTER
(SEE PAGE 4-132)
CN105 CN604 CN606 (1/2) CN7002 (1/2) CN8001 (6/7)
CH1 IN X AU X1 IN AU X1 IN
CN106 30 30 1 30 119
IC110
CH-1 BUFFER CH1 IN Y AU Y1 IN AU Y1 IN
28 28 2 29 120
(SEE PAGE 4-135)
CH2 IN X AU X2 IN AU X2 IN
CN107 25 25 4 27 115
IC111
CH-2 S102 – 109 AU Y2 IN AU Y2 IN
BUFFER CH2 IN Y
23 23 5 26 116
(SEE PAGE 4-134)
G DI-73 BOARD (2/3)
CH3 IN X AU X3 IN AU X3 IN CN9500 (3/5)
CN108 20 20 7 24 111 OVERALL8
IC113
CH-3 SEE PAGE 3-15
BUFFER CH3 IN Y AU Y3 IN AU Y3 IN
18 18 8 23 112
(SEE PAGE 4-136)
CH4 IN X AU X4 IN AU X4 IN
CN109 15 15 10 21 107
IC114
CH-4 CH4 IN Y AU Y4 IN AU Y4 IN
BUFFER 13 13 11 20 108
(SEE PAGE 4-134)
JC-20 BOARD (5/6)
(SEE PAGE 4-43, 45)
MIC X MIC IN X MIC IN (X)
IC109 10 10 1 9
CN026 (3/4)
BUFFER MIC Y MIC IN Y MIC IN (Y)
8 8 3 10 CAMERA
AUDIO MON/VTR SAVE
(SEE PAGE 4-133) 5 20
CN602
05
3-13 3-14
DSR-50/50P
3-8. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM 8
DI-73 BOARD (2/3)
IC7005
CN9500 (3/5) (SEE PAGE 4-59) CN9500 (4/5)
AU X1 IN 28 6 AU CH1 OUT
119 4 5 4 7 104
27 5
AU Y1 IN 5
120 15 1
IC7000
IC7008 IC7020
9 10 11
IC7002 IC7016 MIX/LPF
IC7010
H. P. F XCH1 HPF A/D, D/A (SEE PAGE 4-62)
IC7013 CONVERTER
(SEE PAGE 4-59) IC7004
AMP (SEE PAGE 4-61)
(SEE PAGE 4-59) (SEE PAGE 4-60)
AU X2 IN 26 2 AU CH2 OUT
115 4 5 2 1 100
25 3
AU Y2 IN
116 15 1
3
20 DEM0, DEM1
9 10 11
21
11
XCH2 HPF ı
14 XPD AD1,
JC-20 BOARD (5/6) 19
CN8001 (6/7) XPD DA1 JC-20 BOARD (4/6)
G CN8001 (5/7)
OVERALL7 F OVERALL7
SEE PAGE 3-14
SEE PAGE 3-14
IC7007
(SEE PAGE 4-59)
AU X3 IN 26 6 AU CH3 OUT
111 4 5 4 7 96
25 5
AU Y3 IN 5
112 15 1
IC7001 Q7004
IC7021
9 10 11 IC7009 Q7005
IC7003 IC7018 MIX/LPF Q7007
IC7011 Q7008
H. P. F XCH3 HPF A/D, D/A (SEE PAGE 4-62)
CONVERTER MUTE
IC7014
(SEE PAGE 4-59) IC7006
AMP (SEE PAGE 4-61)
(SEE PAGE 4-59) (SEE PAGE 4-60)
AU X4 IN 28 2 AU CH4 OUT
107 4 5 2 27 3 1 92
AU Y4 IN
108 15 1
3
20 DEM0,
60 SFD BCK, BCK, SFD LRCK, LRCK 9 10 11
62 21 DEM1
64
66 XCH4 HPF
XPD AD2,
19
XPD DA2
4
5 A. DA DATA1, A. DA DATA2,
117 A. AD DATA1, A. AD DATA2 11
118 ı
113 14
JC-20 BOARD (1/6) ı
CN8001 (4/8) 116
OVERALL2
J
SEE PAGE 3-3 XPD AD1,
XPD AD2,
IC8003 45 XPD DA1,
XCH1 HPF, XCH2 HPF, XCH3 HPF, XCH4 HPF 36 XPD DA2
ı ı
AUDIO 47
DSP 39
SOA, SOB, 16
55 2 (SEE PAGE 4-64) ı 43 DEM0, DEM1
SIC, SID A HD0 – A HD7 52
57 3 20 ı 42
56 119 23 59
58 120 ı 48
25
JC-20 BOARD (1/6)
IC8009 22 VSP SI, XVSP SCK, VSP SO 75 CN8001 (3/7)
(1/2) ı
24
76 M OVERALL2
A HA0 AUDIO 78 SEE PAGE 3-4
15 71 DSP
CONTROL
82 70 JC-20 BOARD (1/6)
9 68 (SEE PAGE 4-65) 83 VFD HD, VFD VD, VFD OE CN8001 (2/7)
10 A XHDWR, A XHDRD, A XHDCS ı
67 K
70 84 69 OVERALL2
14 SEE PAGE 3-3
A. HRDY
13 72
26 40 9 XRST
IC8001 IC8000
CLOCK 7 8
99 IC8002
OSC
CLOCK (SEE PAGE 4-63) X8001
(SEE PAGE 4-63) X8000 4.608MHz
24.576MHz
05
3-15 3-16
DSR-50/50P
3-9. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM 9
LT-32 BOARD D301 – 310
VD-28 BOARD (5/5) FR-157 BOARD (2/2) (SEE PAGE 4-126) (BACK LIGHT)
LCD902
CN701 CN502 (CHARACTOR DISPLAY)
VD-28 BOARD (1/5)
KP-8 BOARD XRESET 29 RESET 29 S537
(SEE PAGE 4-70) OVERALL1 10 XRESET 27 27
SEE PAGE 3-2 RESET CN301
1 5
38
CN705
DIAL A DIAL A POWER SW S526 8 – 15 1 – 7, 16 – 50 1 5
S601 1 1 67 14 30 30 CN503
DIAL B DIAL B POWER CN501
LCD 3 3 68
BOTTOM LED VCC, TOP LED VCC
EXEC SW EXEC SW
BRIGHT 5 5 71
LCD STB
23 13 13 9 21 COM 1 – 4
CN601 DATA TO HI
5 5 8 ı
24
IC707
14 LANC 12 2 33 SEG 9 – 50
J701 DATA FROM HI
DRIVER 10 1 7 7 2 1 ı
11 IC501 74
CONTROL (SEE PAGE 4-97)
4 8 LCD DRIVER,
4
MATRIX KEY
IC502 25 KS 1 – 8 KEY MATRIX
W/R CONTROL
Q702 24 9 9 ı S515, 516, S518 – 525,
B+ (SEE PAGE 4-123)
B+ SW 32 S527 – 536, S538
SCK (SEE PAGE 4-123)
3 3 7 2 KEY 1 – 4
12 56 15
OE
KEY REQ
15 11 ı ,
5
21 100 1 1 6
30
D502 – 512
1 26
7 8 IC504 Q502 – 512
IC706 6 28
LED DRIVE
IC505
EEPROM
4 44 SERIAL/
LED STB PARALLEL
2 46 19 11 11 CONVERTER
3 45
(SEE PAGE 4-97) (SEE PAGE 4-123)
IC709 Q513 – 515
LED DRIVE
(3/3)
CN703 (2/2)
OSD SO HI
JC-20 BOARD (1/6) 5 HI CONTROL
CN6001 (1/2) OSD SCK HI RV401
3
OVERALL2
H XCS OSD HI
43 DSP SCK, CH-1
1 IC402
SEE PAGE 3-3 OSD SW DSP SI (TO DSP)
2 10 (SEE PAGE 4-98) RV402
DSP SO (FROM DSP), 28 A/D
28 9 1 CH-2
DSP CS CONVERTER IC403
26 26 12 2 RV403
23 23 15 3 BUFFER
CN702 IC710 CH-3
VTR START/STOP 20 20 14 4
12 1 BUFFER 20 (SEE PAGE 4-125) RV404
(SEE PAGE 4-125)
(SEE PAGE 4-98) CH-4
CN026 (4/4) IC708
REC/TALLY 98 10
15 3 BUFFER
CAMERA 99
(SEE PAGE 4-98)
B+ IC404
BATTERY INDICATION Q706
13 2 CLOCK
B+ SW
(SEE PAGE 4-125)
S702 97 X401
EJ-28 BOARD DV 13.5MHz
(SEE PAGE 4-70) 72
DVCAM
S101
JC-20 BOARD DI-73 BOARD (3/3)
CN101 CN704 (6/6)
EJECT EJECT SW EJECT SW (SEE PAGE 4-43, 45)
1 1 17
CN606 DSP SCK, CN7002 DSP SCK,
(2/2) (2/2) CN9500 (5/5)
DSPSO, DSPSO,
23 DSP SI, 8 82 DSP SI, 82 85
DSP CS 10 DSP CS VR/AD SCK, VR/AD SO, VR/AD SI, VR/AD CS
21 84 84 86
JC-20 BOARD (3/6) CN332 (4/4)
19 12 83 83 87 IC8009
CN1101 (4/4) XI/O SYNC HI
3 7 17 14 81 81 33
OVERALL5 E 2
XI/O SYNC VFD
64 IC8006
(2/2)
SEE PAGE 3-9 IC8004
40 41
TC IN TC IN TC IN TC IN INPUT HYST AUDIO DSP
13 18 87 87 3 4 1 COMPARATOR 4 80
AMP
J102 (2/2) X701 (SEE PAGE 4-67)
CN607 (SEE PAGE 4-67)
20MHz IC8007 (SEE PAGE 4-65)
TC IN 1 TC IN 1 TC IN IC8008
(EXT) 2 2 4 3
IC8005 BUFFER 79 61 78
TC OUT 4 TC OUT 4 TC OUT TC OUT TC OUT TC OUT TC OUT 7 15 (SEE PAGE 4-68)
15 16 88 88 OUTPUT 6 1
(INT) 5 5 1 AMP
CN8001
(SEE PAGE 4-67) 5
J103 (2/2) CN101 (7/7) 4 7
1
6
9 10 11
JK-169 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-67) 5 IC8011
IC8010
(4/4) (SEE PAGE 4-68)
BUFFER
(SEE PAGE 4-131)
05
3-17 3-18
DSR-50/50P
3-10. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM 1
CN905
VD-28 BOARD (1/2) F911 UNREG 5 CM-59 BOARD
6 CN100
F905 CM REG 5V 3
A POWER5
4 SEE PAGE 3-27
F904
CN703 JC-20 BOARD
IC704 BACK UP +3V CN6001
F912
3
REG,
6 30 B POWER3
D716 RESET L701 SEE PAGE 3-23
Q708 EVR +3V 18
F903 7 8
B+ SW 19
(SEE PAGE 4-97)
D717 SW +6V 21 FR-157 BOARD
F906 22 CN502
L702 SW +3V 16
C POWER6
IC706
F902 L703 17 SEE PAGE 3-29
CN026 EEPROM
SW –6V 24
CAMERA F913 (SEE PAGE 4-97) 25
CN902 CN701
CAMERA UNREG +12V F901 UNREG
25 1
GND Q933 1 VD-28
26 2 SWITCHING BOARD (2/2)
DIG +5V
2 POWER2
SEE PAGE 3-21
JK-169 BOARD (1/2) SW +5.5V
3
(SEE PAGE 4-132) CN102 CN903 39
BREAKER OUT 14
1 1
Q929
SWITCHING CN333
CB101 1 UNREG
3
(BREAKER)
PD-125 BOARD
BREAKER IN Q912 LCD 4.6V CN8002, CN8001
2 2 SWITCHING D915
ORG 12V
11 D
35 40 13 POWER5
44 25 Q921 LCD +3.0V SEE PAGE 3-27
12
CN801 CN706 IC705 SWITCH L933
CN331
VL BATT 3V +3.6V 34 Q910
1 1 3 2
BT801 REG ON/OFF SW
30
LITHIUM VL BATT GND (SEE PAGE 4-97)
45
BATTERY 2 2 CN604
19
IC713 IC712 IC902 Q927 SW +48V 1 JK-169
SWITCHING
VL-26 BOARD BATT DET 3 +5V 2 DC 2 BOARD (2/2)
(SEE PAGE 4-70) REG CONTROL
(SEE PAGE 4-97) SW +6V 4 CN105
(SEE PAGE 4-97) (SEE PAGE 4-103) 5 E POWER6
L935 SW –6V 6 SEE PAGE 3-29
CN900 41
7
BATTRY 12V F900 22
BT901
+ 1 Q926
IC901
SWITCHING D915 L928
BATTERY CN601
3 –5V 1
TERMINAL GND REG SW +6V 5
– 2 27
(SEE PAGE 4-102) 6
HP-117 BOARD
CN301
SW –6V 7
F POWER4
46
CN901 16 8 SEE PAGE 3-25
Q914
1 BATTRY 12V SWITCHING D905 L920 VIDEO –5V VD-28
2 4 BOARD (2/2)
SW –5.5V POWER2
3 SELECTED 12V Q900, 901 Q903, 905
5 SEE PAGE 3-21
46
4 B+ SW B+ SW
16 JK-169
5 GND D909 D908 Q916 CN603
SWITCHING BOARD (2/2)
CN9901 6 L921 SW +3V 17
1 CN104
DC IN 12V 27 G POWER6
Q906, 913, 918, 923, 924 SEE PAGE 3-29
Q930, 931, 940 – 943
F910 SW +3V
VOLTAGE CONTROL 35 39 VD-28
6 BOARD (2/2)
44 14
Q928 POWER2
D910 – 914 SWITCING
SEE PAGE 3-21
CN904
Q919, 925 EVR +3V
SWITCH 2
L919 VIDEO –5V
6
40 L922 SW +3V JC-20 BOARD
4
27 25 SW +6V CN1100
Q915 AUDIO –5V
1 H
SWITCHING 9 POWER3
IC900 F915 VIDEO +5V SEE PAGE 3-23
3
DC AUDIO +5V
CONTROL 7
(SEE PAGE 4-101)
IC909 43 VD-28
F914 VIDEO +5V BOARD (2/2)
2 +5V 3 13
Q917 7
REG SWITCHING POWER2
(SEE PAGE 4-100) SEE PAGE 3-21
Q934, 937
B+ SW
41
22
Q911
SWITCHING D901
Q922
IC709
B+ SW
HI CONTROL
Q909 Q920 Q907, 908
30 29 (SEE PAGE 4-98)
ON/OFF SW SWITCH SWITCH
55
45
19
11
Q935, 936
SWITCH
05
3-19 3-20
DSR-50/50P
3-11. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM 2
VD-28 BOARD (2/2)
IC707 IC021 IC035 IC022 IC042 IC012 IC037 IC019
LANC SC SWITCH SC PHASE HD SHIFT HD PHASE IC016 HD PHASE HD SHIFT
IC001
DRIVER (SEE PAGE 4-76) ADJ FINE ADJ 90˚ PHASE GEN. CLOCK 90˚ SHIFT FINE ADJ
(SEE PAGE 4-97) (SEE PAGE 4-78) (SEE PAGE 4-76) (SEE PAGE 4-78) (SEE PAGE 4-75, 76) (SEE PAGE 4-78) (SEE PAGE 4-76) IC002
IC007
L706 IC057
IC041 IC025 IC009
UNREG IC058
1 1 +9V 6 VIDEO +9V IC028 IC013
REG 3 DSR-50 IC059
(SEE PAGE 4-80) IC030 IC017
IC708 IC332 IC333 IC040 IC027 IC024 IC031 IC060 IC014 IC004 IC062
2 IC033 IC061
BUFFER U V/C IC334 EX OR SYNC BUFFER SC PHASE SC TIMING IC008 HD SHIFT IC063 D/A
(SEE PAGE 4-98) CONTROL AND GATE (SEE PAGE 4-78) GEN. (SEE PAGE 4-76) ADJ COMPARATOR DELAY SC PROC COURSE ADJ VR ADJ CONVERTER
(SEE PAGE 4-87) (SEE PAGE 4-88) (SEE PAGE 4-76) (SEE PAGE 4-77) (SEE PAGE 4-75) (SEE PAGE 4-79) (SEE PAGE 4-75) (SEE PAGE 4-77) (SEE PAGE 4-75, 76) (SEE PAGE 4-79, 80)
L005
DIG +5V
2 DIG +5V
IC601
IC602 IC603 IC604 IC605
AUDIO IC003
MIX AMP MIX AMP AMP SWITCH IC005 IC049
MONITOR
SELECTOR (SEE PAGE 4-95) (SEE PAGE 4-95) (SEE PAGE 4-96) CONTROL NOR SYNC SYNC
(SEE PAGE 4-95) (SEE PAGE 4-96) (SEE PAGE 4-75) GEN. SEP
(SEE PAGE 4-80) (SEE PAGE 4-75)
IC607
SW +5.5V
3 2 +5V 3 +5V IC018 IC034 IC050
REG
(SEE PAGE 4-96) IC020 IC039 IC051
IC023 IC044 IC052
VD-28 IC606
BOARD (1/2) SW –5.5V IC026 IC046 IC054
5 3 –5V 1 –5V
POWER1 REG IC029 IC047 IC055
SEE PAGE 3-20 (SEE PAGE 4-96)
IC701 IC702 IC710 IC335 IC043 IC032 IC048 IC056
BUFFER BUFFER BUFFER IC336 0˚/180˚ TIMING DELAY
(SEE PAGE 4-97) (SEE PAGE 4-97) (SEE PAGE 4-98) LALT PULSE STRECH
(SEE PAGE 4-88) (SEE PAGE 4-78) (SEE PAGE 4-76, 77, 78, 79, 80)
IC404
SW +3V IC405
6 SW +3V
IC414 IC419 IC411
IC410 IC427
IC412 IC413 IC418 IC422 IC423 IC425 IC426 IC424 IC402 IC415 IC420
Y BLANKING
SWITCH C MONITOR Y OUT R-Y OUT VIDEO OUT C OUT B-Y OUT IC403 IC416 IC421 IC428
SET UP
ADD (SEE PAGE 4-93) ENCODE DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER VC DELAY AMP INVERT AMP VC AMP
(SEE PAGE 4-91) (SEE PAGE 4-93) (SEE PAGE 4-93) (SEE PAGE 4-92) (SEE PAGE 4-92) (SEE PAGE 4-94) (SEE PAGE 4-94) (SEE PAGE 4-92) (SEE PAGE 4-89) (SEE PAGE 4-91) (SEE PAGE 4-92, 94) (SEE PAGE 4-90, 93, 94)
VIDEO +5V
7 VIDEO +5V
VIDEO –5V
4 VIDEO –5V
IC107 IC125 IC116 IC112 IC128 IC120 IC117 IC122 IC133 IC101 IC103 IC105 IC110 IC132
IC126 IC115 VC AMP IC106 IC129 IC121 IC118 VC AMP AMP IC102 IC104 IC108 IC113 SWITCH
SYNC SELECT AMP (SEE PAGE 4-85) SYNC SEP. AMP VC DELAY SWITCH (SEE PAGE 4-86) (SEE PAGE 4-83) SELECT SWITCH (SEE PAGE 4-82)
(SEE PAGE 4-84, 86) (SEE PAGE 4-84, 86) (SEE PAGE 4-83, 84) (SEE PAGE 4-86) (SEE PAGE 4-86) (SEE PAGE 4-85) (SEE PAGE 4-81, 83, 84)
L121 L122 L106 L123 L124 L107 L126
DSR-50P
IC127
IC124 IC119 IC109 IC134 IC131
C IC130 Y/C AMP AMP OSC
DECODE SYNC SEP SEP. (SEE PAGE 4-81) (SEE PAGE 4-82) (SEE PAGE 4-81)
(SEE PAGE 4-81) (SEE PAGE 4-82) (SEE PAGE 4-82)
L112 L108 L110 L111
Q151, 152 Q148, 150
05
3-21 3-22
DSR-50/50P
3-12. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM 3
JC-20 BOARD
IC1101 IC1103 IC1105 IC1107 IC1108 IC1000 IC1111
IC1102 IC1104 IC1106 IC1108 IC1109 IC1001 IC1112
REF DC REF DC A/D IC1002
GEN. GEN. CONVERTER
(SEE PAGE 4-21) (SEE PAGE 4-21) (SEE PAGE 4-21, 22) BUFFER
(SEE PAGE 4-20)
L1108
CN1100 IC1113 L1110
SW +6V
1 1 3 +5V
VOL
CONT. 6
(SEE PAGE 4-45) IC2208 IC2212
2 IC2209 IC2213
IC2204 IC3300 IC3303 IC6004 IC2202 IC3301 IC2210 IC2214
CLOCK VFD CHARACTOR INVERTER IC2203 IC3302 IC2211 IC2215
VIDEO +5V
GEN. (SEE PAGE 4-27) GEN. (SEE PAGE 4-40) AFH CLP. BUFFER TIMING GEN.,
(SEE PAGE4-26) (SEE PAGE 4-28) (SEE PAGE 4-25) (SEE PAGE 4-28) CHROMA MIX
(SEE PAGE 4-23, 24)
IC2200 L3303
1 REG 3 AFC 3V
L2205
(SEE PAGE 4-25)
CN8001
VIDEO +5V VIDEO +5V 51
3
52
Q1131, 1132 J 3V 49
50
L5001 L4402
VD-28 BOARD IC1100
(1/2) SW +3V
CN904 H 4 6 1.9V 4
REG
POWER1 (SEE PAGE 4-46) L4401
SEE PAGE 3-20
IC6003 IC5008 IC5006 IC5003 IC5007 IC5002 IC4400 IC4401 IC4402
SWITCH AND EEPROM MECHANISM INVERTER D/A SFD TFD LIP DI-73 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-40) (SEE PAGE 4-38) (SEE PAGE 4-38) CONTROL (SEE PAGE 4-35) CONVERTER (SEE PAGE 4-29) (SEE PAGE 4-31) (SEE PAGE 4-33)
(SEE PAGE 4-37) (SEE PAGE 4-35)
I CN9500
UNSW +3V POWER4
SEE PAGE 3-25
EVR +3V
2
Q5001, 5002 IC5001
3 REG 1
(SEE PAGE 4-35)
VIDEO –5V VIDEO –5V 53
6
54
VIDEO +5V A +5V 99
7 101
103
AUDIO –5V A –5V 95
9
VD-28 BOARD 97
(1/2) IC6001
CN6001
CN703 BACK UP +3V MODE 5V
B 1 13
POWER1 CONTROL
14
SEE PAGE 3-20 (SEE PAGE 4-40)
3V 15
16
1.9V 17
18
RF 6V 21
22
CN4401
05
RP-234 BOARD
IC101 IC301 IC201
TRW TRX TRF
(SEE PAGE 4-14) (SEE PAGE 4-11) (SEE PAGE 4-13)
CN203
5V 13
+5V
14
3V 15
+3V 16
1.9V 17
+1.9V
18
IC102
RF 6V 21
1 REG 3
22
(SEE PAGE 4-14)
3-23 3-24
DSR-50/50P
3-13. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM 4
DI-73 BOARD
IC9500 IC9509
IC9001
IC9503 IC9512
IC9506 IC9007
SYNC IC9010
SHIFTER AMP IC9000
IC9017
(SEE PAGE 4-55, 56, 57, 58) (SEE PAGE 4-51, 52) VIDEO
1 REG 3 D/A
(SEE PAGE 4-51) CONVERTER
L9500 (SEE PAGE 4-51)
CN9500
51 VIDEO +5V
VIDEO +5V
52
IC9510 IC9511
IC9006 IC9004 IC9009 IC9013 IC9501 IC9505 IC9513 IC9516
IC9018 IC9005 IC9011 IC9014 IC9502 IC9507 IC9514 IC9517
IC9518
IC9019 IC9008 IC9012 IC9015 IC9504 IC9508 IC9515
CB/CR FIFO SYNC Y/C IC9519
IC9016
CONTROL MEMORY SHIFTER SELECT SWITCH
(SEE PAGE 4-52) (SEE PAGE 4-53, 54) (SEE PAGE 4-55, 56) (SEE PAGE 4-57, 58) (SEE PAGE 4-57)
49 J 3V
50 J +3V
IC7016 IC8000 IC8002
IC8011 IC8006 IC7020 IC8003 IC8009 IC8201
JC7201 IC7018 IC8001
IC8008 HYST IC7021 AUDIO AUDIO CRIP
D/A CLOCK
COMPARATOR DSP DSP (SEE PAGE 4-66)
BUFFER MIX/LPF CONVERTER (SEE PAGE 4-63)
JC-20 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-67, 68) (SEE PAGE 4-64) (SEE PAGE 4-65)
(SEE PAGE 4-68) (SEE PAGE 4-62) (SEE PAGE 4-61)
CN8001 I
POWER3
SEE PAGE 3-24 L8202 L8201
L8203
+2.8V
53 VIDEO –5V
AUDIO –5V
54
IC7004 IC7006 IC7000 IC7002
IC8004 IC8005 IC8007 IC7008 IC7010 IC7013
IC7005 IC7007 IC7001 IC7003
INPUT OUTPUT IC8010 IC7009 IC7011 IC7014
AUDIO H. P. F
AMP AMP SWITCH AMP SELECT (SEE PAGE 4-59)
(SEE PAGE 4-67) (SEE PAGE 4-67) (SEE PAGE 4-67, 68) (SEE PAGE 4-60) (SEE PAGE 4-59, 60)
99
A +5V
101 A +5V
103
95 A –5V
A –5V
97
HP-117 BOARD
IC301
HP
AMP
(SEE PAGE 4-145)
CN301 IC302
5 SW +6V
1 +5V 5 B+
6
SHUTDOWN
REG
(SEE PAGE 4-146)
2
Q301
STB
VD-28 BOARD
(1/2)
CN601 F J301
IC304
POWER1 PHONES
SEE PAGE 3-20 2 +5V 3 B+
REG
(SEE PAGE 4-145)
IC303
7 SW –6V
3 –5V 1
8 REG
(SEE PAGE 4-145)
IC305
AMP
(SEE PAGE 4-145)
05
3-25 3-26
DSR-50/50P
3-14. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM 5
CM-59 BOARD
IC102 IC300 IC400 IC500
CN500
BUFFER LOADING CAPSTAN DRUM/C SENSOR VCC M901
(SEE PAGE 4-105) MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR 9 M DRUM
DRIVE DRIVE DRIVE MOTOR
(SEE PAGE 4-109) (SEE PAGE 4-110) (SEE PAGE 4-107)
CN100
IC101 CN400
FG VCC M903
3 CM REG 5V
4
5 +3V 4 18 M CAPSTAN
1 REG MOTOR
(SEE PAGE 4-105)
CN200 CN2 CN3
VD-28 BOARD F100 5V 10 10 5V MR VCC, HE VCC 9 M904
(1/2) M
11 11 18 REEL
CN905 A MOTOR
POWER1
SEE PAGE 3-20
IC202 IC501 IC200
REEL FG DRUM/C REEL IC4
AMP MOTOR MOTOR
(SEE PAGE 4-105) DRIVER DRIVE IC5
(SEE PAGE 4-108) (SEE PAGE 4-106) T/S
REEL FG
(SEE PAGE 4-118)
5 UNREG CAPSTAN
6
CN201 CN1
Q100
18 SWITCHING 5V 10 10 5V
11 11
46
20 7 IC1 IC2
22 ELETEN D1
6.25V DC IC3
24 ERROR AMP TAPE
(SEE PAGE 4-117) (SEE PAGE 4-117, 118) LED
Q101
8 SWITCHING
44
12
IC100
DRUM
MD-76 BOARD
DC
CONTROL
(SEE PAGE 4-105)
Q103
SWITCHING
40
REEL
Q102
SWITCHING
39
29
PD-125 BOARD
IC8201 IC8200 IC8001 IC8202
LCD EVR RGB VCO
TIMING (SEE PAGE 4-141) DRIVER (SEE PAGE 4-141)
GENERATOR (SEE PAGE 4-140)
(SEE PAGE 4-141)
CN8001
LCD 3.0V
12
Q8000, 8007
LCD901
CN8200
2.5INCH
VD-28 BOARD Q8001, 8003 COLOR
ORG 12V VVDD, HVDD 16
(1/2) 13 LCD UNIT
18
CN331, CN333 D
POWER1
SEE PAGE 3-20
LCD 4.6V Q8101, 8102
11
CN8002 INVERTER ND901
UNREG BLOCK BACK LIGHT
3
Q8100 D8100
05
3-27 3-28
DSR-50/50P
3-15. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM 6
FR-157 BOARD LT-32 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-126)
BOTTOM D306 – 310
Q513 CN503 LED CN301
VCC (+6V)
1 5
CN502 LED
24 SW –6V COM (–6V)
3 3
25
Q514 TOP LED
21 SW +6V VCC (+6V)
5 1
22
IC403 IC402 IC404 D301 – 305
BUFFER A/D CLOCK
(SEE PAGE 4-125) CONVERTER (SEE PAGE 4-125) D505 – 517
(SEE PAGE 4-125)
VD-28 BOARD
IC401
(1/2)
CN701 C 3 REG 1
(SEE PAGE 4-125)
POWER1
SEE PAGE 3-20
16 SW +3V
17
IC501
IC502 IC504 IC505
LCD DRIVE,
MAT KEY SWITCH SERIAL/PARALLEL
CONTROL (SEE PAGE 4-123) CONVERTER
(SEE PAGE 4-123) (SEE PAGE 4-123)
18 EVR +3V
19
JK-169 BOARD (2/2) IC101
IC102
IC103
IC105 IC104 IC107
PARALLEL/
SWITCH INVERTER SERIAL AND
(SEE PAGE 4-132) (SEE PAGE 4-132) CONVERTER GATE
(SEE PAGE 4-132) (SEE PAGE 4-135)
VD-28 BOARD
CN104
(1/2)
CN603 17 SW +3V
G 27 SW +3V
POWER1
SEE PAGE 3-20 IC110
IC111
IC113
CN105 IC109
1 SW +48V BUFFER IC114
SW +48V
2 (SEE PAGE 4-133) BUFFER
(SEE PAGE 4-134, 135, 136)
VD-28 BOARD
IC108
(1/2) 6 SW –6V
CN604 E 7
3 REG 1 SW –6V
POWER1 (SEE PAGE 4-133)
SEE PAGE 3-20
IC112
4 SW +6V
2 REG 3 SW +6V
5
(SEE PAGE 4-133)
IC115 Q109, 110
2 REG 3 J106
(SEE PAGE 4-131) REMOTE
J107
CONTROL S
05
3-29 3-30 E
DSR-50/50P
SECTION 4
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS.
(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
For printed wiring boards: Measuring conditions voltege and waveform:
• b : Pattern from the side which enables seeing. • Voltages and waveforms are measured between the mea-
(The other layers’ pattern are not indicated) surement points and graound when color bar signal
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms. input.They are reference values and reference waveforms.*
• Through hole is omitted. (VOM of DC 10 M Ω input impedance is used)
• There are a few cases that the part printed on diagram isn’t • Voltage values change depending upon input impedance
mounted in this model. of VOM used.
• Chip parts. * Indicated by the color red.
Transistor Diode Note: Note:
C 6 5 4 4 5 6 4 5 1 2 3 3 3 The components identi- Les composants identifiés par
fied by mark 0 or dotted une marque 0 sont critiques
line with mark 0 are criti- pour la sécurité.
B E 1 2 3 3 2 1 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 cal for safety. Ne les remplacer que par une
Replace only with part piéce por tant le numéro
number specified. spécifié.
For schematic Diagram:
• All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µµF
50V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and When indicating parts by reference
tantalums. number, please include the board
• Chip resistors are 1/10 W unless otherwise noted. name.
kΩ : 1000Ω, MΩ : 1000kΩ.
• Caution when replacing chip parts.
New parts must be attached after removal of chip.
Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor,
because it is damaged by the heat.
• Some chip part will be indicated as follows.
Example C 541 L 452
22U 10UH
TA A 2520
Kinds of Temperature External
capacitor characteristics dimensions (mm)
• Constants of resistors, capasitors, ICs and etc with XX indi-
cate that they are not used. In such cases, the unused cir-
cuits may be indicated.
• Parts with ★ differ according to the model/destination. Re-
fer to the mount table for each function.
• All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve
B, unless otherwise noted.
• Signal name
XEDIT → EDIT PB/XREC → PB/REC
• 2 : nonflammable resistor.
• 1 : fusible resistor.
• C : panel designation.
• A : B+ Line.*
• B : B– Line.*
• J : IN/OUT direction of B line (+, –).*
• C : adjustment for repair.*
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms.*
4-1
http://getMANUAL.com
DSR-50/50P
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
S601
LCD BRIGHT KP-8 BOARD LT-32
CN501 50P
A BOARD 15A 15B 15C M13 1
VC-58 HARNESS CONTINUED ON
PAGE 4-5
1
S535 S534
S530 15F 15G 15E 15D 2
END AUDIO
CN301 5P CN503 5P JV-58 HARNESS
SEARCH DUP DUB
14A 14B 14C 12C 3 CONTINUED ON 2
BOTTOM LED VCC (+6V) 5 1 BOTTOM LED VCC (+6V) PAGE 4-5
14F 14G 14E 14D 4
NC 4 2 NC
FVJ-12 13A 13B 13C C1 5 VJ-106 HARNESS CONTINUED ON
LED COM (-6V) 3
FLAT CABLE 3 LED COM (-6V) S529 S533 3
F FWD REC 13F 13G 13A 13D 6 PAGE 4-5
NC 2 4 NC
5P
12A,D,G 12E F 12B 7
EXEC_SW
CN026 26P TOP LED VCC (+6V) 1 5 TOP LED VCC (+6V)
DIAL_B
DIAL_A
CN601
COM1 8
B GND 26
GND
GND
1
2
4
5
5
6
1
2
6
7
9
CAMERA UNREG +12V 25 CN902 2P COM2 9
S528 S532
8P
8P
SW +3V
GND
CM REG 5V
CM REG 5V
UNREG
UNREG
GND
GND
CH1 OUT
GND(CH1 OUT)
CH2 OUT
GND(CH2 OUT)
CH3 OUT
GND(CH3 OUT)
CH4 OUT
GND(CH4 OUT)
SW +6V
EVR +3V
VIDEO +5V
SW +3V
GND
VIDEO -5V
AUDIO +5V
AUDIO GND
AUDIO -5V
9P
NC 24 2 GND PLAY PAUSE COM3 10
5
4
3
1
COM4 11
CN905
CN605
CN904
NC 23 1 CAMERA UNREG +12V
NC(COLOR FRAMING) 22 CN401 2P KP-52 COM4 12
HARNESS COM3 13
NC 21 2 RETURN VIDEO (GND)
S527 S531
COM2 14
4
3
1
AUDIO MON/VTR SAVE 20 1 RETURN VIDEO (X) REW STOP
RETURN VIDEO(GND) 19 CN702 3P FR-157 BOARD COM1 15
5P
EXEC_SW
GND
DIAL_B
GND
DIAL_A
RETURN VIDEO(X) 18 3 REC/TALLY 1F 1G 1E 1D 16
CN705
NC(GND) 17 2 BATTERY INDICATION 1A 1B 1C DVCAM 17
CN026 CN703 30P
26P CN701 30P CN502 30P 2F 2G 2E 2D 18
NC 16 1 VTR START/STOP S537 XCS_OSD_HI 1
CAMERA KEY REQ 1 1 KEY REQ
5P RESET 2A 2B 2C CL1.H 19
REC/TALLY 15 CN602 OSD_SW 2
GND 2 2 GND
3F 3G 3E 3D 20
NC 14 5 AUDIO MON/VTR SAVE
SCK 3 3 SCK
3F 3G 3E 3D 21
PD-125 BOARD OSD_SCK_HI 3
BATTERY INDICATION 13 4 MIC IN (Y-GND) CN8200 24P GND 4
GND 4 4 GND
VTR START/STOP 12 3 MIC IN (Y) 4F 4G 4E 4D 22 TESTR 1 OSD_SO_HI 5
DATA TO HI 5 5 DATA TO HI S518 S516 S519
MIC IN(GND) 11 2 MIC IN (X-GND) S538 S515 4A 4B 4 M6 23 LCD902
RGT 2
CHARACTER UVIC_GATE 6
GND 6 6 GND COUNTER METER LIGHT INDEX KEY INH
MIC IN(Y) 10 1 MIC IN (X) 5F 5G 5E 5D 24 DISPLAY
VB 3
D MIC IN(X) 9 CN101 8P
DATA FROM HI 7 7 DATA FROM HI
5A 5B 5C CL2.M.S 25 VR 4
UVIC_SWIN
UVIC_BUSY
7
8 GND 8
GND 8
B-Y IN(GND) 8 8 B-Y IN (GND) 6F 6G 6E 6D 26 VG 5 XCS_UVIC 9
_W/R 9 9 _W/R
B-Y IN 7 7 B-Y IN 6A 6B 6C CL3.F 27 PSIG 6 GND 10
GND 10 10 GND
R-Y IN(GND) 6 6 R-Y IN (GND) 7F 7G 7E 7D 28 HCK1 7 MO_SI 11
LED STB 11 11 LED STB
R-Y IN 5 5 R-Y IN 7A 7B 7C 29 HCK2 8 GND 12
GND 12 12 GND RV402 RV404
Y IN 4 4 Y IN (GND) 8F 8G 8E 8D 30 CR 9
FVJ-7 FLAT CABLE
MO_SO 13
LCD STB 13 13 LCD STB
Y IN(GND) 3 3 Y IN 8A 8B 8C 31 SOUT 10
J701 S702 GND 14
GND 14 14 GND RV402,S521 RV404,S523 LCD901
CONTROL DVCAM DV S521 S523 M9 M8 M10 M11 32
VIDEO IN(GND) 2 2 VIDEO IN (GND) REF 11 2.5INCH
CH-2 CH-4 MO_SCK 15 FVJ-14 FLAT CABLE CONTINUED ON
E VIDEO IN 1 1 VIDEO IN
OE 15
16
15
16
OE
SW +3V
M3 M2 M1 M7 33 HST 12
COLOR LCD
UNIT GND 16 PAGE 4-5
4
SW +3V M5 M4 9B 9C 34 WIDE 13 XSYS_RST 17
SW +3V 17 17 SW +3V
10F 10G 10E 10D 35 CS 14 GND 18
EVR +3V 18 18 EVR +3V
12P CN601 12P 10A 10B 10C 9ADEG 36 VSS 15
CN301 RV401 RV403 XCS_MO 19
EVR +3V 19 19 EVR +3V
HP-117 GND 12 12 GND
DSP_CS 20 20 DSP_CS
11F 11G 11E 11D 37 VVDD 16 GND 20
11A 11B 11C MIN 38
BOARD VTR RET AUDIO GND 11 11 VTR RET AUDIO GND
SW +6V 21 21 SW +6V
RV401,S520
CH-1
S520
RV403,S522
CH-3
S522
LM5 LM6 LM7 LM8 39
VSS 17 HI_SI 21
VTR RET AUDIO 10 10 VTR RET AUDIO HVDD 18 GND 22
HP-135 HARNESS
SW +6V 22 22 SW +6V
LM4 LM3 LM2 LM1 40
F NC 9
8
9
8
NC
SW -6V
DSP_SO (FROM DSP) 23 23 DSP_SO (FROM DSP)
LM12 LM11 LM10 LM9 41
DWN 19
EN 20
HI_SO 23
RV301 SW -6V GND 24
SW -6V 24 24 SW -6V
PHONE 7 7 SW -6V LM13 12 14 15 16 42 VCK 21
SW -6V HI_SCK 25
LEVEL SW -6V 25 25 SW -6V
6 6 SW +6V 19A 19B 19C PM 43 VST 22
SW +6V GND 26
DSP_SI (TO DSP) 26 26 DSP_SI (TO DSP)
S524 S525 19F 19G 19E 19D 44
J301 SW +6V 5 5 SW +6V COM 23 MO_XWAKEUP 27
RESET 27 27 RESET S526 S536
PHONES 4 4 HP R GND S524,S525 18A 18B 18C AM 45 TESTL 24
HP R GND POWER FINE XSLEEP 28
DSP_SCK 28 28 DSP_SCK
DISPLAY 18F 18G 18E 18D 46
HP R 3 3 HP R XIC_RST 29
RESET 29 29 RESET
2 2 HP L GND 17A 17B 17C CL4 47
HP L GND BACK_UP_+3V 30
POWER SW 30 30 POWER SW
1 1 HP L 17F 17G 17E 17D 48
HP L
G 16A 16B 16C X 49
CN8201 5P INVERTER CN606 30P
16F 16G 16E 16D 50
1
2
VG
COM
BLOCK ND901
AU X1 IN
AU Y1 IN
1
2
CN102 30P BACK LIGHT
CN103 30P CN504 10P
3 GND BACK GND 3
Y OUT 30 30 Y OUT
CN101 2P
VG 10 FJV-3 4 PSIG LIGHT AU X2 IN 4
CN704 2P
GND 29 29 GND
EJECT SW 1 1 EJECT SW
EJ-28 COM 9 FLAT CABLE
5 VCO_CENT
DRIVER AU Y2 IN 5
GND 28 28 GND EV-70 HARNESS BOARD GND 8
GND 2 2 GND GND 6
R-Y OUT 27 27 R-Y OUT PSIG 7
AU X3 IN 7
GND 26 26 GND CN505 5P VCO_CENT 6
H GND 25 25 GND S101 5 VG VCO_CENT 5
AU Y3 IN 8
EJECT GND 9
B-Y OUT 24 24 B-Y OUT 4 COM PSIG 4
JIG PIN AU X4 IN 10
DATA_FROM_HI
13P
XCS_LCD_DAC
GND 23 23 GND 3 GND GND 3
4P
(FOR CHECK)
ORG_15.5V
LCD_DD_ON
AU Y4 IN 11
PANEL_CR
PANEL_CB
LCD_3.0V
LCD_4.6V
GND 22 22 GND 2 PSIG COM 2
ORG_12V
PANEL_Y
VD_SCK
CN8001
CN8002
GND 12
UNREG
VIDEO MON OUT 21 21 VIDEO MON OUT 1 VCO_CENT VG 1
GND
XHD
XVD
GND
PWM
TC IN 13
GND 20 20 GND
GND 14
GND 19 19 GND
13
12
11
10
6
5
4
3
4
3
1
TC OUT 15 FVJ-13 FLAT CABLE CONTINUED ON 5
FVJ-7 FLAT CABLE
I S-C OUT 18 18 S-C OUT
LC-111 HARNESS GND 16 PAGE 4-5
HARNESS
RM-129
GND 17 17 GND
DSP CS 17
VD-28 BOARD
13
12
11
10
6
5
4
1
GND 16 16 GND
GND 18
S-Y OUT 15 15 S-Y OUT
ORG_12V
LCD_3.0V
LCD_4.6V
XHD
XVD
LCD_DD_ON
GND
XCS_LCD_DAC
VD_SCK
13P
PANEL_CB
PANEL_CR
PANEL_Y
DATA_FROM_HI
DSP SI 19
GND 14 14 GND
GND 20
CN331
GND 13 13 GND
4
3
1
DSP SO 21
VIDEO OUT 12 12 VIDEO OUT
GND
UNREG
PWM
ORG_15.5V
4P
GND 22
GND 11 11 GND
DSP SCK 23
CN333
GND 10 10 GND
J SC DET 9 9 SC DET
NC 24
NC 25
GND 8 8 GND
NC 26
S-C IN 7 7 S-C IN
NC 27
GND 6 6 GND
NC 28
AUDIO MONITOR OUT
AUDIO MONITOR SEL
GND 5 5 GND
NC 29 FVJ-13 FLAT CABLE CONTINUED ON 6
S-Y IN 4 4 S-Y IN
BREAKER OUT
PAGE 4-5
BREAKER IN
NC 30
30P
30P
+48V DD ON
SIRCS DATA
5P
GND 3 3 GND
CN903 2P
TALLY LED
FOOT SW
P/S DATA
SW +48V
SW +48V
CH1 OUT
CH3 OUT
CH2 OUT
CH4 OUT
CH1 IN X
CH1 IN Y
CH2 IN X
CH2 IN Y
CH3 IN X
CH3 IN Y
CH4 IN X
CH4 IN Y
P/S SCK
SW +3V
SW +3V
SW +6V
SW +6V
GND 2 2 GND
TC OUT
TC OUT
SW -6V
SW -6V
K
P/S CS
CN603
CN604
CN607
MIC X
MIC Y
TC IN
TC IN
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
VIDEO IN 1 1 VIDEO IN
NC
NC
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
1
3
4
6
7
9
CN106
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
5
4
2
1
7
6
4
3
4
3
2
1
1
3P
30P
V_SYNC
XI/O SYNC VFD
XI/O SYNC HI
VFD_HD
VFD_VD
VD HD
GND
CB_IN
GND
CR_IN
GND
Y_IN
GND
AFC Y
GND
MONITOR C
GND
MONITOR Y
GND
Y LINE
GND
CR LINE
GND
CB LINE
GND
GND
GND
PANEL CB
PANEL CR
PANEL Y
VB-50 HARNESS
CH-1
FVJ-7 FLAT CABLE FLAT CABLE
CN332
CN107
3P FVJ-7 FLAT CABLE
FVJ-10
CH-2
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
5
4
3
2
1
L AUDIO
30P
AUDIO MONITOR SEL
FOOT SW
SW +3V
GND
NC
GND
P/S SCK
GND
GND
P/S CS
SW +3V
+48V DD ON
GND
GND
AUDIO MONITOR OUT
GND
GND
CH1 OUT
GND
GND
CH3 OUT
GND
GND
CH2 OUT
GND
GND
CH4 OUT
SIRCS DATA
P/S DATA
TALLY LED
CN108 INPUT
3P
CN104
CH-3
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
4
3
4
3
2
1
2
JK-169 BOARD 1
BREAKER IN
BREAKER OUT
5P
CH1 IN X
GND
CH1 IN Y
GND
GND
CH2 IN X
GND
CH2 IN Y
GND
GND
CH3 IN X
GND
CH3 IN Y
GND
GND
CH4 IN X
GND
CH4 IN Y
GND
GND
MIC X
GND
MIC Y
SW -6V
SW -6V
SW +6V
SW +6V
NC
SW +48V
SW +48V
TC OUT
TC OUT
GND
TC IN
TC IN
2P
30P
CN109
3P
CN102
CN101
VL-26 BOARD IL-013 BOARD
CN105
CH-4
S110 CN392
CN706 2P CN801 2P 6P 6P
SUPER CN391
M IMPOSE J105 VL BATT 3V
VL BATT GND
1
2
BV-50 HARNESS
1
2
VL BATT 3V
VL BATT GND
BT801
LITHIUM
DV IN/OUT GND 1
BATTERY TPA 2
S101 C Y C Y 7
MONITOR NTPA 3 IN-50
SELECT CONTINUED ON
TC IN (EXT) TC OUT (INT) VIDEO OUT 1
G G G G
CH-1 CH-2 CH-3 CH-4
CN900 2P
GND 4 HARNESS PAGE 4-5
-60 CAM -60 CAM -60 CAM -60 CAM BATTERY 12V 1 BT901 TPB 5
J102 J103 J104 BA-54 HARNESS BATTERY
NTPB 6
GND 2 TARMINAL
S VIDEO OUT S VIDEO IN -20 LINE -20 LINE -20 LINE -20 LINE
CB101 CN901 6P
Y R-Y B-Y
+4 +48V ON +4 +48V ON +4 +48V ON +4 +48V ON BREAKER
S111 BATTERY 12V 1
S102 S104 S103 S105 S106 S108 S107 S109 CN9901
INPUT
N SELECT J101
AUDIO
COMPONENT OUTPUT
VIDEO OUT 2 VIDEO/REF,IN BATTERY 12V
SELECTED 12V
2
3
DC IN 12V
MONITOR
OUT CH-1 CH-3
SELECTED 12V 4 DC-66 HARNESS
J107 J106
AUDIO OUTPUT GND 5
CONTROL S REMOTE
CH-2 CH-4 GND 6
05
FRAME (1/2)
4-3 4-4
DSR-50/50P
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 CONTINUED ON VC-58 HARNESS
PAGE 4-4
A CONTINUED ON JV-58 HARNESS
M905
FL MOTOR
M902
CAM MOTOR
M901(1/2)
DRUM HEAD
2
PAGE 4-4
EVEN
ODD
M901
3 CONTINUED ON VJ-106 HARNESS M M904
REEL
M903
CAPSTAN M (2/2)
DRUM
PAGE 4-4 MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
11
10
10
9
8
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
8
7
2
1
4
5
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
8
7
6
5
1
2
9
3
B
9P
8P
2P
2P
18P
8P
11P
10P
18P
HE GND
FG1
FG VCC
SW +6V
MR_GND
MR_FG1
HE VCC
AUDIO -5V
AUDIO GND
AUDIO +5V
VIDEO -5V
GND
SW +3V
VIDEO +5V
EVR +3V
GND(CH4 OUT)
CH4 OUT
GND(CH3 OUT)
CH3 OUT
GND(CH2 OUT)
CH2 OUT
GND(CH1 OUT)
CH1 OUT
GND
GND
UNREG
UNREG
CM REG 5V
CM REG 5V
GND
SW +3V
CM_LOAD
CM_UNLOAD
V
V
U
U
W
W
MR_VCC
MR_FG2
U+
U-
V+
W+
HW+
HV+
HU-
HU+
V
W
W
U
U
FG2
LM-
LM+
PG
FG
SENSOR Vcc
GND
GND
U
U
GND
XEVEN
YEVEN
GND
XODD
YODD
GND
XSDL
YSDL
GND
HE VCC
MR GND
V-
W-
HW-
HV-
HE GND
CN1100
CN7001
CN300
CN100
CN501
CN3
CN500
CN400
CN101
C CN6001 30P CN2 21P CN200 21P
CN5005 50P CN001 50P CN4401 22P CN203 22P
30 XCS_OSD_HI HI_C/R_SW 50 1 HI_C/R_SW S3 TAPE_END 1 1 TAPE_END DSWP 1 1 DSWP
CC DOWN
29 OSD_SW LM(-) 49 2 LM(-) CC_DOWN 2 2 CC_DOWN CONT_O 2 2 CONT_O
28 OSD_SCK_HI LM(+) 48 3 LM(+) S2 C_IN 3 3 C_IN CONT_E 3 3 CONT_E
27 GND CM_LIMIT_EVR 47 4 CM_LIMIT_EVR C IN MODE_A 4 4 MODE_A SC_WD 4 4 SC_WD
26 OSD_SO_HI CM_LIMIT_DET 46 5 CM_LIMIT_DET S1 MODE_B 5 5 MODE_B CLK150 5 5 CLK150
25 UVIC_GATE CM_LIMIT_ON 45 6 CM_LIMIT_ON L/S-CAS MODE_C 6 6 MODE_C SWP 6 6 SWP
D 24 UVIC_SWIN CM(-) 44 7 CM(-) MODE_D 7 7 MODE_D XRST 7 7 XRST
FMD-14 FLAT CABLE
23 UVIC_BUSY CM(+) 43 8 CM(+) S_ELETEN 8 8 S_ELETEN MSCK 8 8 MSCK
FRJ-1 FLAT CABLE
D1
22 XCS_UVIC GND 42 9 GND TAPE LED T_ELETEN 9 9 T_ELETEN DRP_SO 9 9 DRP_SO
21 GND REEL_M_FG 41 10 REEL_M_FG 5V 10 10 5V DRP_SI 10 10 DRP_SI
20 MO_SI REEL_PWM 40 11 REEL_PWM 5V 11 11 5V XCS_TRF 11 11 XCS_TRF
19 GND REEL_FWD 39 12 REEL_FWD TAPE_LED 12 12 TAPE_LED XCS_TRX 12 12 XCS_TRX
18 MO_SO REEL_ON 38 13 REEL_ON Q2 GND 13 13 GND 5V 13 13 5V
TAPE TOP
17 GND GND 37 14 GND L_CASSETTE 14 14 L_CASSETTE 5V 14 14 5V
E FVJ-14
16 MO_SCK CAP_FG 36 15 CAP_FG DEW 15 15 DEW 3V 15 15 3V
4 CONTINUED ON FLAT CABLE
15 GND CAP_PWM 35 16 CAP_PWM W- 16 16 W- 3V 16 16 3V
Q1
PAGE 4-4 14 XSYS_RST CAP_FWD 34 17 CAP_FWD TAPE END W+ 17 17 W+ 1.9V 17 17 1.9V
13 GND CAP_ON 33 18 CAP_ON V- 18 18 V- 1.9V 18 18 1.9V
12 XCS_MO GND 32 19 GND V+ 19 19 V+ GND 19 19 GND
11 GND DRUM_MASTER_CLK 31 20 DRUM_MASTER_CLK U- 20 20 U- C1ERRP 20 20 C1ERRP
10 HI_SI DRUM_PG 30 21 DRUM_PG U+ 21 21 U+ RF 6V 21 21 RF 6V
FVJ-1 FLAT CABLE
9 GND DRUM_FG 29 22 DRUM_FG RF 6V 22 22 RF 6V
F 8 HI_SO DRUM_PWM 28 23 DRUM_PWM MD-76 BOARD CN1 21P CN201 21P
CM-59 BOARD
7 GND DRUM_FWD 27 24 DRUM_FWD
REEL_V 1 1 REEL_V
6 HI_SCK DRUM_ON 26 25 DRUM_ON CN4402 22P CN202 22P
REEL_V 2 2 REEL_V
5 GND GND 25 26 GND CLK135 1 1 CLK135
REEL_U 3 3 REEL_U
4 MO_XWAKEUP CHIME_VDD 24 27 CHIME_VDD REEL_EVR 2 2 REEL_EVR
REEL_U 4 4 REEL_U
3 XSLEEP CHIME_SDA 23 28 CHIME_SDA CAP_EVR 3 3 CAP_EVR
REEL_w 5 5 REEL_w
2 XIC_RST CHIME_SCK 22 29 CHIME_SCK ATF 4 4 ATF
REEL_W 6 6 REEL_W
1 BACK_UP_+3V CAP_EVR 21 30 CAP_EVR GND 5 5 GND
GND 7 7 GND
G
FMD-14 FLAT CABLE
REEL_EVR 20 31 REEL_EVR TXST 6 6 TXST
GND 8 8 GND
TREEL_FG 19 32 TREEL_FG GND 7 7 GND
CN7002 30P FG1 9 9 FG1
SREEL_FG 18 33 SREEL_FG TXDT4 8 8 TXDT4
FRJ-1 FLAT CABLE
30 AU X1 IN 5V 10 10 5V
S_ELTN_ERR 17 34 S_ELTN_ERR TXDT3 9 9 TXDT3
29 AU Y1 IN 5V 11 11 5V
T_ELTN_ERR 16 35 T_ELTN_ERR TXDT2 10 10 TXDT2
28 GND FG2 12 12 FG2
GND 15 36 GND TXDT1 11 11 TXDT1
27 AU X2 IN SREEL_FG 13 13 SREEL_FG
DEW_DET 14 37 DEW_DET TXDT0 12 12 TXDT0
26 AU Y2 IN TREEL_FG 14 14 TREEL_FG
REC_PROOF 13 38 REC_PROOF GND 13 13 GND
25 GND REC_PROOF 15 15 REC_PROOF
H 24 AU X3 IN
L_CASSETTE 12 39 L_CASSETTE
CHIME_4(VDD) 16 16 CHIME_4(VDD)
CRCK 14 14 CRCK
XCC_DOWN 11 40 XCC_DOWN GND 15 15 GND
23 AU Y3 IN CHIME_3(SDA) 17 17 CHIME_3(SDA)
XC_IN 10 41 XC_IN XTDT1 16 16 XTDT1
22 GND CHIME_2(SCK) 18 18 CHIME_2(SCK)
GND 9 42 GND XTDT0 17 17 XTDT0
21 AU X4 IN GND 19 19 GND
TAPE_END 8 43 TAPE_END GND 18 18 GND
20 AU Y4 IN GND 20 20 GND
TAPE_TOP 7 44 TAPE_TOP XTSY 19 19 XTSY
19 GND TAPE_TOP 21 21 TAPE_TOP
TAPE_LED_ON 6 45 TAPE_LED_ON HPCK 20 20 HPCK
18 TC IN
GND 5 46 GND N.C. 21 21 N.C.
I 17
16
GND
MODE_SW_D 4 47 MODE_SW_D N.C. 22 22 N.C.
TC OUT
FVJ-13 MODE_SW_C 3 48 MODE_SW_C
5 CONTINUED ON FLAT CABLE
15 GND
MODE_SW_B 2 49 MODE_SW_B
PAGE 4-4 14 DSP CS
MODE_SW_A 1 50 MODE_SW_A CN201 20P
13 GND
1 TCK
12 DSP SI
2 TMS
11 GND
3 TDI
10 DSP SO
4 GND
9 GND
J 8 DSP SCK DI-73 BOARD 5 N.C.
6 JSWP
7 NC
7 GND
6 NC
8 RF_MONITOR
5 NC
AU_GND1_OUT 102
AU_X3_IN 112
AU_CH2_OUT 100
AU_X4_IN 108
AU_CH1_OUT 104
AU_3_GND_IN 110
AU_1_GND_IN 118
AU_4_GND_IN 106
AU_2_GND_IN 114
AU_X2_IN 116
AU_X1_IN 120
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
72
74
76
78
80
82
84
86
88
90
92
94
96
98
CONTINUED ON N.C.
2
6
8
9
6
PAGE 4-4 4 NC
JC-20 BOARD JIG PIN 10 N.C.
DPB_YOUT
GND
DPB_CROUT
GND
DPB_CBOUT
GND
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
GND
JC00
JC01
JC02
JC03
JC04
JC05
JC06
JC07
N.C
J_3V
VIDEO_+5V
VIDEO_-5V
SIC
SID
SFDBCK
BCK
SFD_LRCK
LRCK
N.C
VFD_HD
GND
N.C
XVSP_SCK
VSP_SO
GND
DSP_SCK
DSP_SO
TC/GND_OUT
TC_OUT
AU_GND4_OUT
AU_CH4_OUT
AU_GND3_OUT
AU_CH3_OUT
AU_GND2_OUT
3 NC
11 N.C.
2 NC
12 RF_IN
1 NC
K 13 N.C.
14 N.C.
15 N.C.
16 GND
17 TDO
18 C1ERRP
30P
XI/O SYNC VFD
N.C.
120P
19
XI/O SYNC HI
AU_4_GND_IN
AU_3_GND_IN
AU_2_GND_IN
AU_1_GND_IN
MONITOR C
MONITOR Y
20 GND
DPB_CROUT
DPB_CBOUT
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
PANEL CR
PANEL CB
VIDEO_+5V
LOCK_MCK
DPB_YOUT
FIFO/MUTE
VIDEO_-5V
XRST_VSP
PANEL Y
L
V_SYNC
CR LINE
VFD_VD
AU_Y4_IN
AU_Y3_IN
AU_Y2_IN
AU_Y1_IN
CB LINE
TC/GNDIN
CN1101
VFD HD
XCS_DSP
CN9500
SFD_FCK
PB/XREC
Y LINE
PAL/XNT
VD HD
CR_IN
CB_IN
DSP_CS
VFD_VD
VFD_OE
AFC Y
DSP_SI
VSP_SI
VD_HD
Y_IN
SPCK2
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
DA135
TC_IN
A.+5V
A.+5V
A.+5V
MY00
MY01
MY02
MY03
MY04
MY05
MY06
MY07
A.-5V
A.-5V
MHO
J_3V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
SOA
SOB
OCK
AFH
N.C
N.C
RP-234 BOARD
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
6
5
3
2
101
103
105
107
109
111
113
115
117
119
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63
65
67
69
71
73
75
77
79
81
83
85
87
89
91
93
95
97
99
1
B to B
FVJ-13 FLAT CABLE
AU_GND1_OUT 102
AU_X3_IN 112
AU_CH2_OUT 100
AU_X4_IN 108
AU_CH1_OUT 104
AU_3_GND_IN 110
AU_1_GND_IN 118
AU_4_GND_IN 106
AU_2_GND_IN 114
AU_X2_IN 116
AU_X1_IN 120
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
72
74
76
78
80
82
84
86
88
90
92
94
96
98
2
M
DPB_YOUT
GND
DPB_CROUT
GND
DPB_CBOUT
GND
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
GND
JC00
JC01
JC02
JC03
JC04
JC05
JC06
JC07
N.C
J_3V
VIDEO_+5V
VIDEO_-5V
SIC
SID
SFDBCK
BCK
SFD_LRCK
LRCK
N.C
VFD_HD
GND
N.C
XVSP_SCK
VSP_SO
GND
DSP_SCK
DSP_SO
TC/GND_OUT
TC_OUT
AU_GND4_OUT
AU_CH4_OUT
AU_GND3_OUT
AU_CH3_OUT
AU_GND2_OUT
120P
CN4400 6P
1 GND
CN8001
2 TPA
3 NTPA
7 CONTINUED ON IN-50 HARNESS CN6002 20P
4 GND
PAGE 4-4 20 TMS/ONBOAD55 LANC_IN 19
5 TPB
18 TCK/ONBOAD73 LANC_OUT 17
6 NTPB
N 16
14
TDI/ONBOAD78
TDOB/ONBOAD79
XLANC_PWR_ON
UNSW_6V
15
13
12 ONBOAD80 UNSW_3V 11
JIG PIN
AU_4_GND_IN
AU_3_GND_IN
AU_2_GND_IN
AU_1_GND_IN
10 GND B.UP_3V 9
DPB_CROUT
DPB_CBOUT
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
VIDEO_+5V
LOCK_MCK
DPB_YOUT
FIFO/MUTE
VIDEO_-5V
XRST_VSP
AU_Y4_IN
AU_Y3_IN
AU_Y2_IN
AU_Y1_IN
TC/GNDIN
XCS_DSP
GND
SFD_FCK
GND
PB/XREC
8 7
PAL/XNT
DSP_CS
VFD_VD
VFD_OE
DSP_SI
VSP_SI
VD_HD
SPCK2
DA135
TC_IN
A.+5V
A.+5V
A.+5V
MY00
MY01
MY02
MY03
MY04
MY05
MY06
MY07
A.-5V
A.-5V
N.C.
MHO
J_3V
6 XRESET 5
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
SOA
SOB
OCK
AFH
N.C
N.C
4 N.C. EJECT 3
101
103
105
107
109
111
113
115
117
119
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63
65
67
69
71
73
75
77
79
81
83
85
87
89
91
93
95
97
99
N.C. PARSLEY_MODE
1
2 1
O 05
FRAME (2/2)
4-5 4-6
DSR-50/50P
4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
RP-234 (REC/PB AMP) PRINTED WIRING BOARD • For Printed Wiring Board.
• RP-234 board is six-layer print board. However, the patterns of
– Ref. No.: RP-234 board; 30,000 series –
layers 2 to 5 have not been included in the diagram.
• There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model
is printed on this diagram.
• See page 4-153 for printed parts location.
• Chip transistor
C
B E
5 3 7
6
REC/PB AMP
RP-234 4-7 4-8
DSR-50/50P
2
1
REC/PB AMP
4-9 4-10 RP-234
DSR-50/50P
RP-234 (REC/PB AMP 1) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-7 for RP-234 printed wiring board. • See page 4-147 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
A
RP-234 BOARD (1/2)
REC/PB AMP 1
-REF.NO.:30,000 SERIES-
RF6V
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
5V
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R:REC MODE
P:PB MODE
1
B RP-234 BOARD (2/2)
CN203 22P CL205
RF 6V 22 1-1
RF 6V 21 1-2
CL204
C1ERRP 20
CL135
GND 19
CL134 C315
1.9V 18 10u
6.3V
1.9V 17 CL133
C 3V
3V
16
15
C314
0.01u TCK CL136
CN201
1
20P
TCK
CL132 TMS CL137
SW_PS
ALL_PS
CONT1
5V 14 2 TMS
CRCK
HPCK
XTSY
XTDT0
XTDT1
TXDT0
TXDT1
TXDT2
TXDT3
TXDT4
TXST
R220 TRX_TDI CL138
5V 13 470k 3 TDI
JC-20 BOARD (7/14) CL131 XCS_TRX CL139
XCS_TRX 12 4 GND
0
CN4401 CL130 CL140
XCS_TRF
R341 N.C.
R340
THROUGH THE XCS_TRF 11 5
CL129 MSI 0 SWP CL141
FRJ-1 FLAT CABLE DRP_SI 10 6 JSWP
(SEE PAGE 4-32) CL128 MSO CL206
DRP_SO 9 7 GND
CL127 XSCK CL207
D
CL159
CL158
CL157
MSCK 8 8 RF_MONITOR
CL126 XRST CL208
XRST 7 9 N.C.
CL125 SWP CL209
SWP 6 10 N.C.
R0/P0.8
R0/P0.8
R1.1/P0
R1.1/P0
R1.1/P0
R1.1/P0
R1.1/P0
CL124 CLK150 CL152 CL210 JIG PIN
R2/P0
CLK150 5 11 N.C.
CL123 SC_WD CL142
SC_WD 4 R0/P1.2 0 2 1 0 0 2 12 RF_IN
CL122 CONT_E CL143
CONT_E 3 C309 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 13 N.C.
CL121 CONT_O 0.1u CL144
CONT_O 2 14 N.C.
CL145
DSWP 1 C333 15 N.C.
CL120 3.3u CL211
C308
E R309
15
4V 0.01u
TRX_TDO CL146
16
17
GND
TDO
1 CL156 CONT0 CL147
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
18 C1ERRP
C338 C336 1 R1.9/P0 CL154 RECA2 CL148
XX XX 19 N.C.
C337 2.8 R1.9/P0 CL155 CL212
CL400 C335 RECA1
XX R348 D301 C310 20 GND
XX XX 0.01u CL160
XX 2.8 R0.9/P0 RECCK
R343
CN202 22P XX 2 R339 0
CL203 L301
N.C. 22 XX 0 R1.2/P0 CL161 RECDT
C303 R352 R351 R350 R349
IC301
F N.C.
HPCK
21
20
CL202
HPCK
10u
6.3V
XX XX XX D302
XX
10k
C334 (Note)
0
0
R347 0
CL167
PLLSW
PLLMSK
C304
0.01u
0
CL119 IC301
9
XTSY
XTSY 19 1.7 F712504DPM-TEB CL166
CL118 1
8
GND 18 R0.2/P1.1 CL169
XTDT0 2-1
7
XTDT0 17 TRX_TDO 1.3 R0.2/P1.4
CL117 XTDT1 2-2
6
XTDT1 16 TRX_TDI 2.7 R0.2/P1.4
CL116 2-3
5
GND 15 TCK 1.4 R0.2/P1.4
CL201 CRCK 2-4
4
CRCK 14 TMS 1.4 R0.2/P1.4
2-5
3
CL115
GND 13 2.7 R0.2/P1.4
G JC-20 BOARD (7/14) R338 C302 2-6
2
CL114 TXDT0 100k 0.01u
CN4402 TXDT0 12 2.8 R0.2/P1.4
2-7
1
THROUGH THE CL113 TXDT1
TXDT1 11 XSCK
FRJ-1 FLAT CABLE CL112 TXDT2 2-8
TXDT2 10 MSO
(SEE PAGE 4-32)
TXDT3 9
CL111 TXDT3
Note:Resistor is mounted to the location
where C334 is printed. 2 2-9
CL110 TXDT4
TXDT4 8 2-10
CL109
GND 7 2-11
CL200 TXST 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 XCS_TRF
TXST 6 2-12
CL108 2 0 2.8 REEL_EVR 2
2.7
2.7
2.7
1.4
1.4
0.1
1.4
2.8
GND 5 2-13
H ATF 4
CL107 CAP_EVR
2-14
RP-234 BOARD (2/2)
CL106 SWP
CL168
CAP_EVR C301
CAP_EVR 3 0.01u 2-15
CL105 REEL_EVR CL170
REEL_EVR 2
CL104
CLK135 1
CL103
GND
I
SIGNAL PATH
2-16
VIDEO SIGNAL
XCS_TRX
AUDIO
CLK150
SC_WD
XSCK
XRST
SIGNAL
MSO
MSI
Y/CHROMA 1.9V
REC 05
3V
J PB
REC/PB AMP 1
RP-234 (1/2) 4-11 4-12
DSR-50/50P
RP-234 (REC/PB AMP 2) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-7 for RP-234 printed wiring board. • See page 4-147 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
RP-234 BOARD (2/2)
A REC/PB AMP 2
-REF.NO.:30,000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R:REC MODE
P:PB MODE
RF6V
B 1 5V
RP-234 BOARD (1/2) 1-1
CONT_E
CONT_O
1-2
PLLMSK
RECDT
PLLSW
L202
10uH
L102
10uH IC102
IC102
S-81350HG-KD-T1
C C222
3900p
2200
C223 R218
C224
8200p 8200p 100
R0/P2.7 R217 R214
R201
R213
100 2200
10k C221
Q201
2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO 3900p
C219 C220
2 Q203 3300p 1 2 3
3300p
2SC4851-TL
4700
0 0
5 5.5
20k
R105 22k
R107 22k
R202 C201
D
R211
6800 0.01u C111
R104
C204 C205 R0.7/P0.1 R215 R0.7/P0.1 R216 0.1u
R212 LND101
0.01u 0.01u 120 4700 2200
GND
22k
C202
15k
C207
22k
C200 Q202 C206 R204
0.01u 0.01u 2SC4851-TL 47p 0.033u C101 R101 C102
470
0.01u 10k 0.1u
R103
R106
R102
C208
R219 0
47p
R203
150k
CL165
R108
R2.3/P1.3
220
E
R0/P3.2
R0/P2.7
R1.2/P0
R1.9/P0
2.8
2.8
2.7
2.7
2.7
2.7
1.3
1.8
5 0 0 2.1 0 R3.9/P1.8
R115
4700
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
C209 C103
0.01u 0.1u
F R0.2/P1.1 2.2 R0/P2.3 R3.9/P1.8
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
10 11 12
2-1 CN101 10P
5 C199
C104 0.1u
R0/P2.3 7 R3.9/P1.8
10 GND
R0.2/P1.4 0.1 R206 12k R207 12k 0.01u R4.8/P2.7 R3.9/P1.8
2-2
R208 10k
3 9 YSDL
R0.2/P1.4
IC201 0 5 R109 220
C105
0.01u
2-3 M901(1/2)
9
8 XSDL
R110 220 DRUM HEAD
2-4
R0.2/P1.4 2.2 C107
10u CL153 IC101 R4.2/P1.7
8
7 GND
R0.2/P1.4 IC201 2.8 C210 0.1u 10V R4.1/P1.7
2-5
7
CXA2071R-T4 CL149 6 YODD
R0.2/P1.4 0.2 RECA2 R1.9/P0 IC101 R4.1/P1.7 ODD
2-6 CXA2072R-T4
6
5 XODD
R0.2/P1.4 2.8 2.8 R4.2/P1.7
2-7
5
4 GND
CL163 CL151 RECA1 R1.9/P0 R111 220
G C211
6
4
0.01u 3 YEVEN
2.7 CL150 SW_PS R2/P0 R4.2/P1.7 R112 220 EVEN
2-8 XEVEN
3
2
2 CL164 CONT0 1 R4.1/P1.7
C213
4
2
0.01u 1 GND
0 3.7 CONT1 2 R4.1/P1.7
2-9
1
C212
2-10 470p
5
R2.6/P1.4
2 C106
0.01u
RP-234 BOARD (1/2)
H 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
R209
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
2.7 2 5 5 R3.7/P2.3 0 2 5.5 R4.2/P1.7
1.4
2.8
1.4
0.9
R0.9/P0
R1.2/P0
1M
R113
220
2-11
2-12
CL162 ALL_PS
2-13
RECCK
2-14
RECDT
2-15
I LND102
C108 C109
0.01u 0.01u GND
C214 C215 C216 C218
0.01u 0.01u 470p 10u LND103
10V
GND GND
C217 C110
10u 10u LND104
6.3V LND105 10V
R210 68 GND
2-16 GND
1.9V L201 LND106
10uH
J 3V
GND
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO
Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
k
REC
05 PB
REC/PB AMP 2
4-13 4-14 RP-234 (2/2)
DSR-50/50P
JC-20 (VIDEO PB AMP, VIDEO A/D CONVERTER, CHROMA MIX, AFC, VFD, SFD, TFD, DV INTERFACE, MECHANISM CONTROL, AUDIO, POWER SUPPLY) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
– Ref. No.: JC-20 board; 20,000 series –
• For Printed Wiring Board.
• JC-20 board is six-layer print board. However, the patterns of
layers 2 to 5 have not been included in the diagram.
• There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model
is printed on this diagram.
• See page 4-153 for printed parts location.
• Chip transistor
C
B E
31
25 24
32 26 3
30 27
28
16
2
36
37 4
33 34 35
38 1
29
4-15 4-16
VIDEO PB AMP, VIDEO A/D CONVERTER, CHROMA MIX, AFC, VFD, SFD, TFD, DV INTERFACE, MECHANISM CONTROL, AUDIO, POWER SUPPLY
JC-20
DSR-50/50P
6 10 11
9
17 18 40
23
19 22
20 39
21
10 13
7 12
10 15
14
4-17 4-18
VIDEO PB AMP, VIDEO A/D CONVERTER, CHROMA MIX, AFC, VFD, SFD, TFD, DV INTERFACE, MECHANISM CONTROL, AUDIO, POWER SUPPLY
JC-20
DSR-50/50P
JC-20 (VIDEO PB AMP) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-15 for JC-20 printed wiring board. • See page 4-147 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A
JC-20 BOARD (1/14)
VIDEO PB AMP
-REF.NO.:20,000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE AFC_Y 8 JC-20 BOARD (4/14)
Y_IN
+5V
1 JC-20 BOARD (14/14) CR_IN
GND 9 JC-20 BOARD (2/14)
B CN1101 30P R1102
10
CB_IN
-5V
CL1110
PANEL Y 1
CL1111
GND 2
CL1112 R1103 10
PANEL CR 3
CL1113
GND 4
CL1114 R1104 10
PANEL CB 5
CL1115
GND 6
CL1116 R1105 10
CB LINE 7
C GND 8
CL1117
R1107 10
Q1103
2SC4081T106R
IC1000 Q1114
2SC4081T106R
IC1002
CL1118
CR LINE 9
CL1119
GND 10 R1113
CL1120 R1115 10 1k R1139
Y LINE 11 C1103 R1221 IC1000 1k R1011 IC1002
CL1121 33p 5 R1220 0 LM7131BCM5X R1000 5 0 LM7131BCM5X R1012
R1222 XX
R1009
GND 12 R1108 0 0
XX
VD-28 BOARD (7/15)
CL1122 R1119 10 0 220 3.9
1 0.7 5 3.9
2
0.7 5
5
MONITOR Y 13
CN332 CL1123 R1109 -4.9 R1001 -4.9 R1013
R1223 820 820
2
GND 14 1k
THROUGH THE R1121 10 0 3.3 0.4 0.4 R1136 1k 3.3 0.4 0.4
CL1124
4
FVJ-13 FLAT CABLE MONITOR C 15
CL1125
D (SEE PAGE 4-87) GND 16
CL1126 R1122 10 2.8
1 2 3 C1008
22u
1 2 3
C1005
22u
4V
AFC Y 17 4V 2.8
CL1127 2.2
GND 18 6 4 R1002 2.2 6 4 R1010
R1015 C1000 C1001 R1143 22k C1006 C1007 R1014
CL1128 0.1u 820 0.1u
Y_IN 19 FL1100 22k 0.1u FL1104 470 0.1u 820
CL1129
GND 20
CL1130 Q1100 R1116
CR_IN 21 2SA1576A-T106-R 470
CL1131 Q1112
GND 22 2SA1576A-T106-R
CL1132
CB_IN 23
CL1133 R1019
E GND
VD HD
24
25
CL1134 L1000 XX L1108
10uH
CL1135 L1001
VFD_VD 26
L1101 R1021 XX
CL1136 R1129
IC1001
2SC4081T106R
R1111 C1106 R1117 R1005
VFD_HD 27
2SC4081T106R
L1122 220 1k 1k 0
CL1137 R1020 XX 22p
Q1111
XI/O SYNC HI 28
IC1112
Q1104
CL1138 L1107 5 IC1001
XI/O SYNC VFD 29 4.1 R1003 LM7131BCM5X R1006
IC1112 R1127 XX
CL1139 1k 5 0
V_SYNC 30 R1112 LM7131BCM5X R1219 0.6 5
4
0
R1016
5
1k 0 4
R1101 1.2 5 -4.9 R1007
0
3
R1017
F 0 3.5
2
820
2 JC-20 BOARD (9/14) HUE_ADJ
R1018
-4.9 R1218
1500 3.3
0.4 0.4
4
1 2 3
PB/XEE 0 0.4 0.4 1 2 3 C1002
4
S/XV 22u
C1184 4V
6 4 2.9
3 JC-20 BOARD (11/14) 3.2 22u
4V 6 4
C1100 FL1101 R1217 2.3
XI/O_SINC_HI 2.7 C1185 C1186 FL1103 R1134 R1004 C1003 C1004 R1008
10u R1120 0.1u 470 22k 0.1u 0.1u
0.1u 470 820
6.3V 470
VFD_HD
VFD_VD C1101 Q1101 R1216
0.01u 2SA1576A-T106-R 22k
Y_SIKISA Q1109
2SA1576A-T106-R
G 4 JC-20 BOARD (5/14)
Y_OUT
CR_OUT
CB_OUT IC1111
C_OUT
SIGNAL PATH
Q1129 FL1102
5 JC-20 BOARD (5/14) OSDVD 2SC4081T106R 5 R1215
0
6 4 5 1.2 5 VIDEO SIGNAL
R1123
5
5
2.8
VD_HD 1k 5 -4.9
C1181 R1212
CHROMA Y
2
6 JC-20 BOARD (14/14)
V_FROM_SYNCGEN 1 2 3
0.01u
0.4 0.4 1500
2.2 C1107
4
Q1130
H 0.01u
2SC4081T106R
REC
R1118 4.4 IC1111
DPB_CBOUT 1k LM7131BCM5X
R1110 R1114 R1125 R1213 R1214
XX 2200 22k C1182 C1183
7 JC-20 BOARD (14/14) DPB_CROUT 2200
0.1u 0.01u 470 PB
05 DPB_YOUT
VIDEO PB AMP
JC-20 (1/14) 4-19 4-20
DSR-50/50P
JC-20 (VIDEO A/D CONVERTER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-15 for JC-20 printed wiring board. • See page 4-147 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
A
JC-20 BOARD (2/14)
GND 13
VIDEO A/D CONVERTER 10 JC-20 BOARD (14/14) VIDEO_-5V L1114 C1180 R1211
SPCK1 JC-20 BOARD (4/14)
XX 0
10uH
-REF.NO.:20,000 SERIES-
+5V
XX MARK:NO MOUNT C1159
XX C1177
0.01u
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE Y_IN
R:REC MODE Q1126
P:PB MODE CR_IN 6 2SC4081T106R C1171
10u
B 6.3V
3.2
3.2
3.2
1.2
3.2
3.2
9 JC-20 BOARD (1/14)
R1182
5
L1109 C1139
CB_IN 10u 3.2
5 1k 10uH
Q1117 6.3V
-0.3 2SC4081T106R 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
-5V R2.2/P5
C1114 C1137
1u R1167 R1.6/ R1191 0.01u
R1.6/P4.4
-0.9 16V 100 P4.6 100 CL1157
10
2SA1576A-T106-R
11 JC-20 BOARD (4/14) AFH_CLP
C1112 R1158
Q1123
0 Q1120 -4.9
22u
CL1146
2SC3326N-TE85L-B R0.8/P3.2
CL1161 4V
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
R1171
8
R1.6/ R0.9/P0.7 Y7
1k P4.6 CL1173 2.9 R1.3/P3.2
7
Y6
R1151
C R1161
XX
C1125 0.01u 22k R1.2/P1 C1120 L1112 10uH 3.2 R1.3/P3.2
6
XX Y5
CL1155 C1166
IC1108
R1.1/P0.2
C1155
C1127 3.2 R1.6/P3.2
14
11
XX
C1117 10u
R1.2/P1
R1.2/P1
R1164
5
R1153 R1176 0.01u C1174 Y4
10u 2200 4700 R1186 C1131 6.3V R1.2/P3.2
1k 6.3V 1800 10p 0.01u IC1108 JC-20 BOARD (5/14)
4
CXD2300Q-T4 Y3
R1.1/ R1.2/P1 R1.6/P4 R1.2/P3.2
3
P0.7 Y2
R1.2/P3.2
9
2
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Y1
CL1174 R1.4/P3.2
5 2.9 2.9 2.9
7
1
R1.1/ Y0
BA10324AFV-E2 P0.7 R1207 R1183 5 1
4700 8 7 6 5 1k
C1146 5 Q1127
Q1118
0.01u -0.3 2SC4081T106R 2SC4081T106R
D R1179
1k
CL1165
IC1105
R2.6/P5 R1197
0
IC1102 RV1103
BA10358F-E2
C1147
C1115
1u R1168 R2/ R1192
R1.9/P4.4
1k -0.9 16V 100 P4.5 100 CL1158
2SA1576A-T106-R
0.01u
R1208 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
IC1102
1 2 3 4
Q1124
0 C1111 R1159
22u 0 Q1121 -4.9
3.2
CL1147
1 1 1 -4.9 4V 2SC3326N-TE85L-B
RV1103 R2/ R0.9/P0.7
C1156
C1168
P4.5
0.01u
0.01u
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Y CLAMP
REF.VOLTAGE R1150 C1121
22k R2/P1.7
5 1.2 1.2 1.2 XX
C1128
C1118 R1165 R1177 0.01u
E IC1105 R1154
1k
10u
6.3V
10k 4700 R1187
1800
C1132
10p
C1151
10u
6.3V
C1162
10u
6.3V
C1134
0.01u
L1115
R1172
4700 C1124 0.01u
8 R1184
1k
5 C1160
XX
10uH C1178
0.01u
5
Q1119 Q1128
R1162 -0.2 2SC4081T106R 2SC4081T106R
XX CL1154 CL1160
R1201
IC1107 C1116
R2.6/P5
R1193
C1172
10u
6.3V
47 1u R2/
F R1169
R2/P1.6
R2/P1.6
R2/P1.7
R2/P1.7
R1.9/P4.4
16V 100 CL1159
3.2
3.2
3.2
1.2
3.2
3.2
-0.9 100 P4.5
2SA1576A-T106-R
R1.1/P0.7
R1.1/P0.7
3.2
R2/ 2.6
R1156 R2/ P1.7 C1113 R1160
Q1125
4700 P1.6 22u 0 Q1122 -4.9 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
CL1148
8 7 6 5 4V 2SC3326N-TE85L-B
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 R2/
NJM431M(TE2)
R0.9/P0.7
5 5 P4.5
IC1107
CL1145 R1152
R1202
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 C1122
R2/P1.7
10
BA10324AFV-E2
390
22k XX
TC74HC4066AFS-EL
R1155 C1129
1k C1119 R1166 R1178 0.01u
10u 10k 4700 R1188 C1133 R1.8/P3.2
R1203
10p
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
IC1103
8
1 2 3 4 6.3V 1800 CR7
0
CL1175 2.9 R1.4/P3.2
5 R1180
7
3.2 CR6
G IC1101
Q1116
UN5213-TX
10k
R1204
L1110
10uH
L1113 10uH 3.2 R1.4/P3.2
6
1500 CR5
CL1169 C1143
IC1109
C1157
C1167
IC1103
3.2 R1.4/P3.2
XX
0.01u
13
5
10u C1175 CR4
C1141 6.3V
R1198
CL1152 C1148 C1144 0.01u R1.4/P3.2
1500
C1140 10u IC1109
4
0.01u CL1166 10u CR3
IC1101
0.01u 6.3V R1.9/P4 CXD2300Q-T4 R1.6/P3.2
6.3V
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CR2
CL1167 R1.6/P3.2
C1149 12
2
5 2 2 2 CR1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RV1100 0.01u CL1176 R1.4/P3.2
4700
1
CR0
5 5 1
R2/P1.6
R2/P1.6
R2/P1.6
R2/P1.6
RV1100
R1199 CL1170
15k A/D CONV.
CL1168
H REF.VOLTAGE 1
CL1172
C1135 RV1101
0.01u 4700 RV1101
R1173 C1126 R1200 A/D CONV.
R1157 4700 0.01u 8200 REF.VOLTAGE 2 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
XX
R1163
3.2
CL1156 C1142 0.01u
XX
CL1162
R1106 C1152
CL1181 XX
R2/P1.6
R2/P1.6
R2/P1.7
R2/P1.7
10u
6.3V
R2/
I R2/
P1.6 P1.7 2.9 2.9 2.9 -4.9 2.9 2.9 2.9
C1158 C1163
0.01u 10u
6.3V
C1169
0.01u
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 15
JC-20 BOARD (3/14)
BA10324AFV-E2
BA10324AFV-E2
R1205 R1209 L1116
1k 1k C1161 10uH C1179
XX 0.01u
R1181
10k
RV1104
IC1104 CL1164 IC1106 RV1104
2200 CB CLAMP
C1173
10u
REF.VOLTAGE 6.3V
3.2
3.2
3.2
1.2
3.2
CL1153
RV1102
IC1106
IC1104
3.2 3.2
J
CL1149
CL1150
CL1151
2200 CL1171
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
CL1163
R1210
1k
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 R1206 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1k
5 2 2 2 1 1 1 5 1 1 1
RV1102 10
Y_CLP_ERR CR CLAMP
REF.VOLTAGE R1.9/P3.2
12
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
JC-20 BOARD (9/14) CR_CLP_ERR
8
CB7
CL1177 2.9 R1.3/P3.2
CB_CLP_ERR
7
CB6
L1111 10uH 3.2 R1.3/P3.2
6
CB5
K R1174 R1189 R1195 C1153 C1165 3.2 IC1110 R1.5/P3.2
15
5
XX XX XX 10u C1176 CB4
XX 6.3V R1.1/P3.2
0.01u IC1110
C1109
4
C1188 CXD2300Q-T4 CB3
100u 100u R1.9/P4 R1.1/P3.2
6.3V C1138
3
6.3V CB2
0.01u R1.3/P3.2
R1170 14
2
CB1
4700 C1145 CL1178 R1.4/P3.2
R1185 R1190 R1194 0.01u
1
4700 15k 4700 CB0
R1175 1
3300
SIGNAL PATH C1123 C1194 C1130 C1187 R1196 C1136 C1110
47u 47u 100u 100u 15k 100u 100u
6.3V 6.3V 6.3V 6.3V 6.3V 6.3V
L VIDEO SIGNAL
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
CHROMA Y
3.2
C1154 C1170
0.01u 0.01u
REC
C1150 C1164
10u 10u
6.3V 6.3V
05
VIDEO A/D CONVERTER
4-21 4-22 JC-20 (2/14)
http://getMANUAL.com
DSR-50/50P
JC-20 (CHROMA MIX) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-15 for JC-20 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A JC-20 BOARD (3/14)
CHROMA MIX
-REF.NO.:20,000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R:REC MODE
P:PB MODE
B
IC2214
CB7
CB7
CB6 R2250
IC2209
TC74VHC244FT(EL)
IC2214
TC74VHC374FT(EL) IC2215
CB6 10k
CB5 1.4 2.8 1.4 2.8 IC2215
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
CB5 TC74VHC541FT(EL)
1
CB4
CB4 CR0 R1.4/P3.2 1.4
IC2212 C0 R1.3/P2.8 R1.7/P2.8 C7
2
R0/P2.8 2.8
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
C0 CB0 CB7
1
CB3 C7 R1.7/P2.8 R1.3/P2.8 R1.4/P3.2 R1.9/P3.2
CB3
IC2208
3
2.8 1.4 C0 R1.3/P2.8
2.8 1.4 IC2212
C CR1 CR7 CB6
2
CB2 R1.6/P3.2 R1.8/P3.2 CB1 R1.3/P3.2 R1.3/P3.2
CB2 TC7SH00FU-TE85R
4
C1 R1.4/P2.8 R1.3/P1
C1 JC00
3
CB1 5 4 C6 R1.1/P2.8 R1.4/P2.8 5 4 C1 R1.4/P2.8 R1.1/P2.8 C6
CB1
5
C2 R1.1/P2.8 R1.4/P1.1
0.01u
CR2 CR6 JC01
4
CB0 IC2208 R1.6/P3.2 R1.4/P3.2 C2 R1.1/P2.8 R1.2/P2.8 C5
CB0
6
C3 R1.1/P2.8 R1.1/P1
TC7SH00FU-TE85R JC02
15 C2 CB5
5
CR7 C5 R1.2/P2.8 R1.1/P2.8 CB2 R1.1/P3.2 R1.3/P3.2
CR7
7
C4 R1.2/P2.8 R1.1/P0.9
C2244
CR3 CR5 CB4 JC03 18
6
JC-20 BOARD (2/14) CR6 1 2 3 R1.4/P3.2 R1.4/P3.2 1 2 3 CB3 R1.1/P3.2 R1.5/P3.2
CR6
8
C5 R1.2/P2.8 R1.2/P1.1
C3 JC04
7
CR5 2.8 C4 R1.2/P2.8 R1.1/P2.8 2.8 C3 R1.1/P2.8 R1.2/P2.8 C4 JC-20 BOARD (5/14)
1.4
1.4
CR5
9
C6 R1.1/P2.8 R1.2/P1
CR4 JC05
8
CR4 R1.4/P3.2 0.9
10
10
CR4 C7 R1.7/P2.8 R1.1/P1
JC06
9
CR3
CR3 R1.7/P1.9
D
10
CR2 C2240 JC07
CR2
CR1
CR1 IC2209 0.01u
R2255
0
CR0
CR0
C2243
R2251 XX
XX
L2205
10uH
J_3V
E
2.8 2.8 2.8 1.4
IC2210
IC2213 8 7 6 5 IC2210
IC2211
TC7SH04FU-TE85R
IC2213 IC2211
TC7SH08FU-TE85R
16 TC7WH74FU(TE12R) 2.8
1
5
JC-20 BOARD (14/14) 1.2 1.4 2.8
2
5
F 1.7 1.7
3
2
1 2 3 4
0.9
4
1.2 1.5 1.4
SIGNAL PATH
C2238 C2239 C2241 C2242 R2254
10u 1u 1u 0.01u XX
6.3V VIDEO
GND
SIGNAL
CHROMA
G 17
17-1 R2252
0
17-2 REC
JC-20 BOARD (4/14)
17-3
05
CHROMA MIX
JC-20 (3/14) 4-23 4-24
DSR-50/50P
JC-20 (AFC) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-15 for JC-20 printed wiring board. • See page 4-147, 148 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
JC-20 BOARD (4/14)
A
AFC
-REF.NO.:20,000 SERIES- NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
XX MARK:NO MOUNT R:REC MODE
P:PB MODE
17-2
R2253
0
17 R2256
B JC-20 BOARD (3/14)
17-1
17-3
0 CL2236
WEVN
CL2210 CL2237
SPCK0
C2221 R2257
XX 0
22
19 AFC_3V
R2241
R2234 XX R2258 JC-20 BOARD (5/14)
JC-20 BOARD (5/14) R2229
0 0 0 CL2238
VD
CL2239
CL2211
CL2208 AFH
13
C JC-20 BOARD (2/14)
SPCK1
IC2200
R2259
0
TK11630UTL
1.2 3.1 3.1 1.2 1.2 3.1
8
JC-20 BOARD (1/14)
AFC_Y
IC2200 L2203
10uH 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
C2211
10u
1 2 3
D 5 3.1
6.3V
17 18
3.1
49
32
R2209 R2214
0 XX
50
31
VIDEO_+5V C2206
C2204 47u
20 0.01u 3.1
51
30
4V
GND R2210
JC-20 BOARD (14/14) XX
C2201 0
52
29
0.01u
R2215 CL2217
10k 0
23
53
28
PB/XREC CL2200
21
E JC-20 BOARD (14/14) SPCK2 R2211 3.1 1.5
54
27
XX
1.6 3.1
68
19
55
26
C2235
JC-20 BOARD (9/14)
PB/XREC CL2201
IC2204 0.01u
56
25
L2202
10uH CL2202 IC2204
1.5
CXD2193AR-ER
57
24
R2246
R2200 3.1 1.2 0
10k R2206
58
23
1k
F 5 C2209
0.01u
CL2203 0
CL2218
C2237
XX
59
22
3.8 Q2200 R2248
2SC4081T106R CL2204 XX
C2200 2.8 R2249
60
21
22u 3.2 XX
4V
0 0.8
16
61
20
R2212 R2216
0 XX
22
62
19
R2202 2.2
0 Q2201 CL2205 RV2201 C2236
L2200 2SA1576A-T106-R 0.8 4700
XX
R2204 L2201 0.001u
63
18
470 56uH 120uH
1.6 CL2206
20
R2207
3.1
G C2208
64
17
10u
C2207 R2201
0.01u 6.3V RV2201
39k R2203 R2205
1k 470
21 AFC
PICTURE
C2202 FRAME
C2203 C2205 R2208 R2217
82p 390p 1000p XX 0
11
AFH_CLP
JC-20 BOARD (2/14) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1.6 1.5 2 1.6 3.1 1.5 2 1.6 1.8 1.6 1.7 1.5 1.5 3.1
R2213 R2218 C2212
4700 220 1000p
H
4700p
C2220
R2247
R4.6/P5
R4.6/P5
CL2215
CL2213
IC2202 WEVN
CL2214
R2236
CL2209
R2230
R2239
10k
1k
R2269 680k
4700 5 0 R5/P0
IC2202 CL2212
TC7SET08FU(TE85R) 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
R2270 R2266
0 4700
0 5
1
R5/P0 0 R2231
I C2210
IC2203 XX R2237
2
Q2203 0.01u R2221 33k R2267
0 4700
UN5213-TX 4700 R2232 XX
3
IC2203 23
2.3 3.1
R2240
TC74VHC123AFT(EL)
33k
JC-20 BOARD (9/14)
R0/P2.8 D2201 R2261 R2262 6 4
KV1470TL00 82k 82k
2.6 2 5
R2235 C2226 R2263 2.5
R2226
CL2216
4700
R2222 33k 470p 4700
270 1 3 Q2202
XP4601-TXE
0.01u
3 1
R2227
270
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2.1 3
8 7 R2268
0 0
R5/P0
R4.6/P5
R0.2/P0
4.9
R2238
0
C2217
C2216
10k
4 6
J R2228
4700
1u
16V C2222 C2225 L2204
LVD
C2213 3300p
R2223 C2215 XX C2227 C2245 C2246 R2264 R2265
47u C2233 10k
6.3V 4700 0.01u 5p CT2200 220p 330p 10k
0.01u
C2219 C2224
1u 3.3u C2228 CT2200
16V 16V 18p AFC
R2220
C2214 8200
1000p D2200 C2218 R2233 C2223
R2225 R2224 CL2207 R2219 0.1u 33k XX
220 XX
220 1500
K CSM 24
PAL/XNT JC-20 BOARD (11/14)
05
AFC
4-25 4-26 JC-20 (4/14)
DSR-50/50P
JC-20 (VFD (VIDEO DSP, D/A CONVERTER)) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-15 for JC-20 printed wiring board. • See page 4-148 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
JC-20 BOARD (5/14)
A VFD(VIDEO DSP,D/A CONVERTER)
-REF.NO.:20,000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R:REC MODE
P:PB MODE
B
L3302 R3310
10uH 470
19 AFC_3V
JC-20 BOARD (4/14) R3318 R3319 R3308 R3315
510 330 470 470
L3300 3.1
10uH
CL3300
2.9
J_1.9V
C3302 C3305 C3306 Q3300
22u 22u 0.01u 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO 3.1
2.3
VBUS0
VBUS1
VBUS2
VBUS3
VBUS4
VBUS5
VBUS6
VBUS7
XVEN
TUVS
TUSV
6.3V C3303 6.3V
0.01u CL3301
C 2.9
Q3301
2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
2.3
3.1
CL3302
2.8 Q3302
2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
25 R3316
0 2.2
JC-20 BOARD (14/14) Y_SIKISA
CR_OUT
CB_OUT
D CL3303
C_OUT
CL3304
L3301 Y_OUT
10uH
J_3V
R3309 R3312 R3314
C3301 C3304 4700 4700 4700
0.01u R3301 R3304 R3307
0.01u 1500 3300 3300
GND
C3300
R0/P2
22u
0.9
0.6
0.6
0.8
0.8
3.1
2.9
2.9
3.1
2.8
2.6
3.1
2.6
2.6
3.1
2.6
3.1
6.3V
0.8 1 1 0 0 2 2.7
E 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61
4
C3307 JC-20 BOARD (1/14)
10u
10V
24 25 26 27 28
2
120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
CAM_Y0 C3308
Y0 0.01u
CAM_Y1 2.8 3.1
F Y1
Y2
CAM_Y2 2.8
CAM_Y3
Y3 R3320
14 CAM_Y4 0 1.4
Y4
0
JC-20 BOARD (2/14) CAM_Y5 1.4
Y5
R3300
CAM_Y6 2.8
Y6 VFD_VD
CAM_Y7 0 2.6
Y7 VFD_HD
CAM_FLD 1.6 1.4 MOE
CAM_C0 R3311
AFCK 0
JC00 1.2 1.5
CAM_C1
G JC01
CAM_C2
2 CL3305 VBUS0 CL3306
VBUS0
JC02 L3303 IC3301 TC7SU04FU(TE85R) C3314
CAM_C3 0.01u VBUS1 CL3307
18 JC03
CAM_C4
CAM_VD 0 IC3300 2.8 MVO 10uH
2.8
IC3302
VBUS1
5
JC-20 BOARD (3/14) JC04 CAM_HD 0 2.6 MHO 1.4 TC7WH04FU(TE12R) R3324 VBUS2 CL3308
CAM_C5 IC3300 VBUS2
2
0
JC05 CAM_C7 M65511FP-R60S 0.9 MY07 1.3 1.3 2.8
CAM_C6 VBUS3 CL3309
8
JC06 CAM_C6 R1.7/P1.9 1 MY06 1.5 VBUS3
CAM_C7
7
JC07 CAM_C5 R1.1/P1 1.3 MY05 1.3 2.8 VBUS4
29 VBUS4
6
AFCK CAM_C4 R1.2/P1 1.5 MY04 R3317 1.5 CL3310
X3300
VBUS5
5
SPCK0
H 22 AFH
CAM_HD R1.2/P1.1 0.6 MY03 1M 13.5MHz
CL3311
VBUS5 30
CAM_VD TDO 2.8 0.6 MY02 C3309 VBUS6 JC-20 BOARD (6/14)
C3311
JC-20 BOARD (4/14) VD
WEVN
CAM_FLD TDI 2.8 1.1 MY01
10u
6.3V XX
C3312
5p IC3302 VBUS7
CL3312
VBUS6
TCK 1 MY00 VBUS7
C3310 CT3300 CL3313
TMS 2.8 R0.8/P0.4 2.8 0.01u TUVS
TUVS
DATA_TO_MS_VSP 2.6 2.6 CT3300 CL3314
R3313 XVEN
DATA_FROM_MS_VSP 0 VFD
SPCK
IC3301 0
CL3315
XVEN
XMS_SCK_VSP 2.7 R0.7/P0.4 0 TUSV
I XCS_VFD 2.7 0 CL3316
TUSV
2.8 TRCK
2.8
VFD_OE
CL3323
DA135
31
R1.1/P0.9
R1.4/P1.1
R0.8/P3.2
R1.3/P3.2
R1.3/P3.2
R1.6/P3.2
R1.2/P3.2
R1.2/P3.2
R1.2/P3.2
R1.4/P3.2
JC-20 BOARD (14/14)
OSDHD
R1.1/P1
R1.3/P1
IC3303 CLK135
32
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 IC3303 JC-20 BOARD (7/14)
J 0 0 0 0 0
MB90097PFV-G-120-BND
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
0.6
1.4
2.8
10
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
OSDVD 5
R3325
9
JC-20 BOARD (1/14)
0 0 1.5
8
0
7
C3313
0.01u
6
XRST_VSP R3326 XX 0 2.8
R3323
5
0 CL3318
0 2.8
VREF XSYS_RESET
4
K FRRV
CL3319 0 0.3
OSD_SO 33
3
R3322 0 2.8 2.8
TRRV XCS_OSD
2
JC-20 BOARD (11/14)
R3321 CL3320 2.6 2.9
XOSD_SCK
1
0
26 XMS_SCK_VSP
XVSP_SCK
JC-20 BOARD (9/14) XCS_VFD
XCS_VFD
DATA_TO_MS_VSP
VSP_SI
CAM_C2
CAM_C0
CAM_Y4
CAM_Y2
CAM_Y0
CAM_C3
CAM_C1
CAM_Y7
CAM_Y6
CAM_Y5
CAM_Y3
CAM_Y1
DATA_FROM_MS_VSP
VSP_SO
L XRST_VSP
XRST_VSP R3302
XX
R3305
XX
SIGNAL PATH
R3303 R3306
TMS 0 0 VIDEO SIGNAL
TMS
E-E
TCK
27 TCK
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA
CAM_HD
CAM_C0
CAM_C1
CAM_C2
CAM_C3
CAM_C4
CAM_C5
CAM_C6
CAM_C7
CAM_Y0
CAM_Y1
CAM_Y2
CAM_Y3
CAM_Y4
CAM_Y5
CAM_Y6
CAM_Y7
MY00
MY01
MY02
MY03
MY04
MY05
MY06
MY07
MHO
MVO
MOE
JC-20 BOARD (11/14) CL3317 TDI
TD02 REC
CL3321
CL3322
M PB
TDO
E-E
28 TDO3
JC-20 BOARD (6/14)
MHO
MY00
MY01
MY02
MY03
MY04
MY05
MY06
MY07
AFH
JC00
JC01
JC02
JC03
JC04
JC05
JC06
JC07
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
29
N JC-20 BOARD (14/14)
05
VFD (VIDEO DSP, D/A CONVERTER)
JC-20 (5/14) 4-27 4-28
DSR-50/50P
JC-20 (SFD) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-15 for JC-20 printed wiring board. • See page 4-148 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
JC-20 BOARD (6/14)
A SFD
-REF.NO.:20,000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R:REC MODE
P:PB MODE
*:IMPOSSIBLE TO MEASURE THE
39-1
B VOLTAGE AT THE MARKED POINTS.
XACC
XENA
DIR
FCLR
FRL
C4410 C4411
10p 10p
39-2
R4409 X4400
0 24.576MHz
TDO3
28 JC-20 BOARD (5/14) TDO3
R4410
XX
R4443
TCK 47
TCK
TMS
34 JC-20 BOARD (11/14) TMS
TDO5
C TD05
CL4434
R4411
TMS
TCK
0
XRST_VSP
C4400 R4400
2.2u 47
6.3V
R4402
R1.4/P0.3
R2.8/P1.7
330
R2.8/P0
D SFD_FCK
FCK0
C4401 CL4400 C4407 0.001u
2.8
2.8
1.3
1.3
1.3
2.8
2.8
2.8
LRCK0 JS7001 0.047u
SFD_LRCK 0 R4403 2 2 0 0
BCK0 R4401 10k L4403
SFD_BCK 1 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4700 1.5uH
35 JC-20 BOARD (12/14)
SOA
ADAI1
3 R4404
ADAO1 C4402 2
SIC 10k
0.001u D4400
SOB KV1470TL1-3
32 39 JC-20 BOARD (8/14)
CL7003
CL7002
CL7001
C4408
0.001u
2.8 TDO3
76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26
1.6 2.8
E LOCK_MCK L4400
10uH 2.8
TDO4
OCK
FCK0 1.4
SFD_FCK
LRCK0 C4404
C4406
10u 1.3
30
SFD_LRCK 0.01u 6.3V
BCK0
SFD_BCK R4445
ADAI1 0 1.2 2
SOA
ADAO1 2 LBUS3
SIC R4444
0 1.2 LBUS2
F R4405
R2.8/P2.1 LBUS1
FCK0 0 0.8 LBUS0
39-3
36 JC-20 BOARD (14/14) LRCK0 R4406 0 1.4
R4407
2.8 IC4400 2.8
BCK0 0 1.4 2.7 XCS_SFD
IC4400 39-4
HG73C050TETL
2.7 XMECHA_SCK
R4446
0 1.4 R0.8/P0.4 DATA_FROM_MECHA
BCK
2 2.6 DATA_TO_MECHA
R4447
G LRCK
ADAI1
0 1.5 2 J_3V
* 2
ADAO1 * 2 SFD_3V
* TBUS7
SOB
C4409 XX * TBUS6 SFD_1.9V
SID
1.4 R0.4/P0.7 TBUS5
L4401 10uH 31 TBUS4
J_1.9V
L4402 10uH GND
H 37 JC-20 BOARD (14/14)
J_3V
C4403 C4405
10u 10u
6.3V 6.3V
GND
0.8
0.9
0.6
0.6
0.8
0.8
2 1 1
VBUS0 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75
VBUS0 1.4 0 0 2 0 0 2
R0/P2
VBUS1
0.5
VBUS1
VBUS2
R0.4/P0.7
VBUS2 40-1
VBUS3
I VBUS3
VBUS4
VBUS4
VBUS5
VBUS5
30 JC-20 BOARD (5/14) VBUS6
R4408
VBUS6
VBUS7 0
VBUS7
TUVS
TUVS
XVEN C4412
VBUS0
VBUS1
VBUS2
VBUS3
VBUS4
VBUS5
VBUS6
VBUS7
TBUS0
TBUS1
TBUS2
TBUS3
XVEN 0.01u
TUVS
XVEN
TUSV
TUTS
SEN
TUSV
TUSV
J TRCK 40-2
DATA_FROM_MECHA
VSP_SO SFD_1.9V
DATA_TO_MECHA
VSP_SI
XCS_SFD 40 JC-20 BOARD (7/14)
SFD_3V
38 JC-20 BOARD (9/14) XCS_SFD
XMECHA_SCK
XVSP_SCK
XRST_VSP
XRST_VSP
K 40-3
SIGNAL PATH
XRST_VSP
VIDEO SIGNAL 40-4
AUDIO
Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
REC
L 40-5
PB
05
SFD
4-29 4-30 JC-20 (6/14)
DSR-50/50P
JC-20 (TFD) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-15 for JC-20 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
JC-20 BOARD (7/14)
A TFD NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
-REF.NO.:20,000 SERIES- R:REC MODE
XX MARK:NO MOUNT P:PB MODE
RF_6V 45 JC-20 BOARD (9/14)
41 JC-20 BOARD (8/14) 41-1
CN4401 22P
B 22 RF 6V
21 RF 6V
20 C1ERRP
C4420
40-1 0.01u 19 GND
CL4402
TDO5
TDO4
TMS
TCK
18 1.9V
17 1.9V
16 3V
R1.4/P0.3
R0.9/P0.5
15 3V
2.8
2.8
2.8
14 5V
C
0
RP-234 BOARD (1/2)
100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 13 5V
XCS_TRX CL4408 CN203
12 XCS_TRX THROUGH THE
XCS_TRF CL4409
11 XCS_TRF FRJ-1 FLAT CABLE
40-2 DRP_SI CL4410 (SEE PAGE 4-11)
40 JC-20 BOARD (6/14) 10 DRP_SI
DRP_SO CL4411
9 DRP_SO
XDRP_SCK CL4412
2 2.8
8 MSCK
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75
1
SFD_1.9V XRST_VSP CL4413
7 XRST
2
SWP CL4414
D SFD_3V 6 SWP
3
DRP CL4415
TUTS 0
5 CLK150
4
SC_WD CL4416
40-3 TBUS0 R0.4/P0.7
4 SC_WD
5
CONT_E CL4417
TBUS1 R0.4/P0.7 2.8
3 CONT_E
6
40-4 CONT_O CL4418
TBUS2 R0.4/P0.7 2.8
2 CONT_O
7
DSWP CL4435
40-5 TBUS3 R0.4/P0.7
1 DSWP
8
TBUS4 R0.4/P0.7
9
WR01 TBUS5 R0.4/P0.7
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
WR01
RDX TBUS6 R0.4/P0.7 2.8
E RDX
FRRV
FRRV TBUS7 R0.4/P0.7
TRRT
TRRT SEN 0.5 IC4401 CL4437
CN4402 22P
DRP CRCK 0.9 IC4401 22 N.C.
DRP CXD3129R-T6 CL4438
SWP TXDT0 R1/P0 21 N.C.
SWP HPCK CL4419
ALE TXDT1 R1/P0 2.8 20 HPCK
ALE XTSY CL4420
DXXA10 TXDT2 R1/P0 2.8 19 XTSY
DXXA10
D24A00 TXDT3 R1/P0 18 GND
D24A00 XTDT0 CL4421
F D25A01
D25A01
D26A02
TXDT4
TXST
R1/P0
XTDT1 CL4422
17 XTDT0
0 2.8 16 XTDT1
D26A02
D27A03 HPCK R0/P1 15 GND
42 JC-20 BOARD (9/14) D27A03 CRCK CL4423
D28A04 XTSY 0 14 CRCK
D28A04
D29A05 XTDT0 R0/P0.8 13 GND RP-234 BOARD (1/2)
D29A05 TXDT0 CL4424 CN202
D30A06 XTDT1 R0/P0.8 2.8 12 TXDT0
D30A06 TXDT1 CL4425 THROUGH THE
D31A07 11 TXDT1 FRJ-1 FLAT CABLE
D31A07 TXDT2 CL4426
DXXA08 10 TXDT2 (SEE PAGE 4-11)
DXXA08 TXDT3 CL4427
DXXA09 9 TXDT3
G DXXA09
XDVCN
TXDT4 CL4428
8 TXDT4
XDVCN
LIP_SLEEP 7 GND
LIP_SLEEP TXST CL4429
LPS 6 TXST
LPS 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
FP 5 GND
OFR ATF CL4430
1.4
2
2.8
2.8
0.6
1.4
1.4
1.4
2.5
R2.5/P1.5
R2.1/P1.5
R2.2/P1.2
R1.4/P0.6
R0.9/P1.3
R1.2/P1.8
R2/P1.3
0.3
2.4
2.4
2.8
XRST_LINK 4 ATF
XRST_LINK CAP_EVR CL4431
XRST_PHY 3 CAP_EVR
XRST_PHY REEL_EVR CL4432
2 REEL_EVR
CL4401
1 CLK135
H R4413
DXXA10
DXXA08
DXXA09
D24A00
D25A01
D26A02
D27A03
D28A04
D29A05
D30A06
D31A07
0
WR01
FRRV
TRRT
SWP
RDX
DRP
ALE
XRST_VSP
C4415 0.01u
GND
J_1.9V
I 43 JC-20 BOARD (14/14)
J_3V
VIDEO_+5V
ATF
ATF
CAP_EVR
CAP_EVR
REEL_EVR
REEL_EVR
XCS_TRX
XCS_TRX
XCS_TRF CL4433
XCS_TRF
J DRP_SI
DRP_SI
SIGNAL PATH
DRP_SO
DRP_SO
XDRP_SCK
44 JC-20 BOARD (10/14)
XDRP_SCK VIDEO SIGNAL
SWP AUDIO
SWP
DRP Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
DRP
SC_WD
SC_WD
CONT_E
CONT_E REC
CONT_O
CONT_O
K DSWP
DSWP PB
32 JC-20 BOARD (5/14) CLK135
05
TFD
JC-20 (7/14) 4-31 4-32
DSR-50/50P
JC-20 (DV INTERFACE) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-15 for JC-20 printed wiring board.
IL-013 (DV CONNECTOR) PRINTED WIRING BOARD AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
– Ref. No.: IL-013 board; 10,000 series –
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A
JC-20 BOARD (8/14) IL-013 BOARD
DV INTERFACE DV CONNECTOR
-REF.NO.:20,000 SERIES- R4430 -REF.NO.:10,000 SERIES-
R4425 XX
XX MARK:NO MOUNT 0
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
B R:REC MODE
P:PB MODE 39-1
R391
0
D31A07
D30A06
D29A05
D28A04
D27A03
D26A02
D25A01
D24A00
DXXA10
RDX
WR01
ALE
XACC
DIR
XRST_LINK
39-2
CN392
CN391 CN392 DV IN/OUT
R1.2/P1.8
R0.9/P1.3
R1.4/P0.6
R2.2/P1.2
R2.1/P1.5
R2.5/P1.5
6P 6P
R2/P1.3
NTPB 6 1 VP
0.3
2.8
2.5
2.8
2.8
2.8 0 0 2 TPB 5 2 VG
2.8
GND 4 3 NTPB
C 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21
NTPA 3 4 TPB
TPA 2 5 NTPA
GND 1 6 TPA
R392
2 0
60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
LBUS3 2.8 XDVCN
LBUS2 2.8 XRST_PHY
LBUS1 R2.8/P2.1 0 LIP_SLEEP
D LBUS0 2.8
2
R4412 0 1.4
2.8
XENA R2.8/P1.7 2.8
FRL 0
0
IC4402 1.3
0
R4431 R4434
12k
R4436
XX
CN4400
6P
12k
IC4402 1 GND
FCLR R2.8/P0 SN104266PN-TEB 1.9 CL4405
E
9
2 TPA
2.8 1.9 CL4406
8
3 NTPA
0
7
4 GND
0 CL4407
39 JC-20 BOARD (6/14)
6
5 TPB
2.8 R4437 R4438 CL4404
56 56
5
6 NTPB
1.9 0.5% 0.5%
4
R4435
3
CL4403 0
2.8 C4421
1u
2
F R4432
0 R4440 R4442
SIGNAL PATH
1
R4439 56 56
10k 0.5% 0.5%
0.5%
R4433
XX
R4441
VIDEO SIGNAL
10k
C4422 AUDIO
220p
0.5% SIGNAL
Y/CHROMA
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
REC
2.8 2 2.8
2.8
2.8
1.2
2.8
1.3
PB
G
R4424
R4421 XX
0
R4426 XX
R4427 XX
39-3
R4416
0
39-4
R4418 XX
R4419 XX
R4420 0
R4423
L4404 R4415 0
10uH 0
J_3V
H
SFD_3V
C4414 R4428 R4429
C4417
R4417
SFD_1.9V C4413 C4416 R4414
XX
10u XX
XX
XX
0.01u 6.3V 0.01u XX
C4418 C4419
R4422
LPS
0.1u XX
FP
XX
GND
41 JC-20 BOARD (7/14) 41-1
05
4-33 4-34
DV INTERFACE DV CONNECTOR
JC-20 (8/14) / IL-013
DSR-50/50P
JC-20 (MECHANISM CONTROL 1) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-15 for JC-20 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
JC-20 BOARD (9/14)
A
MECHANISM CONTROL 1 NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
-REF.NO.:20,000 SERIES- R:REC MODE
XX MARK:NO MOUNT P:PB MODE
45 RF_6V
JC-20 BOARD (7/14) L5001 10uH
J_3V J_3V 49
46
B JC-20 BOARD (14/14)
GND GND JC-20 BOARD (10/14)
Q5001
R5071 2SB624-T1BV4
XX
47 SW_6V
5.5 5.4
JC-20 BOARD (14/14) D5001
MS91 MA132WK-TX
23 WEVN
MS118 4.8
JC-20 BOARD (4/14) LVD
R5004
1k
MS74
XVSP_SCK
C XCS_VFD
MS17
MS76
IC5001
VSP_SI
MS75 IC5001
VSP_SO S-81350HG-KD-T1
26 MS92
0.2
JC-20 BOARD (5/14) XRST_VSP 2.8
MS106 Q5002
FRRV UN5213-TX
MS108
TRRV
CL5738
VREF
D 1 2 3
5.1
5.5
0
0
0
C5004 C5005
4 3 2 1 10u C5006 6.8u
C5016 10V 0.01u 16V
R5057
0.01u 1k
C5003
E IC5007 0.01u
IC5007
TC7W241FU-TE12R
MS112
MS19
MS76
MS75
MS74
C5002
0.01u
5 6 7 8
0
0
0
2.8
R5058
1k
R0.8/P0.4
5.1
2.8
2.6
2.7
2.8
5.1
MS111
MS75 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
VSP_SO
MS76
VSP_SI
38 XCS_SFD
MS38 IC5002
JC-20 BOARD (6/14) MS74
XVSP_SCK
G XRST_VSP
MS92 IC5002
MB88146APFV-G-BND-ER
OFR
CL5740 MS15
WR01
MS16
RDX
MS106
FRRV
MS107 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
TRRT
MS61
R2.7/P0.3
R2.6/P2.1
R2.6/P2.1
5
0
0
0
DRP R5066
MS60 100k
SWP
H ALE
MS13
MS26
D24A00
MS27
100
100
100
100
100
D25A01 R5067
MS28 R5009 100
D26A02 10k
42 D27A03
MS29
R5013
R5008
R5005
R5014
R5015
JC-20 BOARD (7/14) MS30 R5003
D28A04 22k
MS31
D29A05
MS32
I D30A06
D31A07
MS33
MS35
DXXA08
MS36
DXXA09
MS37
DXXA10
MS14
XDVCN 50-1
MS84
LIP_SLEEP
MS77
LPS
MS10
XRST_LINK 50
J XRST_PHY
MS11
JC-20 BOARD (10/14)
68 CL5748 MS8
PB/XREC
JC-20 BOARD (4/14)
50-2
Y_CLP_ERR
12 CR_CLP_ERR
JC-20 BOARD (2/14)
CB_CLP_ERR
K 2 HUE_ADJ
JC-20 BOARD (1/14)
CL5947
48 FIFO_MUTE
JC-20 BOARD (14/14)
05
MECHANISM CONTROL 1
JC-20 (9/14) 4-35 4-36
DSR-50/50P
JC-20 (MECHANISM CONTROL 2) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-15 for JC-20 printed wiring board. • See page 4-148 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
JC-20 BOARD (10/14)
A MECHANISM CONTROL 2
-REF.NO.:20,000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R:REC MODE
P:PB MODE 49 J_3V
JC-20 BOARD (9/14) GND IC5008
B R5069
100k
MS91
MS92
MS105
MS104
MS99
MS98
MS97
MS108
MS107
MS96
MS115
MS117
MS116
MS114
MS113
MS112
MS111
MS9
MS106
MS119
MS118
R5050
SIGNAL PATH 100k IC5006 UNSW_3.0V
R5041 220k
56
REC/PB R5039 47k IC5006
JC-20 BOARD (14/14)
AK6480AM-E2 3.1 0 2.8 0 0 0 0
C5015
R5051 100k 0.01u
Drum speed servo 100k
2.7 2.8 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
8
R5052
C Drum phase servo
C5011 R5040 100k MS74 2.7 2.8
R5047
7
1u
CL5968
CL5967
CL5966
R5038 100k 100k
MS75 R0.8/P0.4 2.7
R5049 100k
6
Drum servo(speed and phase) IC5008
C5012
0.01u C5014 0.01u MS76 2.6 TC74VHC08FT(EL)
5
Capstan servo(speed and phase)
R5037
4700
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
D R5070 0 2.8 0 0 0 0
100k
XC_IN
XCC_DOWN
57
2.8
1.4
0.2
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.4
1.4
0.6
2.8
2.8
1.3
2.3
1.4
2.7
JC-20 BOARD (11/14)
3 * * 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1.6 C5013
0.01u
120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91
E MS39 CL5401
CN5005
1
50P
MODE_SW_A
MS40 CL5402
2 MODE_SW_B
C5008
10p
X5001
34 36 37 MS95 MS41 CL5403
3 MODE_SW_C
20MHz 1.1 2.8 MS42 CL5404
33
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
1
4 MODE_SW_D
1.2 35 2.7
2
5 GND
2.7 MS55 CL5406
C5009
3
6 TAPE_LED_ON
10p 2.7 MS53 CL5407
MS87
4
7 TAPE_TOP
F 2.8
CL5749
R5059 R5060
MS54 CL5408
5
1k 100k 8 TAPE_END
2.8 0 MS85
6
9 GND
C5007 0.001u 2.8 0 MS84 MS20 CL5410
7
MS83 10 XC_IN
MS8 R0/P2.8 0.2 MS22 CL5411
100k
470k
R5018
8
11 XCC_DOWN
100k 0 2.6
MS82 MS97 CL5412
R5045
9
12 L_CASSETTE
MS81
R5046
R5044
MS10 2.8 2.7 100k MS85 CL5413
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 13 REC_PROOF
R5019 MS96 CL5414
MS11 2.8 2.7 MS80
100k 14 DEW_DET
2.6 0 MS79
15 GND
MS13 0 2.7 MS99 CL5416
G R5020 MS14 2.8 2.8
MS78
MS77 MS98 CL5417
16 T_ELTN_ERR
51 CL5965 470k
MS15 2.8
IC5003 2.6 MS76
MS113 CL5418
17 S_ELTN_ERR
XMUTN 18 SREEL_FG
JC-20 BOARD (14/14) MS16 2.8 IC5003 R0.8/P0.4 MS114 CL5419
R5068 MS75
1k MB91192PFF-G-119-BND-ER 19 TREEL_FG
MS17 2.7 2.7 MS74 CL5420
20 REEL_EVR
2.5 CL5421
21 CAP_EVR
XCS_DSP MS19 2.8 2.9 MS72 CL5422
22 CHIME_SCK
52 XVSP_SCK MS20 R5025 10k 0 0.4 MS71 CL5423
23 CHIME_SDA
JC-20 BOARD (13/14) VSP_SO CL5424 CM-59 BOARD (1/3)
H VSP_SI MS22
R5048
10k 0 0.5
CL5750
MS69 L5002
24 CHIME_VDD
CN001
1uH 25 GND THROUGH THE
MS23 2.7 0.8 MS68 MS47 CL5301
CL5747 FVJ-1 FLAT CABLE
MS87 26 DRUM_ON
XCS_DSP MS24 2.8 MS48 CL5302 (SEE PAGE 4-105)
R5042 R5053
MS74 100k 100k 27 DRUM_FWD
XVSP_SCK MS68 CL5303
53 2.8
28 DRUM_PWM
MS75
JC-20 BOARD (14/14) VSP_SO MS26 R2.5/P1.5 MS116 CL5304
MS76 29 DRUM_FG
VSP_SI MS27 R2.1/P1.5 2.8 R5043 MS117
100k 30 DRUM_PG
MS28 R2.2/P1.2 1.4 MS63 MS63 CL5306
31 DRUM_MASTER_CLK
I MS29
MS30
R1.4/P0.6
R0.9/P1.3 1.4
R5055 1k
CL4436
MS61 MS45 CL5308
32 GND
33 CAP_ON
MS46 CL5309
34 CAP_FWD
38 MS69
MS115 CL5311
35 CAP_PWM
36 CAP_FG
R5026 37 GND
1k MS43 CL5313
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 38 REEL_ON
MS44 CL5314
R1.2/P1.8 0 0 0 0 0 0 39 REEL_FWD
0.3
2.4
2.4
2.5
2.7
2.7
2.7
2.7
2.7
2.7
2.7
2.7
2.7
2.9
2.9
0.4
2.7
2.7
1.4
0.2
1.4
MS71 CL5315
R2/P1.3
J MS119 CL5316
40 REEL_PWM
41 REEL_M_FG
42 GND
MS49 CL5318
C5021 XX 43 CM(+)
MS50 CL5319
C5022 XX 44 CM(-)
MS51 CL5320
C5023 XX 45 CM_LIMIT_ON
MS52 CL5321
46 CM_LIMIT_DET
C5024 CL5322
XX 47 CM_LIMIT_EVR
MS104 CL5323
K
1k
48 LM(+)
R5033 1k
1k
R5035 1k
MS105 CL5324
49 LM(-)
R5032
R5034
50-1 MS9 CL5325
MS60
MS57
MS58
MS60
MS59
MS56
50 HI_C/R_SW
MS31
MS32
MS33
MS35
MS36
MS37
MS38
50
JC-20 BOARD (9/14)
CHIME_VDD
50-2 58
R5028 47k CHIME_SDA
JC-20 BOARD (11/14)
R5029 47k CHIME_SCK
R5030 47k
L XMODE_SCK
MS81 R5031 47k CAP_EVR
MS83 REEL_EVR
MODE_SO
54 MS82 DRP
MS41
MS44
MS43
MS55
MS42
MS45
MS46
MS39
MS40
MS47
MS48
MS49
MS50
MS51
MS52
MS53
MS54
MODE_SI MS56
JC-20 BOARD (11/14) MS7 CONT_E
XSYS_RESET MS57
MS72 CONT_O
XCS_MECHA MS59
C5020 SC_WD 44
XX MS60
MS7
SWP JC-20 BOARD (7/14)
MS78
XDRP_SCK
MS79
M
C5019
C5018
C5017
DRP_SO
XX
XX
XX
MS80
DRP_SI
MS23
XCS_TRF
MS24
R5061 XCS_TRX
1k MS95
ONBOAD55 ATF
R5062 1k MS58
ONBOAD73 DSWP
55 R5063 1k
ONBOAD78
JC-20 BOARD (11/14) R5064 1k
ONBOAD79
N ONBOAD80
R5065
1k
05
MECHANISM CONTROL 2
4-37 4-38 JC-20 (10/14)
DSR-50/50P
JC-20 (MODE CONTROL) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-15 for JC-20 printed wiring board. • See page 4-148 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
JC-20 BOARD (11/14)
A MODE CONTROL MO7
-REF.NO.:20,000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT 0
Q6003
UN9113J-(K8).SO
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE 2.8 2.8
MO100
MO99
MO98
MO97
MO96
MO95
R:REC MODE
P:PB MODE R6059 MO73
R6057
5600 1500 CHIME_SCK
MO72
B CL6531
CN6002 20P
CL6539 2.4
2
MO71
CHIME_SDA
CHIME_VDD
58 JC-20 BOARD (10/14)
ONBOAD55 20 TMS/ONBOAD55 LANC_IN 19 R6058 R6064
R6085 100
R6082 100
R6083 100
R6084 100
CL6540 L6003
CL6532 2200 4700
R6063
2.8 6 1 2.9 1uH
ONBOAD73 18 TCK/ONBOAD73 LANC_OUT 17
3.3
CL6533 CL6541
55 JC-20 BOARD (10/14) ONBOAD78 16 TDI/ONBOAD78 XLANC_PWR_ON 15 2.2 2.8
CL6534 CL6542 3 4
ONBOAD79 14 TDOB/ONBOAD79 UNSW_6V 13
CL6535 CL6543
ONBOAD80 Q6004 5
12 ONBOAD80 UNSW_3V 11 XP4401-TXE
10 GND B.UP_3V 9 2.2 2.8
R6065 1k CL6547 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3
TD02 8 GND GND 7 2.8
R6066 1k CL6548 CL6544
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
N.C. Q6005
6 XRESET 5
C 27 JC-20 BOARD (5/14)
TMS
R6067 1k CL6549
4 N.C. EJECT 3
CL6545
R6028
2SB624-T1BV4
2.8
R6068 1k CL6550 CL6546 XX
TCK 2 N.C. PARSLEY_MODE 1 MO71
JIG PIN
R6062 3300
R6060 3300
R6061 3300
TD05
R6013 470k
R6048 470k
R6052 470k
R6050 470k
R6078 470k
R6011 R6017
34 JC-20 BOARD (6/14) TMS XX 100 3.1 3
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75
1
TCK 0
2
R6018 2.8 R6054 1k MO73
59 JC-20 BOARD (13/14) 1k
3
XSYS_RESET
2.8 R6055 1k MO72
R6019
4
D 60 JC-20 BOARD (14/14) XSYS_RESET MO72 100 2.8 2.8 R6056 1k MO71
5
MO73 R6020 100 2.8
61 JC-20 BOARD (14/14) J_3V
6
MO7 0 2.9
7
UNSW_3.0V
R6025 100k
62 JC-20 BOARD (14/14) SW_6V
0 R6053 1k MO68
IC6004
8
MO9 R6024 XX 2.8 0 MO67
GND
9
R2.5/P2.8 R6090 1k
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
MO9 0 R0.4/P0 R6091 1k MO65
XSYS_RESET R2.5/
MO22 IC6001 2.9 R6092 1k MO64 2.8 P2.8
TC7S04FU(TE85R)
XCS_MECHA
E 54 JC-20 BOARD (10/14) MODE_SI
MO48
IC6001
2.9 5 4
IC6004
MO49 S579637PZ-TEB 0 R6093 1k MO62
MODE_SO
MO50 3 R6094 1k MO61
XMODE_SCK
MO18 C6009 0.1u 1 2 3
XCC_DOWN R6016 R6081
57 JC-20 BOARD (10/14) MO68 10k 1k 3.1 C6012 0.1u
XC_IN R0.4/
MO96 MO18 0 2.9 MO58 P0
PAL/XNT
24 JC-20 BOARD (4/14) MO95
R6079
R6022
CSM 1k
10k
F 70 JC-20 BOARD (14/14) PAL/XNT
R6080
1k 3.1 0 MO55
MO22 2.9
1.5
L6001
10uH 1.2
XSYS_RESET 0
40 3
R6049
10M
X6002
32.768kHz
C6010
22p
OSD_SO
33 JC-20 BOARD (5/14)
C6011
XOSD_SCK
XCS_OSD
39 15p
G C6006
10u
C6007
0.01u
6.3V
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
R0/P3 0 0 3 3 3 3 3 3
R1.2/P1.8
2.9
2.9
1.6
1.5
2.8
2.8
2.6
0.2
2.7
MO25
S/XV R6027
MO26 1k
C6004
3 JC-20 BOARD (1/14) PB/XEE 0.1u
MO64
XI/O_SINC_HI
R6076
R6026
1k
10k
R6029
H 10k
R6030 XX R6040
47k
R6037 1k
R6032 10k R6077
3 1k
R6038 100
CN6001 30P 0 R6042
R6039 1k
R6041 1k
CL6501 R6033 100k 1M
0
BUCK_UP_+3V 1 R6034 100k
CL6502 MO38
XIC_RST 2 Q6011 Q6012 R6035 100k
CL6503 MO61 UN5213-TX UN5213-TX
XSLEEP 3 R6036 100k
0.022u
C6008
CL6504 MO62
MO_XWAKEUP 4
MO25
MO26
MO32
MO33
MO34
MO35
MO38
MO62
CL6505 X6001
I GND 5
CL6506 MO35
20MHz
HI_SCK 6
MO33 R6046 100k
GND 7
CL6508 L6007 MO34 R6047 100k
HI_SO 8
MO32 R6043 100k
GND 9
CL6510 R6095 100k
HI_SI 10
MO46
MO45
MO44
R6096 100k
R6089 0
R6088 0
R6087 0
R6086 0
GND 11
CL6512 R6069 XX R6097 100k
XCS_MO 12 L6008
CL6513 XX MO97 R6070 XX
J GND
XSYS_RST
13
14
CL6514 L6010 MO9 R6071 XX
VD-28 BOARD (12/15) CL6515 L6002 XX MO98
GND 15
CN703 CL6516 L6011 MO50 3 3.1
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
THROUGH THE MO_SCK 16
MO44
MO45
MO46
MO48
MO49
MO50
CL6517 L6004 XX MO99 2.8 0
FVJ-14 FLAT CABLE R6072
2
GND 17
CL6518 L6012 MO49 1k 0.3
(SEE PAGE 4-98)
3
MO_SO 18
CL6519 L6005 XX MO100 0.3 IC6003
4
GND 19
CL6520 MO48 2.8
R6073 IC6003
5
MO_SI 20
K 1k 2.9 TC74LCX157FT(EL) 3
6
GND 21 C6005
CL6522 L6014 MO58 2.9 2.8 0.01u
7
XCS_UVIC 22
CL6523 MO65 R6074 2.8
1k
8
UVIC_BUSY 23
CL6524 MO67
UVIC_SWIN 24 R6009
CL6525 MO55 470k
UVIC_GATE 25 R6075
CL6526 1k
OSD_SO_HI 26
GND 27
L OSD_SCK_HI 28
CL6528
CL6529
L6015 XX
L6016 XX
A.XUP
OSD_SW 29 A.MON.2 63 JC-20 BOARD (13/14)
CL6530 L6017 XX
XCS_OSD_HI 30 A.MON.1
05
MODE CONTROL
JC-20 (11/14) 4-39 4-40
DSR-50/50P
JC-20 (AUDIO 1) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-15 for JC-20 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
JC-20 BOARD (12/14)
A
AUDIO 1
-REF.NO.:20,000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
J_3V
65
JC-20 BOARD (14/14)
CN7001 8P R7009
CL7032 XX
CH1 OUT 1
CL7033 R7011 XX
B VD-28 BOARD (11/15)
GND(CH1 OUT)
CH2 OUT
2
CL7034 R7010 XX
C7015
XX
3 6.3V
CN605 CL7035 R7012 XX A.+5V
GND(CH2 OUT) 4
THROUGH THE CL7036 R7013 XX
JV-58 HARNESS CH3 OUT 5 JS7009 XX 66
CL7037 R7014 XX R7047 XX AUDIO_GND
GND(CH3 OUT) 6 JC-20 BOARD (14/14)
(SEE PAGE 4-95) CL7038 R7053 XX GND
CH4 OUT 7
CL7039 R7015 XX A.-5V
GND(CH4 OUT) 8 R7202
R7016 R7044 XX
XX XX 4 3 2 1
R7079 C7032
C R7001
0 C7023
C7028
XX
XX
R7078
XX
XX 4V XX
AU_CH1_OUT
R7002 0 6.3V
R7042
AU_GND1_OUT XX R7083 R7204
R7003 0 IC7003 IC7005 XX
R7029 IC7006 XX
AU_CH2_OUT XX XX C7030
R7004 0 R7027 XX XX C7025 XX
64 AU_GND2_OUT
R7005 0
XX
R7045
C7016
C7018
XX
8
XX
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
XX
XX
XX
1
JC-20 BOARD (14/14) AU_CH3_OUT 6.3V JS7008
R7006 0
7
XX
AU_GND3_OUT
R7082
R7007 0 R7054 XX
3
AU_CH4_OUT 5 6 7 8
D C7020
5
AU_GND4_OUT R7055 XX XX C7302
4
R7008 R7028 C7009 R7048 XX 4 3 2 1
5
0 XX XX XX
R7056 R7057 C7021
6.3V
XX XX
6
XX C7022 XX
C7024
7
R7051 R7052
C7014 R7043 XX XX C7019 XX
6.3V
8
XX XX XX
6.3V IC7009
9
XX
14 13 12 11 10
IC7008
C7017
XX
XX
6.3V
E
3
R7023
R7036
XX XX JS7007
2
XX 5 6 7 8
IC7002 R7038
1
C7007 XX R7046 R7049
XX
XX XX XX R7080
XX
R7024
8
XX
R7018
7
XX C7029
XX R7081
6
JS7006 R7065 XX
C7003 C7012 R7039 XX XX
F R7026
5
XX XX XX
XX C7027 R7076
6.3V R7033
XX XX XX C7031
XX R7203
C7010 4V R7077 XX
XX XX
R7201
R7030 XX
C7004 R7022 XX
XX XX
R7031 XX
SIC
JS7005
XX SOB
C7008 SOA
G XX
6.3V SFD_FCK
35
CL7040 JS7001 0 JC-20 BOARD (6/14)
SFD_BCK
CL7209 JS7002 0
SFD_LRCK
JS7003
0
R7050
Q7001 XX XPD_AD
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 XX
XPD_DA
DEM1
67
JC-20 BOARD (13/14)
DEM0
H
XX
EMP
IC7004
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
R7035 C7013
XX XX
R7037
XX
J R7019
XX R7020 XX
IC7001 R7032
XX R7040
XX
C7005 XX
XX
C7001 R7021
1
SIGNAL PATH XX R7017 XX R7034
XX XX
2
6.3V
3
AUDIO C7011 R7041
R7025
4
XX XX
SIGNAL XX
K C7002
XX C7006
PB XX
6.3V
05
AUDIO 1
4-41 4-42 JC-20 (12/14)
http://getMANUAL.com
DSR-50/50P
JC-20 (AUDIO 2) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-15 for JC-20 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
JC-20 BOARD (13/14)
A AUDIO 2
-REF.NO.:20,000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
CN7002 30P
CL7004
AU X1 IN 30 AU_X1_IN
CL7005
AU Y1 IN 29 AU_Y1_IN
B GND 28
CL7006
CL7007
AU_1_GND_IN
GND
27 AU_X2_IN
68
AU X2 IN
CL7008 JC-20 BOARD (14/14)
AU Y2 IN 26 AU_Y2_IN J_3V
CL7009
GND 25 AU_2_GND_IN
CL7010
AU X3 IN 24 AU_X3_IN
CL7011 R7068
23 AU_Y3_IN XX
AU Y3 IN
CL7012 A.MON.1
GND 22 AU_3_GND_IN
CL7013 R7069
AU_X4_IN XX
AU X4 IN 21
CL7014 A.MON.2
63
C AU Y4 IN 20
19
CL7015
AU_Y4_IN
AU_4_GND_IN
69 R7070
XX
JC-20 BOARD (11/14)
GND JC-20 BOARD (14/14)
CL7016 A.XUP
TC IN 18 TC_IN
VD-28 BOARD (11/15) CL7017 R7071
CN606 GND 17 TC/GNDIN XX
CL7018
THROUGH THE TC OUT 16 TC_OUT
CL7019 R7072
FVJ-13 FLAT CABLE XX
GND 15 TC/GNDOUT
CL7020
(SEE PAGE 4-95) 14 DSP_CS
DSP CS
CL7021 R7073
GND 13 GND XX
CL7022
D DSP SI 12 DSP_SI
R7074
GND 11 XX
CL7023
DSP SO 10 DSP_SO
R7075
GND 9 XX
CL7024
DSP SCK 8 DSP_SCK
CL7025 R7106 XX
NC 7
CL7026 R7105 XX
NC 6
CL7027 R7104 XX
NC 5
CL7028 R7103 XX
E NC 4
3
CL7029 R7102 XX
NC
CL7030 R7101 XX
NC 2
CL7031 R7100 XX
NC 1
EMP
R7066
XX
F DEM1
DEM0
75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51
67
JC-20 BOARD (12/14)
XPD_DA
XPD_AD
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76
CL7041
G
R7059
XX
R7060
XX CL7205
R7205
R7061 XX XX
R7062 XX
R7206
XX R7087
H R7063 XX XX CL7206
R7304 XX
R7207
R7086 XX
R7301 XX IC7007 XX
XX
CL7207
R7208
XX CL7208
R7058
XX CL7043
CL7042
R7303
R7302
I XX
XX R7088
XX
R7089
XX
C7033
XX
R7064
XX
XCS_DSP
C7026 IC7301
XX XX C7301
J XX
8
2
7
3
6
SIGNAL PATH
5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
AUDIO
SIGNAL
R7067
52
K REC
XX
JC-20 BOARD (10/14)
C7100
XX
6.3V
X7001
XX R7084 R7085
XX XX
05
L XVSP_SCK
VSP_SO
VSP_SI
JS7010
XX
XSYS_RESET
59
JC-20 BOARD (11/14)
AUDIO 2
JC-20 (13/14) 4-43 4-44
DSR-50/50P
JC-20 (POWER SUPPLY) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-15 for JC-20 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
SIGNAL PATH
A
JC-20 BOARD (14/14) VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO
SIGNAL
POWER SUPPLY CHROMA Y
-REF.NO.:20,000 SERIES-
REC
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE PB J_3V 61 JC-20 BOARD (11/14)
J_3V 65 JC-20 BOARD (12/14)
B CN1100 9P
SW +6V 1
CL1100 CL1182
J_1.9V
CL1101
EVR +3V 2 J_3V
CL1102 CL1179 43
VIDEO +5V 3 VIDEO_+5V
VD-28 BOARD (14/15) CL1103 JC-20 BOARD (7/14)
CN904 SW +3V 4
CL1104 CL1180
THROUGH THE GND 5 GND
VJ-106 HARNESS CL1105
VIDEO -5V 6
(SEE PAGE 4-102) CL1106
AUDIO +5V 7 R1238 R1237 J_1.9V
CL1107 IC1113
XX 0 25
AUDIO GND 8 5 R1234
PQ05TZ1U 2.8 J_3V JC-20 BOARD (5/14)
C AUDIO -5V 9
CL1108
6
XX 2
GND
6 5 4
LND101 Q1131
R1235 SI2301DS-T1
R1145 GND XX
XX
66
AUDIO_GND
A.-5V
CL1140 LND102
IC1113 R1236 R1230
2.8 2.8
IC1100
J_1.9V
37
0 10k C1196 J_3V JC-20 BOARD (6/14)
JC-20 BOARD (12/14) IC1100
A.+5V R1146 GND 0.033u TK11220BMCL
XX 1 2 3 4 5 0 GND
GND
CL1141 LND103 5.5 5 5 R1231
220k
R1147 GND J_3V 16
D XX R1232
10k
0.7
0
Q1132
R1229
0
GND
JC-20 BOARD (3/14)
CL1183
CL1184
CL1185
CL1186
CL1187
CL1142 LND104 2SC4081T106R
R1148 GND 1 2 3
XX
R1100 J_3V 46
C1195 2.8 1.3
XX JC-20 BOARD (9/14)
CL1143 LND105 47u
R1226 XX
R1227 XX
R1228 XX
R1225 XX
GND
R1224 XX
6.3V C1197 R1233
R1149 GND 1u 15k
XX C1193
C1191 C1189 C1190 XX
0.01u 0.01u 47u C1104 6.3V J_3V
68
CL1144 LND106 6.3V C1108 10u
XX 6.3V JC-20 BOARD (13/14)
GND
GND
C1102 C1192
E LND107
0.01u 0.1u
VIDEO_+5V 20
JC-20 BOARD (4/14)
GND GND
56 JC-20 BOARD (10/14) UNSW_3.0V
LND108
47 JC-20 BOARD (9/14) SW_6V VIDEO_-5V
GND 10
AU_CH1_OUT +5V
JC-20 BOARD (2/14)
AU_GND1_OUT GND
UNSW_3.0V
62 AU_CH2_OUT
SW_6V
F JC-20 BOARD (11/14)
GND
64 AU_GND2_OUT +5V 1
JC-20 BOARD (12/14) AU_CH3_OUT JC-20 BOARD (1/14)
GND
DPB_CBOUT AU_GND3_OUT
7 DPB_CROUT AU_CH4_OUT
JC-20 BOARD (1/14)
DPB_YOUT AU_GND4_OUT
LOCK_MCK
CL8048
CL8068
CL8074
CL8014
CL8016
CL8018
CL8020
CL8022
CL8024
CL8026
CL8028
CL8032
CL8034
CL8036
CL8038
CL8040
CL8042
CL8044
CL8046
CL8050
CL8056
CL8058
CL8060
CL8062
CL8064
CL8066
CL8070
CL8076
CL8078
CL8006
CL8002
CL8004
OCK
G SFD_FCK
AFH
SFD_LRCK
JC00
SFD_BCK
JC01
SOA
36
E-E
JC02 JC-20 BOARD (6/14)
SIC
JC03
BCK
AU_GND1_OUT 102
AU_X3_IN 112
AU_CH2_OUT 100
AU_X4_IN 108
AU_CH1_OUT 104
AU_3_GND_IN 110
AU_1_GND_IN 118
AU_4_GND_IN 106
AU_2_GND_IN 114
AU_X2_IN 116
AU_X1_IN 120
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
72
74
76
78
80
82
84
86
88
90
92
94
96
98
2
4
6
8
JC04
LRCK
JC05
DPB_YOUT
GND
DPB_CROUT
GND
DPB_CBOUT
GND
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
GND
JC00
JC01
JC02
JC03
JC04
JC05
JC06
JC07
N.C
J_3V
VIDEO_+5V
VIDEO_-5V
SIC
SID
SFDBCK
BCK
SFD_LRCK
LRCK
N.C
VFD_HD
GND
N.C
XVSP_SCK
VSP_SO
GND
DSP_SCK
DSP_SO
TC/GNDOUT
TC_OUT
AU_GND4_OUT
AU_CH4_OUT
AU_GND3_OUT
AU_CH3_OUT
AU_GND2_OUT
SOB
H JC06
SID
JC07
Y0
DI-73 BOARD (9/9)
120P
(SEE PAGE 4-67)
Y1
XCS_DSP
CN9500
29 Y2
XVSP_SCK 53
CN8001
E-E
JC-20 BOARD (5/14)
Y3 JC-20 BOARD (10/14)
VSP_SO
Y4
I Y5
VSP_SI
AU_4_GND_IN
AU_3_GND_IN
AU_2_GND_IN
AU_1_GND_IN
Y6
DPB_CROUT
DPB_CBOUT
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
VIDEO_+5V
LOCK_MCK
DPB_YOUT
FIFO/MUTE
VIDEO_-5V
XRST_VSP
AU_Y4_IN
AU_Y3_IN
AU_Y2_IN
AU_Y1_IN
TC/GNDIN
XCS_DSP
SFD_FCK
PB/XREC
PAL/XNT
Y7
DSP_CS
VFD_VD
VFD_OE
DSP_SI
VSP_SI
VD_HD
AU_X1_IN
SPCK2
DA135
TC_IN
A.+5V
A.+5V
A.+5V
MY00
MY01
MY02
MY03
MY04
MY05
MY06
MY07
A.-5V
A.-5V
MHO
N.C
J_3V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
SOA
SOB
OCK
AFH
N.C
AU_Y1_IN
MY00
AU_1_GND_IN
101
103
105
107
109
111
113
115
117
119
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63
65
67
69
71
73
75
77
79
81
83
85
87
89
91
93
95
97
99
1
7
9
MY01
AU_X2_IN
MY02
AU_Y2_IN
MY03
AU_2_GND_IN
J MY04
AU_X3_IN
CL8003
CL8009
CL8013
CL8015
CL8017
CL8019
CL8021
CL8023
CL8025
CL8027
CL8031
CL8039
CL8043
CL8049
CL8055
CL8057
CL8061
CL8063
CL8073
CL8075
CL8077
MY05
AU_Y3_IN
MY06
AU_3_GND_IN
MY07
AU_X4_IN 69
MHO
AU_Y4_IN JC-20 BOARD (13/14)
AU_4_GND_IN
GND
TC_IN
K VFD_OE TC/GNDIN
31
JC-20 BOARD (5/14) DA135 TC_OUT
VFD_HD
OSD_HD TC/GNDOUT
DSP_CS
70 JC-20 BOARD (11/14) PAL/XNT DSP_SI
DSP_SO
48 JC-20 BOARD (9/14) FIFO_MUTE
21 SPCK2 DSP_SCK
JC-20 BOARD (4/14) PB/XREC 51 JC-20 BOARD (10/14) XMUTN
L 60 JC-20 BOARD (11/14) XSYS_RESET
6 VD_HD
JC-20 BOARD (1/14) V_FROM_SYNCGEN
05
POWER SUPPLY
4-45 4-46 JC-20 (14/14)
DSR-50/50P
DI-73 (VIDEO D/A CONVERTER, SYNC SHIFTER, AUDIO A/D, D/A CONVERTER, AUDIO DSP, TIME CODE IN/OUT) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
– Ref. No.: DI-73 board; 10,000 series –
• For Printed Wiring Board.
• DI-73 board is four-layer print board. However, the patterns of
layers 2 to 3 have not been included in the diagram.
• There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model
is printed on this diagram.
• See page 4-153 for printed parts location.
• Chip transistor
C
B E
4
5 6
1 2
3
4-47
VIDEO D/A CONVERTER, SYNC SHIFTER,
AUDIO A/D, D/A CONVERTER, AUDIO DSP, TIME CODE IN/OUT
DI-73 4-48
DSR-50/50P
4-50
VIDEO D/A CONVERTER, SYNC SHIFTER,
AUDIO A/D, D/A CONVERTER, AUDIO DSP, TIME CODE IN/OUT
4-49 DI-73
DSR-50/50P
DI-73 (VIDEO D/A CONVERTER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-47 for DI-73 printed wiring board. • See page 4-149 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DI-73 BOARD (1/9)
A
VIDEO D/A CONVERTER
-REF.NO.:10,000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE Q9001 DPB_YOUT
2SC4081T106R
VIDEO_5V
L9002 DPB_CROUT
VIDEO_-5V 10uH 5
1 R9009
B J_3V
1k
DI-73 BOARD (9/9)
GND 3.1
Q9003
2SC4081T106R 5
R9028
Q9005
2SC4081T106R 5 6 3
C9005 C9007
47u 2.4
R9017
1k IC9007 1k
DPB_CBOUT DI-73 BOARD (9/9)
0.01u
6.3V
IC9001 3.2
IC9007
LM7131BCM5X
3.2 R9031
0
2.5 R9021 2.5
IC9001 R9032
LM7131BCM5X 0
R9012 0.7 5 0.7 5 470
5
0
0.6 5 -4.9 R9022 -4.9
2
470 FIFO_MUTE
-4.9 R9013 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
4
0.4 0.4 470
C C9015 C9020
4
22u 22u
4V IC9010
4V LM7131BCM5X
5
R9052 C9030
4 IC9010
C9031 220 33p
0.1u
IC9017 R9015
1k
R9027
1k
IC9017
C9033 TK11630UTL R9008
10u 1.3
1k 1 2 3
D 6.3V
5 Q9000
C9011
22u Q9002
2SA1576A-T106-R
1 2 3 1 2 3
1
2SA1576A-T106-R 1.1 4V FL9001 Q9004 1.3
2SA1576A-T106-R FL9002
6 4
2
C9032 3.1 6 4 6 4
FL9000
3
0.1u R9010 R9011 0.7 R9029 R9030 C9022 C9024
0.5 C9012 C9013 R9018 R9019 C9017 C9018 0.7
470 22k 22k 0.1u 0.1u
0.1u 0.1u 470 22k 0.1u 0.1u 470
R9014 R9023 R9033
C9034 470 470
10u 470
6.3V C9008
L9003 C9006
10uH 0.01u 47u
6.3V
E C9000
J_3V
47u C9001 C9002 R9001
6.3V 0.01u 0.01u 330
4-1
C9003 R9000 R9002
47u 330 330
6.3V
L9001 C9004
10uH 0.1u 2.8 0.3
R9003 R9004 5 4
1800 1200
IC9019
F IC9019
TC7SH32FU-TE85R
L9000
C9009
IC9006 1 2 3
10uH 0.01u IC9006
F 0.3 0
TC74VHC74FT(EL)
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
1.6
0.5
0.7
3.1 0.7
2.6 2.8
14
R9005
1
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37
8200 C9038
1.5 2.8 0.1u
C9014
13
2
R9006 0.01u
1 2 3 27k 1.5 1.4
12
4-2
3
G R9007
27k 2.8 1.5
R9025
0
11
CB00
4
1.2
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
1
CB01 1.2 1.3 1.4 2.8
10
2
5
CB02 1 1.3
3
1.5 1.4
CB03
9
1
4
R9026
CB04 1.1 0.5 C9010 XX
IC9000
5
8
0.1u
CB05 1.1
6
CB06 1.1 IC9000
IC9018
7
CXD2304R
H CB07 1.8 1.5
8
IC9018 4
CR00 1.2 1.5 TC74VHC221AFT(EL)
9
R9020
CR01 C9036 DI-73 BOARD (2/9)
XX
1.3 1.5
12 11 10
2.5 2.8 100p R9024
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
CR02 0
1
1.2
2.8 2.6 4-3
CR03
2
1.2
2.8 0 R9054 4-4
3
27k
0.3
4
C9035 2.8
100p
5
0 2.8
I
6
2.8 2.8
7
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 R9053 2.5
8
5600
1.1 0.8
1.1
1.1
1.8
1.1
1.1
0.9
0.8
1.5
1.3
1.1
C9037
0.1u
J
CR04
CR05
CR06
CR07
DY0
DY1
DY2
DY3
DY4
DY5
DY6
DY7
4-5
4-6
GND
4-7
K 2 RCK_1 4-8
DI-73 BOARD (3/9) MASK_HD
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL
L
CHROMA Y
05 PB
VIDEO D/A CONVERTER
DI-73 (1/9) 4-51 4-52
DSR-50/50P
DI-73 (VIDEO FIFO MEMORY) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-47 for DI-73 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DI-73 BOARD (2/9)
A VIDEO FIFO MEMORY
-REF.NO.:10,000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R:REC MODE
P:PB MODE
B J-3V
4-1
4-2 MHO
4-3 SPCK2
4-4
C IC9011
R9034
47k IC9011
M66280FP-280D
JC0 1.2 1.2 JC00
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1
JC1 1.2 1.2 JC01
2
JC2 1.1 1.1 JC02
3
JC3 1.1 1.1 JC03 JC00
JC00
4
R9039
R9043
R9036
D IC9005 IC9009 R9046 0.3 JC01
47k
47k
47k
4 47k JC01
5
2.6 2.6 JC02
IC9005 IC9009 JC02
6
DI-73 BOARD (1/9)
SN74HC377ANSR SN74HC377ANSR 2.8 JC03
JC03
7
0 2.8 1.4 2.8 1.5 1.3 JC04
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
JC04
1
8
CR00 1.2 1.8 CR07 CR0 1.2 1.8 CR7 JC4 1.1 1.1 JC04 JC05
JC05
2
9
CR0 1.2 1.8 CR7 JC0 1.2 1.8 JC7 JC5 1.1 1.1 JC05 JC06
12 11 10
JC06
3
3
CR1 1.3 1.1 CR6 JC1 1.2 1.1 JC6 JC6 1.1 1.1 JC06 JC07
JC07
4
4
CR01 1.3 1.1 CR06 CR1 1.3 1.1 CR6 JC7 1.8 1.8 JC07
5
5
CR02 1.2 1.1 CR05 CR2 1.2 1.1 CR5 R9040 R9044 R9047
E 47k 47k
6
6
47k
CR2 1.2 1.1 CR5 JC2 1.1 1.1 JC5
7
7
CR3 1.2 1.1 CR4 JC3 1.1 1.1 JC4
C9027
IC9015
8
8
Note:This signal follows the same
CR03 1.2 1.1 CR04 CR3 1.2 1.1 CR4 0.01u circuit as PB signal after
9
9
this point.
1.5 1.5 IC9015
10
10
TC74VHC541FT(EL)
C9016 MY07 0.8
0.01u
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
10
C9026 MY06 1 R0.9/P3.2
4-5 0.01u Y7
9
R0/P2.8 2.8
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MY05
1
1.2 R1.2/P3.2
F 4-6 Y6 7
8
2.6
MY04
2
1.4 R1.4/P3.2
Y5
7
R9016 2.6 DI-73 BOARD (9/9)
C9021 MY03
3
0 0.8 R1.3/P3.2
0.01u Y4
6
2.6
GND MY02 E-E
4
0.8 R0.9/P3.2
Y3
5
1.1
MY01
5
1.1 R0.9/P3.2
Y2
4
1.5 2.6
4-7 MY00
6
1 R1.3/P3.2
Y1
3
1.3 2.6
IC9008
7
R1/P3.2
Y0
2
2.6
4-8
9
2.8 R0/P2.8
IC9008
1
SN74HC377ANSR
(Note)
G
E-E
1.4 2.8
IC9012
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1
CB00 1.2 1.8 CB07
2
IC9012
JC0 1.2 1.8 JC7 TC74VHC157FT(EL) C9028
3
JC1 1.2 1.1 JC6 0.01u
4
CB01 1.2 1.1 CB06
5
CB02 1 1.1 CB05
IC9016
6
JC2 1.1 1.1 JC5
IC9013 IC9016
7
JC3 1.1 1.1 JC4 TC74VHC541FT(EL)
IC9004 IC9013
8
H CB03 1 1.1 CB04 M66280FP-280D MY07 0.8
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
10
9
IC9004 Y00 MY06
TC74VHC574FT(EL) 1.5 1.1 1 MY00 1 0.8
10
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
MY07
9
Y01 1.1 1.1 MY01 MY05 1.2 1.1
MY06
8
2.8
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
C9019
1
Y02 0.9 0.8 MY02 MY04 1.4 1.3
Y00 0.01u MY05
7
1.1 1.1 DY0
2
Y03 0.8 0.8 MY03 MY03 0.8 1.6
Y01 MY04
6
1.1 1.1 DY1
3
0.3 MY02 0.8 0.8
Y02 R9037 R9041 R9045 R9048 MY03
5
0.9 0.9 DY2
47k 47k 47k 47k
4
2.6 2.6 MY01 1.1 0.8
Y03 MY02
4
0.8 0.8 DY3
5
2.8 MY00 1 1.1
I Y04 MY01
3
1.5 1.5 DY4
6
1.5 1.3 1
Y05 MY00
2
1.3 1.3 DY5
MY04
7
Y04 1.5 1.4 2.8 R2.8/P0
Y06 C9029
1
1.1 1.1 DY6
MY05 0.01u
8
Y05 1.3 1.2
12 11 10
Y07 0.8 0.8 DY7 C9023 R9042 47k MY06
9
0.01u Y06 1.1 1
1.5
10
Y07 R9038 47k 0.8 0.8 MY07
R9035 R9049
47k 47k
J
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL
PB/XREC
CHROMA Y DA135
REC EE_WHDY 5 IC9014
K PB
EE_WHDC DI-73 BOARD (4/9)
IC9014
TC7WH04FU(TE12R)
R0/
C9025 P2.8 2.8
RCK_2
8
0.01u
05
RHD_Y
6 R2.8/P0
7
DI-73 BOARD (3/9)
RHD_C
6
4
5
R9051
0
R9050
L 0
VIDEO FIFO MEMORY
DI-73 (2/9)
4-53 4-54
DSR-50/50P
DI-73 (SYNC SHIFTER 1) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-47 for DI-73 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A
DI-73 BOARD (3/9)
SYNC SHIFTER 1
-REF.NO.:10,000 SERIES-
VIDEO_5V
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
10-1
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R:REC MODE
P:PB MODE
B IC9506
J_3V IC9503 IC9506
TC74VHC163FT(EL)
VIDEO_5V IC9503
L9500 AV9173-15CS08T 5 5
10uH
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
C9511 R9516
8 47u 10k 4.5 5 3 2.4 2.4
6.3V
2
DI-73 BOARD (9/9) 2.7 0.6 0.6 5
3
0 2.4 3
4
5 5 0
GND
5
C
6
IC9500 0.4 0.5
10-2
7
TC7W04FU(TE12R)
5
C9501
9
5
IC9500 0.1u C9503
0.1u
0
PAL/XNT Q9502
UN5213-TX
10-3
10-4
GND
D 9
DI-73 BOARD (9/9)
10-5
VD_HD
PB/XREC J_3V
10
R9515 XX
DI-73 BOARD (4/9)
2.5 2.8
5
0.2
2
E 2.6
4
C9510 100p
IC9505
TC7S32FU(TE85R)
IC9501 IC9502 IC9507
IC9501 IC9502 IC9505 IC9507
TC74VHC125FT(EL) TC74VHC393FT(EL) TC74VHC164FT(EL)
IC9508
0.1u
2.8 1.5 2.8 2.8 2.8
14
14
IC9508
1
1
14
1
TC7W74FU(TE12R)
F 2.5 0.2 2.6 2.5
C9500
2.7
13
13
2
2
1.5 2.8
13
2
8
1.5 2.7 2.5 2.6 2.8
12
12
3
7
12
2 RCK_1
3
2.8
IC9504
6
DI-73 BOARD (1/9) 2.5
1.5
11
11
MASK_HD
4
4
2.6
11
4
5
2.7 IC9504
10
10
5
5
10
TC7W241FU-TE12R
5
0.2 0.2 2.8
1.5 4.5 R0/P2.8 2.8
6
9
RCK_2
6
8
2.5 R0/P2.8
1.5
7
2.5
7
8
G
7
2.6 2.6
6
2.5
5
6
DI-73 BOARD (2/9)
C9504
0.1u
C9502 C9505
0.1u 0.1u
H R9517 0
R9512 0
RHD_Y
R9513 0
RHD_C
05
10-6
SYNC SHIFTER 1
DI-73 (3/9) 4-55 4-56
DSR-50/50P
DI-73 (SYNC SHIFTER 2) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-47 for DI-73 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
A
DI-73 BOARD (4/9)
SYNC SHIFTER 2
-REF.NO.:10,000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
IC9509
B IC9509 IC9512
TC74VHC163FT(EL)
IC9512
5 5 TC74VHC163FT(EL)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
VIDEO_5V
2.4 0.5 5 5
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
10-1
1
2.4 0.4
2
5 5
3
5
4
5 5
5
C 0.4 5
6
5 5 5
7
C9506 5
0.1u
9
C9508
10-2 0.1u
10-3
10-4
GND
D 10
10-5
J_3V
DI-73 BOARD (3/9)
E IC9510
IC9510 IC9513 IC9516
TC74VHC393FT(EL)
IC9513 IC9516
1.6 2.8 TC7WH74FU(TE12R) TC7WH04FU(TE12R)
14
1
0 2.8 1.1 2.8
8
2.6 0.2
13
2
2.8 2.8 1.6
7
2.6 2.6 2.8 0
12
3
6
F 2.8
5
11
4
10-6
10
5
0.2 0
6
9
C9509
7
8
0.1u
C9507
0.1u
G
11 SPCK2
DI-73 BOARD (9/9) AFH
R9514
0
EE_WHDY
5
DI-73 BOARD (2/9)
H EE_WHDC
IC9518
IC9518
IC9511
TC7S32FU(TE85R) IC9511
TC74VHC164FT(EL) IC9517
0 2.8
IC9517
1
2.8 2.8
IC9514 IC9515
14
TC74VHC221AFT(EL)
1
2.5
2
2.6 2.6 2.5 2.8
I
13
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
IC9514 IC9515
3
1
TC7W241FU-TE12R TC7W241FU-TE12R R9536 XX 0 2.6 R9518 5600
R9508 0 R9520 XX R9532 0
2
12
3
0 2.8 0 2.8 2.8 0 C9513
R9524 R9537 XX
1
3
100p
2.5 0 2.5 0 XX R9528 XX R9501 XX R9504 XX R9509 XX R9521 XX R9533 XX 0
11
2
4
2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 R9525 R9538 XX
XX R9529 XX R9502 XX R9505 XX R9510 XX R9522 XX R9534 XX
3
5
10
5
2.5 2.5
R9526 R9539 XX
4
6
XX R9530 XX R9503 XX R9506 XX 2.5 2.8 R9511 XX R9523 XX R9535 XX
C9514
IC9519
0.1u
R9527
0 R9519 0 R9507 XX
9
R9531 XX 1.1
8
IC9519
J TC7S32FU(TE85R)
0 2.8
1
2.5
2
C9516
0.1u
2.6
3
C9515
0.1u
C9512
0.1u
05
SYNC SHIFTER 2
4-57 4-58 DI-73 (4/9)
DSR-50/50P
DI-73 (AUDIO HPF) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-47 for DI-73 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
DI-73 BOARD (5/9)
A AUDIO HPF
-REF.NO.:10,000 SERIES-
A.-5V
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
A.+5V
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
13-1
AU_X2_IN
R7086 R7095 GND
AU_Y2_IN 4700
4700
13-2
AU_2_GND_IN
R7030 R7008
B C7000
0.22u
R7014
3300
R7024
3300
10k 0
R7083
100
C7028
R7046 10k
C7022 C7026 10u
C7008
XX R7015
10u
6.3V R7031
10k
R7040
10k
10u
6.3V
R7042
10k
IC7004 6.3V
3300
2.5
2.5
2.5
R7050 R7051
IC7004 10k 10k
C7001 TC74HC4053AFT(EL)
0.22u C7016 R7026 4 3 2 1
R7058
10u 10k 2.5 5 10k IC7008
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
6.3V
1
C7009 R7002 R7204
XX 3300
2.5 2.5
100 13
2
R7203
C 2.5 2.5 IC7008
NJM2115V(TE2)
100 DI-73 BOARD (6/9)
3
2.5 2.5 IC7013
R7062
C7202
4700
4
47p 2.5 5
8
2.5 2.5
-4.9
-4.9
5
2.5 2.5
R7502
R7501
C7201 IC7013
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
47p NJM2115V(TE2)
6
2.5 2.5
6
4 3 2 1 0
4 3 2 1 R7080
7
2.5
4700
5
0
9
R7063
100 5 6 7 8
IC7000 IC7002
2.5
2.5
2.5
5
D C7036
IC7002 R7076 XX
IC7000 NJM2115V(TE2)
NJM4580V(TE2) 100
13-3
R7085 R7089
4700 4700
13-4
5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
AUDIO_GND
R7003
R7087
0
0
0
0
0
5
3300
100
C7004
E 0.22u
R7016
3300 0
Q7001 2.8
UN9211J-
C7010 R7017 (K8).SO
XX 3300
C7011 R7022
XX 3300
C7005
0.22u IC7005 C7029
10u
F 6.3V
IC7010
IC7005
TC74HC4053AFT(EL) R7052 R7053
10k 10k IC7010
Q7002 NJM2115V(TE2)
2.5 5 R7066 R7071
UN9211J- 2.8
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
C7017 6800 100
2.5 2.5 (K8).SO 2.5 5
10u
8
R7027
2
6.3V 10k C7024 2.5 2.5 R7093
10u 2.5 2.5
7
AU_X1_IN R7038 R7043 100 R7098
3
6.3V 0
10k 10k 2.5 2.5 R7059 2.5 2.5 6800
6
AU_Y1_IN 10k
4
R7047 2.5 2.5
C7020 R7036 R7034 2.5
5
R7156 10k
5
10u 10k 10k
6.3V 0 0 R7067 C7032 C7034
G AU_1_GND_IN 10k 10u 10u R7099
6
6.3V 10k
0 6.3V
7
0
8
9
12 XCH2_HPF 14
DI-73 BOARD (9/9) XCH1_HPF DI-73 BOARD (8/9)
A.+5V
C7018 R7064
10u R7028 4700
6.3V 10k 15-1
AU_X4_IN R7041 R7097
10k R7096 4700
AU_Y4_IN R7084 4700 15-2
100
H C7023
10u
R7033
10k R7032
10k
R7009
0
6.3V
AU_4_GND_IN
R7048
2.5
2.5
2.5
C7002 R7018 R7025
3300 10k
0.22u 3300
4 3 2 1
C7012 C7027 C7030
XX 10u
6.3V
10u
6.3V
R7206
IC7009 R7205
100
IC7006 100
R7055
C7003 R7054
10k
IC7014
-4.9
0.22u 10k IC7009
I R7081
0
0
IC7006 NJM2115V(TE2) 4700
C7204
C7013 R7019 TC74HC4053AFT(EL) 47p
4 3 2 1 R7060 2.5 5
XX 3300 IC7014
8
2.5 5 10k
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 2.5 2.5 NJM2115V(TE2)
15
1
C7203
-4.9
7
R7006 2.5 2.5 47p
2.5 2.5
0
0
0
3300 DI-73 BOARD (6/9)
6
2.5 2.5 2.5
3
4 3 2 1
5
2.5 2.5
4
R7065
IC7001 R7044 2.5 2.5 100
5 6 7 8
5
10k
2.5
2.5
2.5
5
0
6
IC7001
J NJM4580V(TE2) IC7003 0
7
0
8
5 6 7 8 IC7003
R7007 NJM2115V(TE2) 15-3
R7088 R7091
3300 100
0
0
0
4700
15-4
R7090
C7006 4700
5 6 7 8 0 AUDIO_GND
0.22u
C7037
0
0
5
R7077 XX
Q7003 2.8
C7014 R7020 100
XX 3300 UN9211J-
K (K8).SO
C7015 R7021
XX 3300
GND
C7007 R7023 C7019
10u C7031
0.22u 3300 R7029
AU_X3_IN
6.3V 10k R7049
10k IC7007 10u
6.3V
IC7011
R7068
AU_Y3_IN 6800
IC7007
C7021 R7037 R7039 C7025 R7045 TC74HC4053AFT(EL) R7056 R7057 IC7011
10u 10k R7035 10k R7157 10u 10k 10k 10k NJM2115V(TE2)
6.3V 10k 0 6.3V R7072
05 2.5 5
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AU_3_GND_IN 100
1
2.5 5
R7061
8
2.5 2.5
10k R7094
2
Q7000 2.5 2.5
100
7
2.5 2.5
SIGNAL PATH UN9211J-
L
3
(K8).SO 2.5 2.5
R7100
6
2.6 2.5
6800
4
2.5
5
2.5 2.5
AUDIO 0 R7069 C7033 C7035
5
10k 10u R7101
0 10u 10k
SIGNAL 6.3V 6.3V
6
0
7
2.8
0 XCH4_HPF 16
REC
8
XCH3_HPF DI-73 BOARD (8/9)
AUDIO HPF
DI-73 (5/9) 4-59 4-60
DSR-50/50P
DI-73 (AUDIO A/D, D/A CONVERTER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-47 for DI-73 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
DI-73 BOARD (6/9)
A AUDIO A/D,D/A CONVERTER
-REF.NO.:10,000 SERIES- NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
XX MARK:NO MOUNT *:IMPOSSIBLE TO MEASURE THE
VOLTAGE AT THE MARKED POINTS.
A.-5V
A.+5V A.+5V
13-1 +2.8V
17
B GND
C7101 C7100
GND
DI-73 BOARD (9/9)
13-2 6.8u 16V 10u 10V
A.-5V
AUDIO_GND
AU_GND2_OUT
R7116 C7061
0 22u R7130 R7202 R7138
4V 4700 4700 1500
C7305 R7304 C7063
22u 4V 4700p
4700 R7303
220
18
R7134
220 AU_CH2_OUT DI-73 BOARD (9/9)
C R7307
1500
R7127
4700
C7065
680p
R7153
100
AU_CH1_OUT
C7050
4.7u
6.3V
IC7016 C7306
R7152
100
680p
AU_GND1_OUT
IC7016
AK4528VF-E2
C7038 C7040
6.8u 0.1u C7052 -4.9 0 0 0
0.1u 2.5 2.5 A.AD_DATA1
13 16V
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
C7043 SIA
1
2200p 2.5 2.5 4 3 2 1 A.DA_DATA1
DI-73 BOARD (5/9) SOC
2
R7105 470 2.5 2.5 XPD_AD1
D XPD_AD1
3
R7106 470 2.5 2.5 XPD_DA1
XPD_DA1
13-3
IC7020
4
C7301
R7107 470 2.5 0.1u C7302
13-4 L7301
5
10u
R7108 470 C7044 2200p 5 5 10V 10uH DEM1
DEM1
6
C7053 IC7020
2.8 10u 10V NJM3414AV(TE2) DEM0
DEM0
7
5 0 C7051 DEM1 BCK
0.1u BCK
8
C7039 C7041 2.8 2.8 DEM0 LRCK
6.8u LRCK
9
0.1u
16V MCK 0.8 2.3 XPD_AD1 MCK
14 13 12 11 10
MCK
LRCK C7308
1.5 XPD_DA1 680p 5 6 7 8
E BCK 1.4 D7301 C7307
0 0 0 5
R7301 MA132WK-TX 22u R7308
A.AD_DATA1 * 10k 4V 4700 19
A.DA_DATA1 * R7310
220 DI-73 BOARD (7/9)
R7309 R7128 C7062
1500 4700 4700p
C7060 R7129 R7131 C7064
22u 4700 220 680p
4V
F R7115 0
R7201
4700
R7135
1500
AUDIO_GND
A.+5V
R7403 5 A.AD_DATA2
15-1 47k SIB
4.9 Q7007 A.DA_DATA2
R7147 2SA1576A SOD
15-2 100k -T106-R XPD_AD2
R7149 XPD_AD2
R7404 47k XPD_DA2
100k -0.3 XPD_DA2
G
AU_GND4_OUT
R7120
0 C7058
22u R7124 C7405
4V 4700 2.2u
Q7005
C7054 2SC3326N
4.7u
6.3V IC7018 C7401 R7137
22u 4V 4700
C7067
4700p R7123 R7146
4700
-TE85L-B
220 R7136
4.9
R7406 4700 -0.2
IC7018 R7144 R7148
C7045 C7047 AK4528VF-E2 1500 100k 2.5
6.8u C7056 220
0.1u R7405 R7139
H 16V 0.1u
2.5 2.5 1500 4700 0
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
C7048 Q7008
1
R7109 470 2200p 2.5 2.5 2SC4081T106R
C7403 C7069 2.8
2
15 R7110 470 2.5 2.5 680p 680p
3
DI-73 BOARD (5/9) R7111 470 2.5 AU_CH4_OUT
2.5
15-3
4
C7303 R7150
R7112 470 2.5 0.1u 100
15-4 C7304 L7302
5
10u 10uH
C7049 2200p 5 5 10V
6
C7057
2.8 10u 10V
7
-4.9 0 0 0
5 0 C7055 DEM1
0.1u
I
8
DEM0 4 3 2 1
C7042 C7046 2.8 2.8
20
9
6.8u 0.1u
16V MCK 0.8 2.3 XPD_AD2
14 13 12 11 10
DI-73 BOARD (9/9)
AUDIO_GND LRCK 1.5 XPD_DA2
BCK
A.AD_DATA2
1.4
*
R7302
10k
D7302
MA132WK-TX IC7021
A.DA_DATA2 * IC7021
NJM3414AV(TE2)
GND
J 5 6 7 8
C7404 0 0 0 5
680p
SIGNAL PATH C7402
22u R7132
4V 4700
AUDIO R7125
R7407 R7140 220 AU_CH3_OUT
SIGNAL 1500 4700 R7143 C7068
680p R7151 Q7004
220 100 2SC3326N 0
C7059 R7126 C7066 -TE85L-B
K REC
22u 4V 4700 4700p
R7133
4700 -0.2
R7122 R7408 R7145
0 4700 1500
PB AU_GND3_OUT
05
21
DA_CH3/4_ON
DI-73 BOARD (8/9)
AUDIO A/D, D/A CONVERTER
4-61 4-62 DI-73 (6/9)
http://getMANUAL.com
DSR-50/50P
DI-73 (AUDIO DSP) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-47 for DI-73 printed wiring board. • See page 4-149 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
DI-73 BOARD (7/9)
A AUDIO DSP
-REF.NO.:10,000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
*:IMPOSSIBLE TO MEASURE THE
VOLTAGE AT THE MARKED POINTS. L8202
22 10uH
DI-73 BOARD (9/9) +2.8V
B L8201
R8040
10uH IC8000 R8003
IC8002 C8005
C8007
0.01u
C8013
0.01u 0
10k
33u
XX 10V
7 IC8000 IC8001
TC7S08FU(TE85R)
IC8002 TC7W74FU(TE12R)
GND
TC7SU04FU(TE85R)
1.3 2.8
8
C8000 2.8 1.3 2.8
0.01u
1
5
1.4 2.8
7
1.4 1.3
2.8 2.8
2
2
1.4 2.8
6
1.3 1.3
3
4
1.6 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61
5
C
R8002
220k
X8000
24.576MHz IC8001
C8006
R8215 0.01u
10 0
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91
C8001 C8002
10p 10p
D
DATA_FROM_SFD
SIC
23 SID
ADAO2
DI-73 BOARD (9/9) DATA_TO_SFD
SOA CL8002 1.6 2.8
SOB
ADAI2
C8003
CL8003
8 C8021
0.01u
0.01u
0
A.AD_DATA1
SIA
E SOC
A.DA_DATA1
IC8003
XPD_AD1
XPD_AD1 CL8004
XPD_DA1
XPD_DA1 IC8003
CXD2712R
DEM1
DEM1 25
DEM0 DI-73 BOARD (8/9)
19 DEM0 2.8
C8004
DI-73 BOARD (6/9) BCK 0.01u C8020
0.01u
F LRCK
MCK
0
1.4
A.AD_DATA2
SIB 1.4
A.DA_DATA2
SOD 1.5
XPD_AD2
XPD_AD2 1.5
XPD_DA2
XPD_DA2 A.AD_DATA1 *
A.AD_DATA2 *
CL7401 A2CH/X4CH
DATA_FROM_SFD *
G ADAO2 *
R8001
0
24 SFD_FCK
DI-73 BOARD (9/9) BCK
LRCK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
2.7 2.8
2.8
2.8
2.7
2.1
2.7
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.8
2.2
2.2
2.2
* * * *
H
CL8005
SIGNAL PATH
DATA_TO_SFD CL8006
ADAI2
C8008 C8016
AUDIO 0.01u 0.01u
A_XHDWR
A.DA_DATA1
A_XHDRD
A_XHDCS
SIGNAL
A_HRDY
A_HD0
A_HD1
A_HD2
A_HD3
A_HD4
A_HD5
A_HD6
A_HD7
A_HA0
A.DA_DATA2
I 25-1
REC 25-2
05
PB 25-3
AUDIO DSP
DI-73 (7/9) 4-63 4-64
DSR-50/50P
DI-73 (AUDIO DSP CONTROL) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-47 for DI-73 printed wiring board. • See page 4-149 for waveform.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
A
DI-73 BOARD (8/9) TC/REC_DATA
AUDIO DSP CONTROL TC/PB_DATA
26
DI-73 BOARD (9/9)
-REF.NO.:10,000 SERIES- TC/XTHRU
XX MARK:NO MOUNT TC_XNT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
*:IMPOSSIBLE TO MEASURE THE
VOLTAGE AT THE MARKED POINTS.
VR/AD_SI
VR/AD_SO
VR/AD_SCK
VFD_OE
VFD_VD
VFD_HD
R8212 R8213
100k 100k
R8059
R8051 100k C8100
R8205
10u R8214
100k
0 R8211
10V 100k 100k
R8063
R8061
R8060
33
33
33
CL8013
C C8024
0.01u
XRST_VSP
XRST_VSP
XVSP_SCK
XVSP_SCK
GND VSP_SO
VSP_SO
VSP_SI_DSP
2.8
2.8
2.7
2.8
1.5
2.8
2.6
1.5
2.8
VSP_SI
0 * 0 XCS_DSP R8204 XX
2.8
XCS_DSP
100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76
R8069
1k
VFD_OE
27
D VFD_VD
VFD_OE DI-73 BOARD (9/9)
VFD_VD
VFD_HD
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75
1
VFD_HD
2
3
2.7 A_HRDY VR/AD_CS
4
X8001 VR/AD_CS
4.608MHz 2.8 2.7 A_HA0 VR/AD_SI
5
R8049 VR/AD_SI
1M 2.1 A_XHDCS VR/AD_SO
6
C8101 VR/AD_SO
1.4 2.7 A_XHDRD VR/AD_SCK
E
15p
1.5 7
8
9 2.8 A_XHDWR
VR/AD_SCK
2.8
9
C8102
15p 2.8 L8203
XRST_VSP
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
10uH 28
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
100k
IC8009 R8070 R8077
+2.8V DI-73 BOARD (9/9)
CL8204 100k 100k
2.6
R8076
R8074
R8075
R8071
R8072
R8073
IC8009 2.8
HD6433837TSC73X 8 7 6 5
F 0
TC7W241FU-TE12R
2.2 A_HD7
2.2 A_HD6
CL8007
2.2 A_HD5 IC8201
CL8008 2.8 2.1 A_HD4
25 R8047 100k 2.1 A_HD3
CL8009
IC8201
DI-73 BOARD (7/9) XVSP_SCK 2.7 2.1 A_HD2
VSP_SO 0.8 2.1
G VSP_SI_DSP 2.8 2.1
A_HD1
A_HD0
1 2 3 4
2.8 2.8
CL8010 2.8
R8048
100k
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
H 2.8 2.8 0 2.8
2.8
2.6
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
0.3
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
XCS_DSP CL8014
XCH1_HPF
VR/AD_CS CL8015 14 DI-73 BOARD (5/9)
XCH2_HPF
R8046 R8206 CL8016
33 100k XCH3_HPF
CL8017 16 DI-73 BOARD (5/9)
C8027 XCH4_HPF
CL8018
0.01u R8064
R8207 100k
DA_CH3/4_ON 21 DI-73 BOARD (6/9)
100k
R8065
I R8058
100k
R8066
R8079
100k
100k 100k
R8067 R8080
CL8011
100k 0
AUDIO_GND
CL8012
R8068
100k 29
DI-73 BOARD (9/9)
GND
R8062 1k
25-1
J 25-2
A2CH/X4CH
XPD_AD1
XPD_AD2
XPD_DA1
XPD_DA2
DEM0
DEM1
25-3
K
05
AUDIO DSP CONTROL
4-65 4-66 DI-73 (8/9)
DSR-50/50P
DI-73 (TIME CODE IN/OUT) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-47 for DI-73 printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DI-73 BOARD (9/9)
Q8202
2SC4081T106R
A 5
LND9501
TIME CODE IN/OUT R8014
22k IC8004
GND
-REF.NO.:10,000 SERIES- 2.5 LND9502
XX MARK:NO MOUNT R8010
C8012
10u
10V
R8015
10k R8026
IC8006 GND
6800 22k
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE TC/IN
LND9503
R8100 R8021 IC8004 IC8006
10 6800 TLV2231CDBVR TC75S56F(TE85R) GND
R8031
R8011 22k
B 6800 2.5 5 0.8 2.8
5
LND9504
R8020 R8034 GND
2
0 10k
2.5 2.5 0.8 0
4
R8016
22k R8035 LND9505
2.5 10k
GND
C8009 R8017 C8017 C8018 R8039
10u 10k 22u 6.8u 1M
4V R8037
10V 16V 10 LND9506
TC/GNDIN
GND
Q8201
2SC4081T106R
IC8008 LND9507
C JC00
R8201
GND
JC01 180 C8022
R8044 IC8008
4.7u 6.3V TLV2231CDBVR LND9508
JC02 10k
JC03 R8032 180 1.5 2.8 GND
5
JC04 R8024
6800
2
JC05 R8013 R8018 R8025 IC8005 1.5 1.5
4
XX 150 R8056
TC/OUT 6800
C8026
1500p
JC06
C8025
100k
4700p
JC07
IC8007 R8050 TC/REC_DATA
D 4.3
NJM4556AM-A-TE2 0 0 0 R8041
3300
18k R8052
XX
IC8011 TC_XNT
26
DI-73 BOARD (8/9)
IC8007
R8055
8 7 6 5 TC/PB_DATA
100
C8010 TC74HC4053AFT(EL)
R8053
100
Y0 100u TC/XTHRU
6.3V 0 5 1.4 4.9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
Y1 5 0
0
TC7W53FU(TE12R)
C8011
2
Y2 R8042 8 7 6 5
E-E 100u 100k 2.8 1.4
3
Y3 6.3V
TC7S08FU(TE85R)
IC8010
1 2 3 4 0
IC8005
4
Y4 R8043 5 4 XRST_VSP
0 0 0 -4.2 0 100k Q8000
IC8010 4.9
IC8011
R8019 R8038 CL8202
5
Y5 1500 XVSP_SCK
150 0 UN9211J- Q8001
(K8).SO
E UN9211J-(K8).SO
6
Y6 R8033 VSP_SO
R8209
R8036
C8023
R8023
-4.9 0 0 1 2 3 4
R8022
100k
1k R8203 XX R8045 1k VSP_SI
7
Y7 1 2 3
0
10k
0
1800 10V
0 2.6 1.5 0
-4.9
C8201
0.01u
9
R8057 0 XCS_DSP
1.5
7 R8012 C8014 6800
1.5 27
CL8201
R8027
R8028
47u C8019 VFD_OE
XX
XX
DI-73 BOARD (8/9)
XX
DI-73 BOARD (2/9) 6.3V R8029 4.7u
10 6.3V R8054
TC/GNDOUT 0 R8208 1k VFD_VD
MY00
CL8203 VFD_HD
MY01 R8210
C8015 1k VR/AD_CS
47u R8030
MY02 6.3V 180 VR/AD_SI
F MY03
MY04
VR/AD_SO
R8202 VR/AD_SCK
MY05 180
MY06
MY07
R8008 R8007
MHO 0 0
E-E
SIC
G SPCK2 23
SID
DI-73 BOARD (7/9)
AU_GND2_OUT
SOA
18
CL9553
CL9554
CL9555
CL9556
CL9557
CL9558
CL9559
CL9560
CL9561
CL9562
CL9563
CL9564
CL9565
CL9566
CL9567
CL9568
CL9603
CL9572
CL9573
CL9574
CL9575
CL9576
CL9577
CL9604
CL9578
CL9605
CL9579
CL9580
CL9581
CL9582
CL9583
CL9584
CL9585
CL9586
CL9587
CL9588
CL9589
CL9590
CL9591
CL9592
CL9594
CL9596
CL9598
CL9600
AU_CH2_OUT
SOB
DI-73 BOARD (6/9)
PB/XREC AU_CH1_OUT
SFD_SCK
DA135 AU_GND1_OUT 24
BCK
CL9550
DI-73 BOARD (7/9)
AU_GND4_OUT
AU_GND1_OUT 102
AU_X3_IN 112
AU_CH2_OUT 100
AU_X4_IN 108
AU_CH1_OUT 104
AU_3_GND_IN 110
AU_1_GND_IN 118
AU_4_GND_IN 106
AU_2_GND_IN 114
AU_X2_IN 116
AU_X1_IN 120
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
72
74
76
78
80
82
84
86
88
90
92
94
96
98
2
4
6
LRCK
20
H AU_CH4_OUT
DPB_YOUT
GND
DPB_CROUT
GND
DPB_CBOUT
GND
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
GND
JC00
JC01
JC02
JC03
JC04
JC05
JC06
JC07
N.C
J_3V
VIDEO_+5V
VIDEO_-5V
SIC
SID
SFD_BCK
BCK
SFD_LRCK
LRCK
N.C
VFD_HD
GND
N.C
XVSP_SCK
VSP_SO
GND
DSP_SCK
DSP_SO
TC/GNDOUT
TC_OUT
AU_GND4_OUT
AU_CH4_OUT
You might also like
- Actis - WA - FY19-20 - 152 - Pharma MCC-9 Panel Drawing - R00No ratings yetActis - WA - FY19-20 - 152 - Pharma MCC-9 Panel Drawing - R0027 pages
- Comparison Chart: Sony HDR - FX1 Sony HVR - Z1 JVC GY - HD100/GY-HD101 Canon XLH1No ratings yetComparison Chart: Sony HDR - FX1 Sony HVR - Z1 JVC GY - HD100/GY-HD101 Canon XLH13 pages
- Hydraulic Turbines: 1.0 Basic TerminologiesNo ratings yetHydraulic Turbines: 1.0 Basic Terminologies21 pages
- Cystophora Cristata (Erxleben, 1777) : Phoc Cysto 1 SezNo ratings yetCystophora Cristata (Erxleben, 1777) : Phoc Cysto 1 Sez6 pages
- ODONATA (Dragonflies) : EPHEMEROPTERA (Mayflies)No ratings yetODONATA (Dragonflies) : EPHEMEROPTERA (Mayflies)6 pages
- Hvr-Z1U: Digital HD Video Camera RecorderNo ratings yetHvr-Z1U: Digital HD Video Camera Recorder12 pages
- JVC GY-DV500U (MiniDV) Technical BrochureNo ratings yetJVC GY-DV500U (MiniDV) Technical Brochure10 pages
- ABB ICSTT-SDS-8402 - en Plantguard Dual 24 VDC Digital Input Module P8402No ratings yetABB ICSTT-SDS-8402 - en Plantguard Dual 24 VDC Digital Input Module P84022 pages
- Evaluation of Interface Shear Strength Properties of GeogridReinforced Construction and Demolition Materials Using A Modified Large-Scale Direct Shear Testing ApparatusNo ratings yetEvaluation of Interface Shear Strength Properties of GeogridReinforced Construction and Demolition Materials Using A Modified Large-Scale Direct Shear Testing Apparatus9 pages
- AJ-HPX2000: P2 Cam - Memory Card Camera RecorderNo ratings yetAJ-HPX2000: P2 Cam - Memory Card Camera Recorder8 pages
- Kalana Maduwage: Identification of Venomous Snakes of Sri LankaNo ratings yetKalana Maduwage: Identification of Venomous Snakes of Sri Lanka2 pages
- NBR 6118 and Eurocode 2: Comparative Analysis On Dimensioning of Slabs and Beams of Reinforced ConcreteNo ratings yetNBR 6118 and Eurocode 2: Comparative Analysis On Dimensioning of Slabs and Beams of Reinforced Concrete10 pages
- SR-VS30E: Superior Picture Quality and Dual-Format Design Make This Deck An Excellent Choice For NLE Systems100% (2)SR-VS30E: Superior Picture Quality and Dual-Format Design Make This Deck An Excellent Choice For NLE Systems4 pages
- 18th Annual Pelican Island Wildlife FestivalNo ratings yet18th Annual Pelican Island Wildlife Festival4 pages
- 1080P HD LCD TV With Clearframe 120Hz: PreliminaryNo ratings yet1080P HD LCD TV With Clearframe 120Hz: Preliminary2 pages
- 6.1 Dress Standards For Formal Areas - Island and CityNo ratings yet6.1 Dress Standards For Formal Areas - Island and City4 pages
- Classification of Living Thingsbiologygrade 9b Myp 4 4emesecond Term2023 20241713261495No ratings yetClassification of Living Thingsbiologygrade 9b Myp 4 4emesecond Term2023 2024171326149512 pages
- Front Panel: Professional DV Camcorders GY-DV500E GY-DV300ENo ratings yetFront Panel: Professional DV Camcorders GY-DV500E GY-DV300E4 pages
- Snakes in India - Tradition and The Truth PDFNo ratings yetSnakes in India - Tradition and The Truth PDF5 pages
- releasenote-K9B2 V4.75.200build231110 ReleaseNotesNo ratings yetreleasenote-K9B2 V4.75.200build231110 ReleaseNotes9 pages
- Simulation and Design of A Single Phase Inverter With Digital PWM Issued by An Arduino BoardNo ratings yetSimulation and Design of A Single Phase Inverter With Digital PWM Issued by An Arduino Board9 pages
- Report DT Bandara Mopah Merauke (Before-After)No ratings yetReport DT Bandara Mopah Merauke (Before-After)23 pages
- 88 Conquest Service Manual - Group 21 - Transmission Manual AutomaticNo ratings yet88 Conquest Service Manual - Group 21 - Transmission Manual Automatic122 pages